Emotron Fdu2 0 - Manual - 01 5325 01r5.en

Emotron FDU 2.
0
AC drive
Instruction manual
English
Valid from software version 4.42
Emotron FDU 2.0
INSTRUCTION MANUAL - ENGLISH
Valid from Software version 4.42
Document number: 01-5325-01

Edition: r5
Date of release: 07-10-2019
© Copyright CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB 2005 - 2019
CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB retains the right to change
specifications and illustrations in the text, without prior notification.
The contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit
permission of CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB.
Safety Instructions
Congratulations for choosing a product from CG Drives & Precautions to be taken with a
Automation!
connected motor
Before you begin with installation, commissioning or
If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the
powering up the unit for the first time it is very important
driven machine, the mains voltage must always be
that you carefully study this Instruction manual.
disconnected from the AC drive first. Wait at least 7minutes
Following symbols can appear in this instruction or on the
before starting work.
product itself. Always read these first before continuing.
NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoid Earthing

problems. The AC drive must always be earthed via the mains safety
earth connection.
CAUTION!
! Failure to follow these instructions can

result in malfunction or damage to the
Earth leakage current
AC drive.
CAUTION!
Warning! ! This AC drive has an earth leakage

current which does exceed 3.5 mA AC.
Failure to follow these instructions can Therefore the minimum size of the
result in serious injury to the user in protective earth conductor must comply with the
addition to serious damage to the AC local safety regulations for high leakage current
drive. equipment which means that according to the
standard IEC61800-5-1 the protective earth
connection must be assured by one of following
HOT SURFACE! conditions:
Failure to follow these instructions can PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for
result in injury to the user. phase cable size < 16 mm2 (6 AWG) be >10 mm2
Cu (16 mm2 Al) or use a second PE conductor
with same area as original PE conductor.
Handling the AC drive For cable size above 16 mm2 (6 AWG) but smaller
or equal to 35mm2 (2 AWG) the PE conductor
Installation, commissioning, demounting, taking cross-sectional area shall be at least 16mm2
measurements, etc, of or on the AC drive may only be (6 AWG).
carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task. For cables >35 mm2 (2 AWG) the PE conductor
A number of national, regional and local regulations govern cross-sectional area should be at least 50 % of
handling, storage and installation of the equipment. Always the used phase conductor.
observe current rules and legislation. When the PE conductor in the used cable type is
not in accordance with the above mentioned
cross-sectional area requirements, a separate
Opening the AC drive PE conductor should be used to establish this.
WARNING!
Always switch off the mains voltage Residual current device (RCD)
before opening the AC drive and wait compatibility
at least 7 minutes to allow the
capacitors to discharge. This product cause a DC current in the protective
conductor. Where a residual current device (RCD) is used
for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only a
Always take adequate precautions before opening the AC Type B RCD is allowed on the supply side of this product.
drive. Although the connections for the control signals and Use RCD of 300 mA minimum.
the switches are isolated from the main voltage, do not
touch the control board when the AC drive is switched on.
EMC Regulations
In order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutely
Incorrect connection necessary to follow the installation instructions. All
The AC drive is not protected against incorrect connection installation descriptions in this manual follow the EMC
of the mains voltage, and in particular against connection of Directive.
the mains voltage to the motor outlets U, V and W. The AC
drive can be damaged in this way. Risk for personal injury.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 1

Mains voltage selection Heat warning
The AC drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage
range listed below. HOT SURFACE!
FDU48: 230-480 V Be aware of specific parts on the AC
drive having high temperature.
FDU52: 440-525 V
FDU69: 500-690 V
Voltage tests (Megger) DC-link residual voltage

Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, before
all the motor cables have been disconnected from the AC WARNING!
drive. After switching off the mains supply,
dangerous voltage can still be present
in the AC drive. When opening the AC
Condensation drive for installing and/or
commissioning activities wait at least 7 minutes.
If the AC drive is moved from a cold (storage) room to a
In case of malfunction a qualified technician
room where it will be installed, condensation can occur. should check the DC-link or wait for one hour
This can result in sensitive components becoming damp. Do before dismantling the AC drive for repair.
not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has
evaporated.
Power factor capacitors for

improving cosϕ
Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet.
Precautions during Autoreset

When the automatic reset is active, the motor will restart
automatically provided that the cause of the trip has been
removed. If necessary take the appropriate precautions.
Transport
To avoid damage, keep the AC drive in its original
packaging during transport. This packaging is specially
designed to absorb shocks during transport.
IT Mains supply
The AC drives can be modified for an IT mains supply,
(non-earthed neutral), please contact your supplier for
details.
Alarms
Never disregard an alarm. Always check and remedy the
cause of an alarm.
2 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Contents 4.5
4.5.1
Connecting the Control Signals..............................
Cables ......................................................................
51
51
4.5.2 Types of control signals .......................................... 53
Safety Instructions ......................................... 1 4.5.3 Screening................................................................. 53
4.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended connection? ......... 53
Contents .......................................................... 3 4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA).................................. 54
4.5.6 Twisted cables......................................................... 54
1. Introduction..................................................... 7 4.6 Connecting options ................................................. 54
1.1 Delivery and unpacking ............................................ 7
1.2 Using of the instruction manual............................... 7 5. Getting Started............................................. 55
1.2.1 Instruction manuals for optional equipment........... 7 5.1 Connect the mains and motor cables ................... 55
1.3 Warranty .................................................................... 8 5.1.1 Mains cables ........................................................... 55
1.4 Type code number..................................................... 9 5.1.2 Motor cables............................................................ 55
1.5 Standards ................................................................ 10 5.2 Using the function keys .......................................... 56
1.5.1 Product standard for EMC ...................................... 10 5.3 Remote control........................................................ 56
1.6 Dismantling and scrapping..................................... 11 5.3.1 Connect control cables ........................................... 56
1.6.1 Disposal of old electrical and electronic equipment . 11 5.3.2 Switch on the mains ............................................... 56
1.7 Glossary ................................................................... 12 5.3.3 Set the Motor Data.................................................. 57
1.7.1 Abbreviations and symbols..................................... 12 5.3.4 Run the AC drive...................................................... 57
1.7.2 Definitions................................................................ 12 5.4 Local control ............................................................ 57
5.4.1 Switch on the mains ............................................... 57
2. Mounting ...................................................... 13
5.4.2 Select manual control............................................. 57
2.1 Lifting instructions................................................... 13 5.4.3 Set the Motor Data.................................................. 57
2.2 Stand-alone units .................................................... 14
5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value......................................... 57
2.2.1 Cooling ..................................................................... 14
5.4.5 Run the AC drive...................................................... 57
2.2.2 Mounting schemes.................................................. 15
2.3 Cabinet mounting.................................................... 22 6. Applications.................................................. 59
2.3.1 Cooling ..................................................................... 22 6.1 Application overview ............................................... 59
2.3.2 Recommended free space in front of cabinet ...... 22 6.1.1 Pumps ...................................................................... 59
2.3.3 Mounting schemes, cabinets ................................. 23 6.1.2 Fans ......................................................................... 59
6.1.3 Compressors ........................................................... 60
3. Installation ................................................... 25
6.1.4 Blowers .................................................................... 60
3.1 Before installation................................................... 25
3.1.1 Remove/open front cover ...................................... 25 7. Main Features .............................................. 61
3.1.2 Remove/open the lower front cover on 7.1 Parameter sets........................................................ 61
Frame size E2, F2 and FA2 (IP20/21)................... 26
7.1.1 One motor and one parameter set ........................ 62
3.2 Cable connections for small and medium
frame sizes .............................................................. 26 7.1.2 One motor and two parameter sets....................... 62
3.2.1 Mains cables ........................................................... 26 7.1.3 Two motors and two parameter sets ..................... 62
3.2.2 Motor cables............................................................ 29 7.1.4 Autoreset at trip ...................................................... 62
3.3 Connection of motor and mains cables for 7.1.5 Reference priority.................................................... 63
larger frame sizes.................................................... 32 7.1.6 Preset references.................................................... 63
3.3.1 Connection of mains and motor cables on 7.2 Remote control functions ....................................... 64
IP20 modules .......................................................... 34 7.3 Performing an Identification Run ........................... 66
3.4 Cable specifications................................................ 36 7.4 Using the Control Panel Memory............................ 66
3.4.1 Stripping lengths ..................................................... 36 7.5 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400] ......... 67
3.4.2 Fuse data................................................................. 38 7.5.1 Load Monitor [410]................................................. 67
3.4.3 Cable connection data for mains, motor and 7.6 Pump function ......................................................... 69
PE cables according to IEC ratings ........................ 39
7.6.1 Introduction ............................................................. 69
3.4.4 Cable connection data for mains, motor and
PE cables according to NEMA ratings.................... 43 7.6.2 Fixed MASTER ......................................................... 70
3.5 Thermal protection on the motor ........................... 45 7.6.3 Alternating MASTER ................................................ 70
3.6 Motors in parallel .................................................... 45 7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input .......................................... 70
7.6.5 Fail safe operation .................................................. 71
4. Control Connections.................................... 47 7.6.6 PID control ............................................................... 72
4.1 Control board........................................................... 47 7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master ....................................... 73
4.2 Terminal connections ............................................. 48 7.6.8 Checklist And Tips ................................................... 74
4.3 Inputs configuration 7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/Stop Transitions .... 75
with the switches..................................................... 49
4.4 Connection example ............................................... 50

8. EMC and standards ..................................... 77 11.4.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250]................... 119
8.1 EMC standards ........................................................ 77 11.4.8 Serial Communication [260] ................................ 126
8.2 Stop categories and emergency stop .................... 77 11.5 Process and Application Parameters [300] ........ 130
11.5.1 Set/View Reference Value [310] ......................... 130
9. Serial communication ................................. 79 11.5.2 Process Settings [320] ......................................... 131
9.1 Modbus RTU ............................................................ 79 11.5.3 Start/Stop settings [330] ..................................... 135
9.2 Parameter sets........................................................ 79 11.5.4 Mechanical brake control..................................... 139
9.3 Motor data ............................................................... 80 11.5.5 Speed [340] .......................................................... 143
9.4 Start and stop commands ...................................... 80
11.5.6 Torques [350]........................................................ 146
9.5 Reference signal ..................................................... 80
11.5.7 Preset References [360] ...................................... 148
9.5.1 Process value .......................................................... 80
11.5.8 PID Process Control [380] .................................... 150
9.6 Description of the EInt formats .............................. 81
11.5.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] ...................................... 154
10. Operation via the Control Panel ................. 83 11.6 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400] ....... 161
10.1 General .................................................................... 83 11.6.1 Load Monitor [410]............................................... 161
10.1.1 Two different control panels................................... 83 11.6.2 Process Protection [420]...................................... 166
10.2 Control panel with 4-line display ............................ 83 11.7 I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]..................... 168
10.2.1 The display............................................................... 83 11.7.1 Analogue Inputs [510] .......................................... 168
10.2.2 Editing mode............................................................ 85 11.7.2 Digital Inputs [520] ............................................... 174
10.2.3 Fault logger.............................................................. 86 11.7.3 Analogue Outputs [530] ....................................... 176
10.2.4 Real Time clock ....................................................... 86 11.7.4 Digital Outputs [540] ............................................ 180
10.2.5 LED indicators ......................................................... 86 11.7.5 Relays [550] .......................................................... 182
10.2.6 Control keys ............................................................. 86 11.7.6 Virtual Connections [560] .................................... 183
10.2.7 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key ................................ 87 11.8 Logical Functions and Timers [600] .................... 184
10.2.8 Function keys .......................................................... 88 11.8.1 Comparators [610] ............................................... 184
10.3 Control panel with 2-line display ............................ 88 11.8.2 Logic Output Y [620] ............................................. 195
10.3.1 The display............................................................... 88 11.8.3 Logic Output Z [630]............................................. 197
10.3.2 Indications on the display....................................... 89 11.8.4 Timer1 [640] ......................................................... 198
10.3.3 LED indicators ......................................................... 89 11.8.5 Timer2 [650] ......................................................... 199
10.3.4 Control keys ............................................................. 89 11.8.6 Counters [660] ...................................................... 200
10.3.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key ................................ 90 11.8.7 Clock Logic [670] .................................................. 203
10.3.6 Function keys .......................................................... 91 11.9 View Operation/Status [700] ............................... 205
10.4 The menu structure................................................. 91 11.9.1 Operation [710]..................................................... 205
10.4.1 The main menu ....................................................... 92 11.9.2 Status [720] .......................................................... 207
10.5 Programming during operation .............................. 92 11.9.3 Stored values [730] .............................................. 211
10.6 Editing values in a menu ........................................ 92 11.10 View Trip Log [800] ............................................... 212
10.7 Copy current parameter to all sets ........................ 92 11.10.1 With four line PPU and real time clock ................ 212
10.8 Programming example............................................ 93 11.10.2 Trip Message log [810]......................................... 212
11.10.3 Trip Messages [82P] - [89P]................................. 213
11. Functional Description ............................... 95
11.10.4 Reset Trip Log [8A0] ............................................. 214
11.1 2-line LCD display.................................................... 95 11.11 System Data [900]................................................ 214
11.2 4-line LCD display.................................................... 96
11.11.1 VSD Data [920] ..................................................... 214
11.3 Menus ...................................................................... 97
11.12 Bluetooth (Optional) device ID number ............... 215
11.3.1 1st Line [110].......................................................... 97
11.12.1 Real Time clock ..................................................... 216
11.3.2 2nd Line [120] ........................................................ 98
11.3.3 3rd Line [130] ......................................................... 98 12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and
11.3.4 4th Line [140] ......................................................... 98 Maintenance ..............................................217
11.3.5 5th Line [150] ......................................................... 98 12.1 Trips, warnings and limits..................................... 217
11.3.6 6th Line [160] ......................................................... 98 12.2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action ...... 218
11.3.7 View mode [170]..................................................... 99 12.2.1 Technically qualified personnel............................ 219
11.4 Main Setup [200] .................................................... 99 12.2.2 Opening the AC drive ............................................ 219
11.4.1 Operation [210]....................................................... 99 12.2.3 Precautions to take with a connected motor ...... 219
11.4.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]......................... 104 12.2.4 Autoreset Trip ........................................................ 219
11.4.3 Mains supply voltage [21B].................................. 104 12.3 Maintenance ......................................................... 223
11.4.4 Motor Data [220] .................................................. 105
11.4.5 Motor Protection [230] ......................................... 113
11.4.6 Parameter Set Handling [240] ............................. 117

13. Options ....................................................... 225
13.1 Control panel ......................................................... 225
13.2 External control panel kits (4-line) ....................... 225
13.2.1 Control panel kit, including blank panel .............. 225
13.2.2 Control panel kit, including control panel............ 225
13.3 External control panel options (2-line)................. 226
13.4 Handheld Control Panel 2.0 ................................. 226
13.5 Gland kits............................................................... 227
13.6 EmoSoftCom.......................................................... 227
13.7 Brake chopper ....................................................... 227
13.8 I/O Board ............................................................... 229
13.9 Encoder.................................................................. 229
13.10 PTC/PT100 ............................................................ 229
13.11 Serial communication and fieldbus ..................... 229
13.12 Standby supply board option................................ 230
13.13 Safe Stop option.................................................... 231
13.14 EMC filter class C1/C2 ......................................... 233
13.15 Output chokes ....................................................... 233
13.16 Liquid cooling ........................................................ 233
13.17 Top cover for IP20/21 version ............................. 233
13.18 Other options......................................................... 233
13.19 AFE - Active Front End........................................... 233
14. Technical Data ........................................... 235

14.1 Electrical specifications related to model ........... 235
14.2 General electrical specifications.......................... 242
14.3 Operation at higher temperatures ....................... 243
14.4 Operation at higher switching frequency............. 243
14.5 Dimensions and Weights...................................... 244
14.6 Environmental conditions..................................... 247
14.7 Fuses and glands .................................................. 248
14.7.1 According to IEC ratings........................................ 248
14.7.2 Fuses according to NEMA ratings ........................ 252
14.8 Control signals....................................................... 253
15. Menu List ................................................... 255
Index ........................................................... 261

1. Introduction 1.2.1 Instruction manuals for
optional equipment
In the following table we have listed available options and
Emotron FDU is used most commonly to control and
the name of the Instruction manual or data sheet/
protect pump and fan applications that put high demands
on flow control, process uptime and low maintenance costs. Instruction plus document number. Further in this main
It can also be used for e.g. compressors and blowers. The manual we are often referring to these instructions.
used motor control method is V/Hz-control. Several options
are available, listed in chapter 13. page 225, that enable you Table 1 Available options and documents
to customize the AC drive for your specific needs.
Valid instruction manual/
Option
document number
NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before
starting installation, connection or working with the I/O board 2.0, instruction
I/O board
AC drive. manual / 01-5916-01
Emotron Encoder board
Encoder board 2.0, Instruction manual /
Users 01-5917-01
This instruction manual is intended for: PTC/PT100 board 2.0,
PTC/PT100 board instruction manual /
• installation engineers 01-5920-01
• maintenance engineers CRIO board (VFX) Emotron AC Drive Crane
option 2.0, Instruction
• service engineers Crane interface (VFX) manual
Fieldbus - Profibus
Motors Fieldbus - DeviceNet
The AC drive is suitable for use with standard 3-phase Fieldbus - CANopen
asynchronous motors. Under certain conditions it is possible Ethernet - Modbus TCP Fieldbus Option,
to use other types of motors. Contact your supplier for Instruction manual /
details. Ethernet - EtherCAT 01-3698-01
Ethernet - Profinet IO 1-port
Ethernet - Profinet IO 2-port
1.1 Delivery and unpacking
Ethernet - EtherNet/IP 2-port
Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your supplier
immediately of any damage found. Do not install the AC Emotron isolated
drive if damage is found. RS232 / 485 2.0 option
RS232/RS485 isolated
Instruction manual /
Check that all items are present and that the type number is
01-5919-01
correct.
Control panel kit, Incl blank Emotron FDU/VFX 2.0
panel External Control Panel,
1.2 Using of the instruction Control panel kit, Incl control instruction manual / 01-
5928-01
panel
manual Emotron HCP 2.0,
Within this instruction manual the abbreviation “AC drive” Handheld Control Panel
instrucion manual / 01-
HCP2.0
is used to indicate the complete variable speed drive as a 5925-01
single unit. Option Safe Stop
Check that the software version number on the first page of (STO – Safe Torque Off),
Safe stop
this manual matches the software version in the AC drive. Technical description /
See chapter 11.11.1 page 214 01-5921-01
With help of the index and the table of contents it is easy to Overshoot clamp
track individual functions and to find out how to use and set Overshoot clamp Datasheet/Instruction /
01-5933-11
them.
Emotron FDU/VFX 2.0
The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door, so that
Liquid cooling Liquid Cooling, instruction
it is always easy to access in case of an emergency. manual / 01-4636-01
Output coils
Output choke Datasheet/Instruction /
01-3132-11
Emotron VFX/FDU 2.0
AFE- Active Front End
AFE- Active front end
option, Instruction manual
/ 01-5386-01
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Introduction 7

1.3 Warranty
The warranty applies when the equipment is installed,
operated and maintained according to instructions in this
instruction manual. Duration of warranty as per contract.
Faults that arise due to faulty installation or operation are
not covered by the warranty.
8 Introduction CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

1.4 Type code number
Fig. 1 gives an example of the type code numbering used on
all AC drives. With this code number the exact type of the
drive can be determined. This identification will be required
for type specific information when mounting and installing.
The code number is located on the product label, on the
unit.
Type code FDU 48 -017 -20 C E – – – A – N N N N A N – –

Position No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Fig. 1 Type code number
Position Position
Configuration
for 002-074 for 090-3K0
FDU
1 1 AC drive type
48=480 V mains
2 2 Supply voltage 52=525 V mains
69=690 V mains
-002=2.0 A
3 3 Rated current (A) continuous -
-3K0=3000 A
20=IP20 - Intended for mounting inside a cabinet
4 4 Protection class 21=IP21 - Intended for wall-mounting
54=IP54 - Intended for wall-mounting
–=Blank panel
C=2-line Control panel, standard IP2Y
5 5 Control panel
D=4-line Control panel, standard IP2X/54
E=4-line Control panel with Bluetooth (option IP2X/54)
E=Standard EMC (Category C3)
6 6 EMC option F=Extended EMC (Category C2)
I=IT-Net
–=No chopper
7 7 Brake chopper option B=Chopper built in
D=DC+/- interface
–=No SBS
8 8 Stand-by power supply option
S=SBS included
Safe stop option –=No safe stop
- 9
(Only valid for 090-3k0) T=Safe stop incl.
9 10 Brand label A=Standard
10 - Painted AC drive A=Standard paint
–=Standard, not coated boards IP54
11 11 Coated boards, option
V=Coated boards, option IP54 (standard IP2X)
12 12 Option position 1 N=No option
C=Crane I/O (max. 1)
13 13 Option position 2
E=Encoder (max. 1)
P=PTC/PT100 (max. 2)
14 14 Option position 3 I=Extended I/O (max. 3)
S=Safe Stop (only 002-105, IP2X/54 size B-D2 (69)) (max. 1)

Position Position
Configuration
for 002-074 for 090-3K0
N= No option
D= DeviceNet
P= Profibus
S= RS232/485
M= Modbus/TCP
15 15 Option position, communication E= EtherCAT
F= Modbus/TCP 2-port, M12
A= Profinet IO 1-port
B= Profinet IO 2-port
G= EtherNet/IP 2-port
C= CANopen
A= Standard software, Language set 1
16 16 Software type I = Std sw Language set 2
See menu “Language [211]” on page 99
Motor PTC. N= No option
17 -
(Only valid for 002-105/B-D2(69)) P= PTC
Gland kit. –= Glands not included
18 -
(Only valid for 002-074/IP54) G= Gland kit included
–= CE approved
D= Marine DNV Product certificate (above 100 kW)
19 17 Approval/certification + CE approved
M= Marine version + CE approved
U=UL/cUL approved
1.5 Standards requirements according to category C3, for a motor cable

length of maximum 80 m.
The AC drives described in this instruction manual comply
with the standards listed in Table 2. For the declarations of By using the optional “Extended EMC” filter the AC drive
conformity and manufacturer’s certificate, contact your fulfils requirements according to category C2.
supplier for more information or visit www.emotron.com/
www.cgglobal.com.
WARNING!
1.5.1 Product standard for EMC In a domestic environment this product
Product standard EN(IEC)61800-3, second edition of 2004 may cause radio interference, in which
defines the: case it may be necessary to take adequate
additional measures.
First Environment (Extended EMC) as environment that
includes domestic premises. It also includes establishments
directly connected without intermediate transformers to a
low voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
used for domestic purposes.
WARNING!
Category C2: Power Drive System (PDS) of rated The standard AC drive, complying with
voltage<1.000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a category C3, is not intended to be used on
movable device and, when used in the first environment, is a low-voltage public network which
intended to be installed and commissioned only by a supplies domestic premises; radio
professional. interference is expected if used in such a
network. Contact your supplier if you need
Second environment (Standard EMC) includes all other additional measures.
establishments.
Category C3: PDS of rated voltage <1.000 V, intended for
use in the second environment and not intended for use in
the first environment.
Category C4: PDS or rated voltage equal or above 1.000 V,
or rated current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use
in complex systems in the second environment.
The AC drive complies with the product standard
EN(IEC) 61800-3:2004 (Any kind of metal screened cable
may be used). The standard AC drive is designed to meet the

Table 2 Standards
Market Standard Description
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU

European Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU
Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60204-1 Part 1: General requirements.
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods.
EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 EMC Directive: Declaration of Conformity and
CE marking
All Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1.
EN(IEC)61800-5-1 Ed. Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy.
2.0 Low Voltage Directive: Declaration of Conformity and
CE marking
Classification of environmental conditions. Air quality chemical vapours, unit
in operation. Chemical gases 3C2, Solid particles 3S2.
IEC 60721-3-3 Optional with coated boards
Unit in operation. Chemical gases Class 3C3, Solid particles 3S2.
ULC508C UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment
USL (United States Standards - Listed) complying with the requirements of
USL UL508C Power Conversion Equipment
North & South UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment.
America UL 840 Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for
electrical equipment.
CNL (Canadian National Standards - Listed) complying with the requirements
CNL of CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-10 Industrial Control Equipment.
Russian EAC For all sizes.
1.6 Dismantling and 1.6.1 Disposal of old electrical and

scrapping electronic equipment
The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable
material as aluminium, iron and plastic. Each drive contains
a number of components demanding special treatment, for
example electrolytic capacitors. The circuit boards contain
small amounts of tin and lead. Any local or national
regulations in force for the disposal and recycling of these This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates
materials must be complied with. that this product shall be taken to the applicable collection
point for the recycling of electrical and electronic
equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly,
you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for
the environment and human health, which could otherwise
be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural
resources. For more detailed information about recycling
this product, please contact the local distributor of the
product.

1.7 Glossary
1.7.1 Abbreviations and symbols

In this manual the following abbreviations are used:
Table 3 Abbreviations
Abbreviation/
Description
symbol
DSP Digital signals processor

AC drive Frequency converter
PEBB Power Electronic Building Block
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
Control panel, the programming and
CP
presentation unit on the AC drive
HCP Handheld control panel (option)
EInt Communication format
UInt Communication format (Unsigned integer)
Int Communication format (Integer)
Long Communication format
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
The function cannot be changed in run
mode
1.7.2 Definitions
In this manual the following definitions for current, torque
and frequency are used:
Table 4 Definitions
Name Description Quantity
IIN Nominal input current of AC drive ARMS

INOM Nominal output current of AC drive ARMS
IMOT Nominal motor current ARMS
PNOM Nominal power of AC drive kW
PMOT Motor power kW
TNOM Nominal torque of motor Nm
TMOT Motor torque Nm
fOUT Output frequency of AC drive Hz
fMOT Nominal frequency of motor Hz
nMOT Nominal speed of motor rpm
ICL Maximum output current ARMS
Speed Actual motor speed rpm
Torque Actual motor torque Nm
Sync
Synchronous speed of the motor rpm
speed

2. Mounting
This chapter describes how to mount the AC drive. Recommended for AC drive models
Before mounting it is recommended that the installation is -300 to - 3K0
planned out first.
• Be sure that the AC drive suits the mounting location.
• The mounting site must support the weight of the AC
drive.
• Will the AC drive continuously withstand vibrations
and/or shocks?
• Consider using a vibration damper.
• Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling air Lifting eyes
flow, compatibility of the motor, etc.
• Know how the AC drive will be lifted and transported.
A°
Note: IP20 units are intended for cabinet mounting.
2.1 Lifting instructions

Note: To prevent personal risks and any damage to
the unit during lifting, it is advised that the lifting
methods described below are used.
Recommended for AC drive models

-090 to -365
Load: 56 to 95 kg
(123 - 202 lbs)
Fig. 3 Remove the roof unit and use the lifting eyes to lift
single unit 600 mm (23.6 in) and 900 mm (35.4 in).
Single cabinet drives can be lifted/transported safely using

the eye bolts supplied and lifting cables/chains as in
illustration Fig. 3 above.
Depending on the cable/chain angle A (in Fig. 3),
following loads are permitted:
Cable/chain angle A Permitted load
45 ° 4 800 N (1080 lbf)
60 ° 6 400 N (1439 lbf)
90 ° 13 600N (3057 lbf)
Regarding lifting instructions for other cabinet sizes, please

contact CG Drives & Automation.
Fig. 2 Lifting AC drive model -090 to -365.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Mounting 13

2.2 Stand-alone units 2.2.1 Cooling
The AC drive must be mounted in a vertical position against Fig. 4 shows the minimum free space required around the
a flat surface. Use the template (in the File archive on our AC drive for the models 002 to 3K0 in order to guarantee
homepage) to mark out the position of the fixing holes. adequate cooling. Because the fans blow the air from the
bottom to the top it is advisable not to position an air inlet
immediately above an air outlet.
The following minimum separation between two AC drives,
or a AC drive and a non-dissipating wall must be
maintained. Valid if free space on opposite side.
Table 5 Mounting and cooling

Frame size Frame size
300-3K0
B - FA, C2, D2, E2, F2
cabinet
C2-FA2, with IP21
C69-F69, top cover
C2(69)-D2(69) option
[mm(in)]
[mm(in)] [mm(in)]
2xFDU a 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 100 (3.9)

2xside-by- b 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 0
side c 0 50 (1.97) 0
Fig. 4 AC drive mounting model 002 to 3K0 mm (in) d 0 50 (1.97) 0
3 or more a 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 100 (3.9)
FDU units b 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 0
c 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 0
B/C/D/C2/
D2 side-by-
side d 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 0
mm (in)
3 or more a 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 100 (3.9)
FDU units b 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 0
E/F/E2/ c 100 (3.9 50 (1.97) 0
F2side-by-
side d 100 (3.9) 50 (1.97) 0
mm (in)
FDU-wall, a 100 (3.9) 100 (3.9) 100 (3.9)
wall-one b 100 (3.9) 100 (3.9) 0
side c 0 50 (1.97) 0
mm (in) d 0 50 (1.97) 0
NOTE: When a 300 to 3K0 model is placed between

two walls, a minimum distance at each side of 200
mm (7.9 in) must be maintained.
14 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

2.2.2 Mounting schemes
Glands Gland
M20 M16
C D
E Gland
M25
ø13 mm(x2) Glands
(0.51 in) M32
Fig. 6 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication,

Emotron FDU Model 48/52-003 to 018
A B (Frame size B).
ø7 mm(x4)
(0.27 in)
G
12.5 kg
F
(26.5 lb)
Fig. 5 Emotron FDU Model 48/52-003 to 018

(Frame size B).
Fig. 7 Emotron FDU Model 48/52-003 to 018 (Frame size
B) example with optional CRIO interface and D-sub
connectors.
Table 6 Dimensions connected to Fig. 5.

Dimensions in mm (in)
Frame Emotron FDU
size model G
A B C D E F
(depth)
416 396 128.5 37 10 202.6 203

B 003 - 018
(16.4) (15.6) (5.04) (1.46) (0.39) (7.98) (7.99)

IP21 top cover (optional) H
C D I
E C D J
ø13 mm(x2) E
(0.51 in)
ø13 mm(x2)
(0.51 in)
A B
B K A
ø7 mm(x4)
(0.27 in)
ø7mm (x4)
(0.27 in)
24 kg F G
(53 lb) 17 kg
G
(38 lb) F
Fig. 8 Emotron FDU Model 48/52-026 to 046 (Frame size
C).
Fig. 10 Emotron FDU Model 48-025 to
48-058 (Frame size C2), Model 69-002 to 69-025
(Frame size C2(69)), backside view.
Gland
M25 (026-031)
M32 (037-046) Glands
M20
Glands
M32 (026-031) PE
L1 L2 L3 DC- DC+ R U V W
M40 (037-046)
Fig. 9 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication, Fig. 11 Bottom view Emotron FDU Model 48-025 to 48-058
Emotron FDU Model 48/52-026 to 046 (Frame size (Frame size C2) Model 69-002 to 69-025 (Frame size
C). C2(69)), with cable interface for mains, motor, DC+/
DC-, brake resistor and control.
Table 7 Dimensions connected to Fig. 8 and Fig. 10.
Emotron
Frame
FDU
size G
model A B C D E F H I J K
(depth)
512 492 128.5 24.8 10 178 292

C 026 - 046 - - - -
(20.2) (19.4) (5.04) (0.95) (0.39) (7) (11.5)
C2 025 - 058 585.5 471 128.5 23.8 13 167 267 (10.5) 196 10 23.5 496
C2(69) 002 - 025 (23) (18.5) (5.04) (0.91) (0.51) (7) IP21 282 (11.1) (7.7) (0.39) (0.9) (19.5)

Glands
C D M20
E Gland
M25
ø13 mm(x2)
(0.51 in)
Glands
M32
A B

Emotron FDU Model 69-002 to 025 (Frame size
C69).
ø7mm (x4)
(0.27 in)
F G
17 kg
(37.4 lb)
Fig. 12 Emotron FDU Model 69-002 to 025 (Frame size

C69).
Table 8 Dimensions connected to Fig. 12.
Emotron
Frame
FDU
size G
model A B C D E F
(depth)
512 492 128.5 24.8 10 178 314 (12.36)

C69 002-025 Excl. PPU G
(20.2) (19.4) (5.06) (0.98) (0.39) (7.01) 291.5 (11.5)

D C IP21 top cover (optional) H I
C D J
E
E
ø13 mm(x2)
(0.51 in) ø13 mm(x2)
(0.51 in)
A B A K B
ø7 mm (x4)
(0.27 in)
ø7 mm(x4)
(0.27 in)
32 kg G
G 30 kg
(71 lb) F F
(66 lb)
Fig. 14 Emotron FDU Model 48/52-061 to 074 (Frame size Fig. 16 Emotron FDU Model 48-072 to
D), Model 69-033 to 69-058, (Frame size D69). 48-105 (Frame size D2), Model 69-033 to 69-058
(Frame size D2(69)), backside view.
Glands
Glands M20
M20
Glands
M50
Glands
M40 PE

Emotron FDU Model 48/52-061 and 074 (Frame Fig. 17 Bottom view Emotron FDU Model 48-072 to
size D), Model 69-033 to 69-058 (Frame size D69). 48-105 (Size D2), Model 69-033 to 69-058 (Frame
size D2(69)), with cable interface for mains, motor,
DC+/DC-, brake resistor and control.
NOTE: Glands for size B, C, D, C69 and D69 are available
as option kit.
Table 9 Dimensions connected to Fig. 14 and Fig. 16.

Emotron
Frame
FDU
size G
model A B C D E F H I J K
(depth)
D 061 - 074 570 590 160 30 10 220 295

- - - -
D69 033 - 058 (22.4) (23.2) (6.3) (0.9) (0.39) (8.7) (11.6)
D2 072 - 105 291 (11.5)

570 669.5 160 30 13 220 240 10 12.5 590
IP21 - 307
D2(69) 033 - 058 (22.4) (26.3) (6.3) (0.9) (0.51) (8.7) (9.5) (0.39) (0.47) (23.2)
(12.1)

D C D C
H
H
E
E
ø16 mm(x3)
(0.63 in) ø16 mm(x3)
(0.63 in)
A B B
A
ø9 mm(x6)
(0.35 in) ø9 mm(x6)
56/60 kg (0.35 in)
(124/132 lb) G 74 kg
F 163 lb) G
F
Fig. 18 Emotron FDU Model 48-090 to 175 (Frame size E).
Fig. 20 Emotron FDU Model 48-210 to 295 (Frame size F),
Emotron FDU Model 69-82 to 200 (Frame size
F69).
Cable glands M20
Cable glands M20
Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø17-42 /M50
(0.67 - 1.65in)
Cable flexible leadthrough Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø11-32 /M40 Ø23-55 /M63
(0.43 - 1.2 in) (0.91 - 2.1 in)
Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø17-42 /M50
(0.67 - 1.65in)
Fig. 19 Cable interface for mains, motor, DC+/DC-, brake
resistor and communication, Emotron FDU Model
48-090 to 175 (Frame size E). Fig. 21 Cable interface for mains, motor, DC+/DC-, brake
48-210 to 295 (Frame size F), Emotron FDU Model
69-082 to 200 (Frame size F69).
Table 10 Dimensions IP54 connected to Fig. 18 and Fig. 20.
Dimension in mm (in)
Frame Emotron FDU
size model G
A B C D E F H
(depth)
925 950 240 22.5 284.5 314

E 090 - 175 10 (0.39) 120
(36.4) (37.4) (9.5) (0.88) (11.2) (12.4)
925 950
F 210 - 295
(36.4) (37.4) 300 22.5 344.5 314
10 (0.39) 150
1065 1090 (11.8) (0.88) (13.6) (12.4)
F69 082 - 200
(41.9) (42.9)

D C D C
H H
E E
ø16 mm(x3)
(0.63 in) ø16 mm(x3)
(0.63 in)
A B A B
ø9 mm(x6)
(0.35 in) ø9 mm(x6) FA2
53 kg F2 (0.35 in)
(117 lb) 84 kg
68 kg
F G (185 lb)
(150 lb) F
G
Fig. 22 Emotron /FDU Model 48-142 to
48-171 (Frame size E2). Fig. 24 Emotron /FDU Model 48-205 to
48-293 (Frame size F2) and 48-365-20 (Frame size
FA2).
Fig. 23 Bottom view Emotron /FDU Model 48-142 to 48-

293 (Frame size E2 and F2), with cable interface for
mains, motor, DC+/DC-, brake resistor and control.
(principle drawing).
Table 11 Dimensions IP20 connected to Fig. 22 and Fig. 24.
Frame Emotron FDU
size model G
A B C D E F H
(depth)
240 275 294 (11.6) 120

E2 142 - 171
925 950 (9.5) (10.8) IP21 - 323 (12.7) (4.7)
(36.4) (37.4) 22.5 10 294 (11.6)
F2 205 - 293
300 (0.88) (0.39) 335 IP21 - 323 (12.7)
150
1065 1090 (11.8) (13.2) 306 (12) (5.9)
FA2 365
(41.9) (42.9) IP21 - 323 (12.7)

D C
H
E
ø16 mm(x3)
(0.63 in)
ø9 mm(x6)
(0.35 in)
95 kg
(209 lb)
G
F
Fig. 25 Emotron FDU Model 48-365-54 (Frame size FA). Fig. 27 Side view Emotron FDU Model 48-365-54 (Frame
size FA).
Cable glands M20
Cable flexible leadthrough (x5)

Ø23-55 /M63
(0.91 - 2.1 in)
Fig. 26 Cable interface for mains, motor, DC+/DC-, brake

48-365-54 (Frame size FA).
Table 12 Dimensions IP54 connected to Fig. 25.
Frame Emotron FDU
size model G
A B C D E F H
(depth)
1055 1395 300 38 32 345 365 157

FA 365
(41.5) (54.9 (11.8) (1.5) (1,26) (13.6) (14.4) (6.18)

2.3 Cabinet mounting 2.3.2 Recommended free space in
front of cabinet
2.3.1 Cooling All cabinet mounted AC drives are designed in modules, so
called PEBBs. These PEBBs can be folded out to be
If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet, the rate of replaced. To be able to remove a PEBB in the future, we
airflow supplied by the cooling fans must be taken into recommend 1.30 meter (39.4 in) free space in front of the
consideration. cabinet, see Fig. 28.
Emotron FDU Flow rate

Frame
m3/h (ft3/min)
L ATTI R
Model
L ATTI R L ATTI R
L ATTI R L ATTI R L ATTI R
B 003 - 018 75 (144)

C - C2 025 – 031 120 (171)
C - C2 036 - 058 170 (100)
C69 002 - 025 170 (100)
C2(69) 002 - 025 170 (100)
D - D2 060 - 105 170 (100)
D69 033 - 058 170 (100)
D2(69) 033 - 058 170 (100)
E - E2 090 - 175 510 (300)
F - F2 205 - 295 800 (471)
FA - FA2 365 1020 (600)
F69 090 - 200 800 (471)
G 300 - 375 1020 (600)
H 430 - 500
1600 (942)
H69 250 - 400
I 600 - 750
2400 (1413)
I69 430 - 595
J 860 - 1K0
3200 (1883)
J69 650 - 800
KA 1K15 - 1K25
4000 (2354)
KA69 905 - 995
K 1K35 - 1K5
4800 (2825)
K69 1K2 1300 (39.4 in)
L 1K75
5600 (3296)
L69 1K4
M 2K0 Fig. 28 Recommended free space in front of the cabinet
6400 (3767)
M69 1K6 mounted AC drive.
N 2K25
7200 (4238)
N69 1K8
O 2K5
8000 (4709)
O69 2K0
P69 2K2 8800 (5179)
Q69 2K4 9600 (5650)
R69 2K6 10400 (6121)
S69 2K8 11200 (6592)
T69 3K0 12000 (7063)
NOTE: For the models 48-860/69-650 to 69-3K0 the

mentioned amount of air flow should be divided
equally over the cabinets.

2.3.3 Mounting schemes, cabinets
150 mm 150 mm
(5.9 in) (5.9 in)
R ITTAL R ITTAL R ITTAL
R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L
2000 mm (78.7 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)

2250 mm (88.6 in)
2250 mm (88.6 in)
100 mm 600 mm (23.6 in) 600 mm 100 mm

(3.9 in) (23.6 in) (3.9 in) 900 mm (35.4 in) 600 mm
(23.6 in)
Emotron FDU48: Model 300 to 500 (Frame sizes G Emotron FDU48: Model 600 to 750 (Frame size I)
and H) Emotron FDU69: Model 430 to 595 (Frame size I69)
Emotron FDU69: Model 250 to 400 (Frame size H69)
150 mm 150 mm
(5.9 in) (5.9 in)
R ITTAL R ITTAL R ITTAL R ITTAL R ITTAL R ITTAL
2250 mm (88.6 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)
2250 mm (88.6 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)
100 mm
100 mm (3.9 in) 1500 mm (59.0 in) 600 mm
(3.9 in) 1200 mm (47.2 in) 600 mm
(23.6 in)
(23.6 in)
Emotron FDU48: Model 860 to 1K0 (Frame Emotron FDU48: Model 1K15 to 1K25 (Frame size KA)
size J) Emotron FDU69: Model 650 to 800 (Frame size Emotron FDU69: Model 905 to 995 (Frame size KA69)
J69)

150 mm 150 mm
(5.9 in) R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L R ITTA L
(5.9 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)

2250 mm (88.6 in)
2250 mm (88.6 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)
100 mm 100 mm 2100 mm (82.7 in) 600 mm

1800 mm (71 in) 600 mm (3.9 in) (23.6 in)
(3.9 in)
(23.6 in)
Emotron FDU48: Model 1K35 to 1K5 (Frame size K) Emotron FDU48: Model 1K75 (Frame size L)
Emotron FDU69: Model 1K2 (Frame size K69) Emotron FDU69: Model 1K4 (Frame size L69)
150 mm
(5.9 in) 150 mm
(5.9 in)
2250 mm (88.6 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)
2250 mm (88.6 in)

2000 mm (78.7 in)
100 mm 2400 mm (94.5 in) 100 mm 2700 mm (106.3 in)

(3.9 in) 600 mm (3.9 in)
600 mm
(23.6 in)
(23.6 in)
Emotron FDU48: Model 2K0 (Frame size M)
Emotron FDU48: Model 2K25 (Frame size N)
Emotron FDU69: Model 1K6 (Frame size M69)
Emotron FDU69: Model 1K8 (Frame size N69)
150 mm
(5.9 in)
2250 mm (88.6 in)
2000 mm (78.7 in)
100 mm 3000 mm (118.2 in)

(3.9 in) 600 mm
(23.6 in)
Emotron FDU48: Model 2K5 (Frame size O)
Emotron FDU69: Model 2K0 (Frame size O69)

3. Installation 3.1.1 Remove/open front cover
Frame sizes B - FA (IP54)
The description of installation in this chapter complies with Remove/open the front cover to access the cable connections
the EMC standards and the Machine Directive. and terminals. On Frame size B and C loosen the four
screws and remove the cover. On Frame size D and up
Select cable type and screening according to the EMC
unlock the hinged cover with the key and open it. On Frame
requirements valid for the environment where the AC drive
size FA loosen the three screws on the hinged cover and open
is installed.
it.
3.1 Before installation Frame size C2 - F2 and FA2 (IP20/21)

Read the following checklist and prepare for your
application before installation.
• Local or remote control.
• Long motor cables (>100m (> 330 ft)), refer to section
Long motor cables page 31.
• Functions used.
• Suitable AC drive size in proportion to the
motor/application.
If the AC drive is temporarily stored before being connected, A
please check the technical data for environmental
conditions. If the AC drive is moved from a cold storage
room to the room where it is to be installed, condensation
can form on it. Allow the AC drive to become fully
acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has
evaporated before connecting the mains voltage.
Fig. 29 Remove the front cover on frame size C2 - F2 and FA2
(principle drawing).
To be able to access all cable connections and terminals, first

open and remove the front cover in following order.
• Loosen the two screws A (see Fig. 29) at the bottom of
the cover a couple of turns (you do not have to remove
the screws).
• Swing out the lower part of the cover a bit and remove
the cover downwards. Be careful, don't swing out the
cover too much as this could damage the “lips” at the
upper hinges.
Now it is easy to access all terminals.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Installation 25

3.1.2 Remove/open the lower front 3.2 Cable connections for
cover on Frame size E2, F2 small and medium frame
and FA2 (IP20/21) sizes
IP54 - FDU48/52-003 to 074 (Frame sizes B, C and D)
IP54-FDU69-002 to 058 (Frame sizes C69 and D69)
IP20/21 - FDU48-025 to 365 (Frame sizes C2, D2, E2, F2
and FA2)
IP20/21 - FDU69-002 to 058 (Frame sizes C2(69) and
D2(69))
3.2.1 Mains cables

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local
regulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC drive
load current.
Recommendations for selecting mains

cables
• To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use
B
screened mains cables.
Fig. 30 Loosen the two screws and remove the lower cover • Use heat-resistant cables, +75 °C (167 °F) or higher.
(principle drawing)
• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local
regulations and the nominal input current of the drive
In order to access the mains, motor, DC+/DC- and brake
See table 66, page 248.
terminals, remove the lower cover in following order
• PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for phase cable
• Loosen the two screws B (see Fig. 30).
size < 16 mm2 (6 AWG) be >10 mm2 Cu (16 mm2 Al)
• Pull down the cover a bit and lift it away. or a second PE conductor with same area as original PE
conductor,
for cable size above 16mm2 (6 AWG) but smaller or
equal to 35mm2 (2 AWG) the PE conductor cross-sec-
tional area shall be at least 16mm2 (6 AWG).
For cables >35mm2 (>2 AWG) the PE conductor cross-
sectional area should be at least 50% of the used phase
conductor.
When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not in
accordance with the above mentioned cross-sectional
area requirements, a separate PE conductor should be
used to establish this.
• The litz ground connection see fig. 42, is only necessary
if the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives have
an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for
mounting on an unpainted mounting plate.
Connect the mains cables according to fig. 31 to 39. The
AC drive has as standard a built-in RFI mains filter that
complies with category C3 which suits the Second
Environment standard.
26 Installation CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Strainrelief and EMC clamp
PE for brake resistor
cables (option)
U V W
L1 L2 L3 DC- DC+ R
L1 L2
L3 DC
- DC+
R U
VW
ns
Mai
tor
Mo
PE EMC gland, Screen connection
of motor cables
Fig. 31 Mains and motor connections, model 003-018, frame

size B.
for screen connection
of cables
Fig. 34 Mains and motor connections model 48-025 to 48-

058, frame size C2 and model 69-002 to 69-025
frame size C2(69).
L1 L2
L3 DC-D
C+ R U V W
L1 L2 L3 PE DC- DC+ R U V W
PE
PE
EMC gland Screen connection
of motor cables

size C.
EMC gland - screen connection
of motor cables
Fig. 35 Mains and motor connection, model 061 - 074, frame

size D and model 69-033 to 69-058 frame size D69.
L1 L2 L3
DC- DC+ R
U V W
PE
EMC gland - screen connection

of motor cables

size C69.

for brake resistor
PE
PE cables (option)
DC-
DC+
L1 R
L2
L3
DC-
DC+
R
U
V
W
PE
ns
ns
Mai
tor
Mai
tor
Mo
Mo
Strainrelief and EMC clamp also for screen connection
also for screen connection of cables
of cables
Fig. 36 Mains and motor connections model 48-072 to

48-105, frame size D2 and model 69-033 to 69-058 Fig. 38 Mains and motor connections model 48-142 to 48-
frame size D2(69). 293 (frame sizes E2 and F2) with the optional termi-
nals for DC-, DC+ and Brake (principle drawing)
PE
PE
DC-
DC+
R
ns
ns
Mai
ns
tor
tor
Mai
tor
tor
Mai
Mo
Mo
Mo
Mo

also for screen connection
of cables Strainrelief and EMC clamp
also for screen connection
of cables
Fig. 37 Mains and motor connections model 48-142 to 48-

293 (frame sizes E2 and F2) (principle drawing). Fig. 39 Mains and motor connections model 48-365-20
(frame size FA2) with the optional terminals for DC-,
DC+ and Brake (principle drawing)

3.2.2 Motor cables
Table 13 Mains and motor connections To comply with the EMC emission standards the AC drive
is provided with a RFI mains filter. The motor cables must
L1,L2,L3 Mains supply, 3 -phase also be screened and connected on both sides. In this way a
PE Safety earth (protected earth) so-called “Faraday cage” is created around the AC drive,
motor cables and motor. The RFI currents are now fed back
Motor earth
to their source (the IGBTs) so the system stays within the
U, V, W Motor output, 3-phase
emission levels.
Brake resistor, DC-link
DC-,DC+,R
connections (optional)
Recommendations for selecting motor
cables
• Use screened cables according to specification in table
14. Use symmetrical shielded cable; three phase conduc-
tors and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically con-
structed PE conductor, and a shield.
• PE conductor cross-sectional area shall for phase cable
size < 16 mm2 (6 AWG) be >10 mm2 Cu (16 mm2 Al)
or use a second PE conductor with same area as original
PE conductor.
For cable size above 16mm2 (6 AWG) but smaller or
equal to 35mm2 (2 AWG) the PE conductor cross-sec-
tional area shall be at least 16mm2 (6 AWG).
For cables >35mm2 (2 AWG) the PE conductor cross-
sectional area should be at least 50% of the used phase
Fig. 40 Wiring example showing Protective earth, Motor earth conductor.
and Brake Resistor connection When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not in
accordance with the above mentioned cross-sectional
area requirements, a separate PE conductor should be
used to establish this.
NOTE: The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only • Use heat-resistant cables, +75 °C (167 °F) or higher.
fitted if the DC+/DC- option or Brake Chopper Option
is built-in. • Dimension the cables in accordance with the rated cur-
rent of the motor.
WARNING!
• Keep the motor cable between AC drive and motor as
The Brake Resistor must be connected short as possible.
between terminals DC+ and R. • The screening must be connected with a large contact
surface of preferable 360° and always at both ends, to
the motor housing and the AC drive housing. When
WARNING!
painted mounting plates are used, do not be afraid to
In order to work safely, the mains earth
scrape away the paint to obtain as large contact surface as
must be connected to PE and the motor
earth to . possible at all mounting points for items such as saddles
and the bare cable screening. Relying just on the
connection made by the screw thread is not sufficient.
NOTE: It is important that the motor housing has the

same earth potential as the other parts of the
machine.
• The litz ground connection, see fig. 42, is only necessary

if the mounting plate is painted. All the AC drives have
an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for
mounting on an unpainted mounting plate.
Connect the motor cables according to U - U, V - V and
W - W, see Fig. 31, to Fig. 39.
NOTE: The terminals DC-, DC+ and R are options.

Switches between the motor and the Pay special attention to the following points:
AC drive • If paint must be removed, steps must be taken to prevent
subsequent corrosion. Repaint after making connections!
If the motor cables are to be interrupted by maintenance
switches, output coils, etc., it is necessary that the screening • The fastening of the whole AC drive housing must be
is continued by using metal housing, metal mounting plates, electrically connected with the mounting plate over an
etc. as shown in the Fig. 42. area which is as large as possible. For this purpose the
removal of paint is necessary. An alternative method is to
connect the AC drive housing to the mounting plate
with as short a length of litz wire as possible.
Screen connection • Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever
of signal cables
possible.
• If the AC drive is mounted in a standard cabinet, the
internal wiring must comply with the EMC standard.
Fig. 42 shows an example of a AC drive built into a
cabinet.
AC drive built into cabinet
AC drive
PE RFI-Filter
Mains Motor
Metal EMC cable glands
Litz Output coil (option)

Motor cable
shield connection
Screened cables
Fig. 41 Screen connection of cables.
Unpainted mounting plate
Metal connector housing
Mains Metal EMC

(L1,L2,L3,PE) Motor
coupling nut
Brake resistor
(option)
Fig. 42 AC drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate

Fig. 43 shows an example when there is no metal mounting current peaks will cause tripping at overcurrent. Using
plate used (e.g. if IP54 AC drives are used). It is important output coils can prevent this. Contact the supplier for
to keep the “circuit” closed, by using metal housing and appropriate coils.
cable glands.
Switching in motor cables
Switching in the motor connections is not advisable. In the
event that it cannot be avoided (e.g. emergency or
maintenance switches) only switch if the current is zero. If
AC drive
this is not done, the AC drive can trip as a result of current
RFI-Filter
Mains
peaks.
Metal EMC cable

glands
Screened cables
Metal housing
Brake Output
resistor coils
(option) (option)
Metal connector housing
Metal cable gland Motor
Mains
Fig. 43 AC drive as stand alone
Connect motor cables

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC drive
housing.
2. Put the cables through the glands.
3. Strip the cable according to Table 15.
4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor
terminal.
5. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure
with the fixing screws.
6. Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical con-
tact to the motor and brake chopper cable screens.
Placing of motor cables
• Separate the power cables (AC drive, soft starter, output
coils, filters, magnetic switches, etc.) from the signal
cables (relay control circuit, PLC, sensors,
control PCBs, electronics, etc.).
• Keep the control cables as far from the power cables as
possible.
• If power cables and control cables must be laid close to
each other, try to ensure that they do not run parallel, at
least for a distance of no more than 300 mm (12 in).
If necessary, use a cable tray with a division or stack the
cable trays.
• Ensure that where power cables and control cables cross,
they do so at 90° to each other.
Long motor cables
If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m
(330 ft)(for powers below 7.5 kW (10.2 hp)) please contact
CG Drives & Automation), it is possible that capacitive

3.3 Connection of motor and Emotron FDU48-365-54
To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables
mains cables for larger to the AC drive, the cable interface plate can be removed.
frame sizes
IP54 - FDU 48-090 to 295 (Frame sizes E - F) and
FDU 48-365-54 (Frame size FA) and
FDU 69-082 to 200 (Frame size F69)
IP20 - FDU 48-300 and up (Frame sizes G and up) and
FDU 69-250 and up (Frame sizes H69 and up).
Emotron FDU48-090 to 48-295
Emotron FDU69-082 to 69-200
To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables
to the AC drive, the cable interface plate can be removed.
Clamp for screening

1
ins
Ma
1
tor
Cable interface
Mo
Motor cable
DC+, DC-, R (optional)
Mains cable
Fig. 45 Connection of lower mains and motor cables.
Start with the lower mains and motor cables (marked

Mains 1 and Motor 1 in Fig. 46).
1. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC Drive
Clamps for screening housing.
2. Remove the upper mounting rail by loosen the four
Cable interface fastening screws.
Motor cable
DC+, DC-, R (optional)
Mains cable
Fig. 44 Connecting motor and mains cables.
1. Remove the cable interface plate from the AC drive

housing.
2. Put the cables through the glands.
3. Strip the cable according to Table 15.
4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective mains/
motor terminal.
1
ins
5. Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the

Ma
1
tor
cable in the clamp with good electrical contact to

Mo
the cable screen.

with the fixing screws. Fig. 46 Removed upper mounting rail.

3. Put the two lower cables (Mains 1 and Motor 1 Emotron FDU48-090 mount extra ferrite
cables) through the lower glands in the cable core
interface plate. Mount the ferrite core and its isolation sheet (included in
4. Strip the cables according to Table 17 and Fig. 55.
5. Connect the cable lugs to the stripped cable ends. the delivery) on the three motor phases U,V &W.
6. Connect the cable lugs to respective mains and The protective earth (PE) and the screen of the cable should
motor terminal bolts. be mounted outside the core see Fig. 49.
the cable screen.
1
Screw
ins
Ma
1
tor
Upper mounting rail

Mo
Fig. 49 Ferrite core mounted on the motor cables
The ferrite core is mounted on the motor cable to reduce

Fig. 47 Upper mounting rail mounted over the lower cables.
disturbances and to fulfil the EMC standards. Since the core
becomes very hot, the cables must be protected by a thermal
Continue with the upper mains and motor cables (marked
Mains 2 and Motor 2 in Fig. 48). isolation sheet that is attached on the core. The longer
motor cables the hotter the core becomes.
1. Mount the upper mounting rail over the lower,
connected cables (Mains 1 and Motor 1 cables) at
same place as before, with the four screws. NOTE: If the core is not mounted or mounted
2. Put the two upper cables (Mains 2 and Motor 2) incorrect, the AC drive does not fulfil the EMC
through the glands in the cable interface plate. standards. If the protective isolation sheet is not
3. Strip the cables according to Table 17 and Fig. 55. mounted, the motor cable can be damaged from the
4. Connect the cable lugs to the stripped cable ends. hot core.
5. Connect the cable lugs to respective mains/motor
terminal bolts.
the cable screen.
with the fixing screws.
ins ns 2
Ma Mai
1
tor r 2
to
Mo
1
Mo
Fig. 48 All cables and cable clamps connected.

AC drive model 48-300 and 69-250 and up 3.3.1 Connection of mains and
motor cables on IP20 modules
The Emotron IP 20 modules are delivered complete with
factory mounted cables for mains and motor. The length of
the cables are app. 1100 mm (43 in). The cables are marked
L1, L2, L3 for mains connection and U, V, W for motor
connection.
NOTE: The IP20 modules are connected to PE/

Ground via the mounting screws. Make sure that
these will have good contact to the grounded
mounting plate/ cabinet wall.
For detailed information about use of the IP20 modules,

please contact CG Drives & Automation.
PEBB 1 PEBB 2
(Master)
DC-, DC+, R
(optional)
Motor connection
U
V
W
Mains Connection
L1
L2
L3
Ground / earth
connection
bus bar
Fig. 50 Connect motor cables and mains cables to the

terminals and earth/ground to the bus bar. Mains cables Motor cables
L1, L2, L3 U, V, W
AC drive models 48-300 and 69-250 and up are supplied
with power clamps for mains and motors. For connection of Fig. 51 IP20 module sizes G and H, with qty 2 x 3 mains
PE and earth there is a grounding bus bar. cables and qty 2 x 3 motor cables.
For all type of wires to be connected the stripping length
should be 32 mm (1.26 in).

PEBB 1
(Master) PEBB 2 PEBB 3
Mains cables Motor cables

L1, L2, L3 U, V, W
Fig. 52 IP20 module sizes I/I69 with qty 3 x 3 Mains cables

and qty 3 x 3 motor cables.

3.4 Cable specifications 3.4.1 Stripping lengths
Fig. 53 indicates the recommended stripping lengths for
Table 14 Cable specifications motor and mains cables.
Cable Cable specification
Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the

Mains
voltage used.
Symmetrical three conductor cable with
concentric protection (PE) wire or a four
Motor
conductor cable with compact low-impedance
concentric shield for the voltage used.
Control cable with low-impedance shield,
Control
screened.
Mains Motor/Brake
(06-F45-cables only)
Fig. 53 Stripping lengths for cables
Table 15 Stripping lengths for mains, motor, brake and earth cables for frame sizes B to F
Mains cable Motor cable Brake cable Earth cable

Frame
Model FDU a b a b c a b c a
size b
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
mm (in)
(in) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in)
90 10 20 10 20
##-003 – 018 B 10 (0.4) 90 (3.5) 90 (3.5) 90 (3.5) 10 (0.4)
(3.5) (0.4) (0.8) (0.4) (0.8)
##-026 – 046 C 150 150 14 20 150 14 20 150
14 (0.2) 14 (0.2)
69-002 – 025 C69 (5.9) (5.9) (0.2) (0.8) (5.9) (0.2) (0.8) (5.9)
69-002 – 025 C2(69) 65 18 36 18 36

18 (0.7) 65 (2.7) 65 (2.7) 65 (2.7) M6 screw*
48-025 – 058 C2 (2.7) (0.7) (1.4) (0.7) (1.4)
##-061 – 074 D 110 110 17 34 110 17 34 110

17 (0.7) 17 (0.7)
69-033 – 058 D69 (4.3) (4.3) (0.7) (1.4) (4.3) (0.7) (1.4) (4.3)
69-033 – 058 D2(69) 92 18 36 18 36

18 (0.7) 92 (3.6) 92 (3.6) 92 (3.6) M6 screw*
48-072 – 105 D2 (3.6) (0.7) (1.4) (0.7) (1.4)
##-090 – 175 E 173 173 41 173 41 173 25 (1)

25 (1) 25 (1)
48-142 – 171 E2 (6.8) (6.8) (1.6) (6.8) (1.6) (6.8) 40 (1.6)**
48-205 – 293 F2 25 (1)

32 46 46 32 (1.3)
48-210 – 295 F 178 (7) 32 (1.3) 178 (7) 178 (7) 178 (7)
(1.3) (1.8) (1.8) 40 (1.6)**
69-082 – 200 F69
* Cable lug.
** Valid when brake chopper electronics are built in

Fig. 54 indicates the distance from the cable clamp to the connection bolts for decision of stripping lengths for the cables.
DC-
DC+
R
C
B
A
Recommended screen length

for Motor and brake cables is approximate 35 mm (1.4 in).
Fig. 54 Distances from the cable clamp to the connection bolts size FA2.
Table 16 Distances from the cable clamp to the connection bolts for mains, motor, brake and earth cables for frame size FA2.
Mains cable Motor cable Brake cable Earth cable

Frame
Model FDU B B C A
size Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt
mm mm mm mm
dimension dimension dimension dimension
(in) (in) (in) (in)
375 375 420 270

48-365-20 FA2 M10 bolt* M10 bolt* M8 bolt* M8 bolt*
(14.8) (14.8) (16.5) (10.6)
* Connect with cable lugs.

Fig. 55 indicates the distance from the cable clamp to the connection bolts for decision of stripping lengths for the cables.
D
DC-
DC+
R
E
A
B
C
Recommended screen length

for Motor and brake cables is approximate 35 mm (1.4 in).
Fig. 55 Distances from the cable clamp to the connection bolts size FA.
Table 17 Distances from the cable clamp to the connection bolts for mains, motor, brake and earth cables for frame size FA.
Mains cable 1 Motor cable 1 Brake cable Earth cable

Frame
Model FDU B B C A
size Bolt Bolt Bolt Bolt
mm mm mm mm
dimension dimension dimension dimension
(in) (in) (in) (in)
360 360 400 270

48-365-54 FA M10 bolt* M10 bolt* M8 bolt* M8 bolt*
(14.2) (14.2) (15.7) (10.6)
Mains cable 2 Motor cable 2 Earth cable

Frame
Model FDU D D E
size Bolt Bolt Bolt
mm mm mm
dimension dimension dimension
(in) (in) (in)
400 400 320

48-365-54 FA M10 bolt* M10 bolt* M8 bolt*
(15.7) (15.7) (12.6)
* Connect with cable lugs.
3.4.2 Fuse data

Please refer to the chapter Technical data, section 14.7, page 248.

3.4.3 Cable connection data for mains, motor and PE cables according to
IEC ratings
NOTE: The dimensions of the power terminals used in the cabinet drive models 300 to 3K0 can differ depending on
customer specification.
Table 18 Cable connector range and tightening torque for Emotron FDU48 and FDU52, according to IEC ratings.
Cable cross section connector range
Frame Mains and motor Brake PE Cable

Model FDU
size type
Tightening Tightening Tightening
Cable area Cable area Cable area
torque torque torque
mm2 mm2 mm2
Nm Nm Nm
##-003-54
##-004-54
##-006-54
##-008-54 B 0.5 - 10 1.2-1.4 0.5 - 10 1.2-1.4 1.5 - 16 2.6
##-010-54
##-013-54
##-018-54
48-025-20
48-030-20
48-036-20 C2 4 - 25 2 4 - 25 2 4 - 25 * 4.3
48-045-20
48-058-20
##-026-54
Copper
##-031-54 2.5-16 2.5-16 (Cu) /
6-16 stranded
C stranded 1.2-1.4 stranded 1.2-1.4 1.2-1.4 Aluminum
##-037-54 6-25 solid
2.5-25 solid 2.5-25 solid (Al) 75°C
##-046-54
48-072-20 0.75 -50 3.3 0.75 -50 3.3
48-088-20 D2 10 - 70* 4.3
16 - 50 7.9 16 - 50 7.9
48-105-20
##-061-54 6-35 6-35 16-35
D stranded 2.8-3 stranded 2.8-3 stranded 2.8-3
##-074-54 6-50 solid 6-50 solid 16-50 solid
48-142-20 31 (for
E2
48-171-20 31 (for 16-34 mm2)
31 (for
16-34 mm2) 16- 150
48-090-54 16-34 mm2)
42 (for
16- 150 16 - 120
48-109-54 42 (for 35-150 mm2)
42 (for
E 35-120 16 - 185 **
35-150 mm2)
48-146-54 mm2)
48-175-54 10 **

Table 18 Cable connector range and tightening torque for Emotron FDU48 and FDU52, according to IEC ratings.

Model FDU
size type
Cable area Cable area Cable area
mm2 mm2 mm2
Nm Nm Nm
48-205-20 31 (for
31 (for
25-34 mm2)
48-244-20 F2 25-34 mm2)
31 (for Copper
48-293-20 16-34 mm2) 25 - 240 42 (for (Cu) /
42 (for
35-152 mm2) Aluminum
48-210-54 25 - 240 35-152 mm2) 16 - 150
42 (for (Al) 75°C
48-228-54 35-150 16 - 185 ** 56 (for
56 (for
F mm2) 153-240 mm2)
48-250-54 153-240
mm2)
48-295-54 10 ** ***
48-365-20 FA2 Copper

M10 M8 M8 (Cu) /
47 24 24
48-365-54 FA connection connection connection Aluminum
(Al) 75°C
48-300-
IP**** G
48-375-IP (2x) 25 - 240 (2x) 25 - 240
48-430-IP
H
48-500-IP
48-600-IP
48-650-IP
I (3x) 25 - 240 (3x) 25 - 240
48-720, 750-
IP 31 (for
31 (for
25-34 mm2)
48-860-IP 25-34 mm2)
PE/Earth via mounting screws/
Copper
42 (for mounting frame.
48-900-IP J (4x) 25 - 240 42 (for (4x) 25 - 240 (Cu) /
35-152 In order to secure proper
35-152 mm2) Aluminum
48-1k0-IP mm2) earthing, always use all
(Al) 75°C
mounting screws and tighten
48-1k15-IP 56 (for
56 (for them thoroughly.
153-240
48-1k2-IP KA (5x) 25 - 240 (5x) 25 - 240 153-240
mm2)
mm2)
48-1k25-IP
48-1k35-IP
K (6x) 25 - 240 (6x) 25 - 240
48-1k5-IP
48-1k75-IP L (7x) 25 - 240 (7x) 25 - 240
48-2k0-IP M (8x) 25 - 240 (8x) 25 - 240
48-2k25-IP N (9x) 25 - 240 (9x) 25 - 240
(10x) 25 -
48-2k5-IP O (10x) 25 - 240
240
* With cable lug for M6 screw.

** Valid when brake chopper electronics are built in.
*** Use 90 °C Mains and motor cables if surrounding temperature is higher than 35 °C otherwise 75 °C cables.
**** IP 23 or IP 54 for cabinet drive.

Table 19 Cable connector range and tightening torque for Emotron FDU69, according to IEC ratings

Model FDU
size type
Tightening Tightening
Cable area Cable area Tightening torque Cable area
torque torque
mm2 mm2 Nm mm2
Nm Nm
69-002-
XX*****
69-003-XX
69-004-XX
69-006-XX
2.5 - 16 2.5 - 16 6 - 16
69-008-XX C69/
stranded 1.2 - 1.4 stranded 1.2 - 1.4 stranded 1.2 - 1.4
C2(69)
69-010-XX 2.5 - 25 solid 2.5 - 25 solid 6 - 25 solid
69-013-XX
69-018-XX
69-021-XX Copper
(Cu)/
69-025-XX Aluminum
69-033-XX (Al)
75°C
69-042-XX 6 - 35 6 - 35
D69/ 6 - 35 stranded
2.8 - 3 stranded 2.8 - 3 stranded 2.8 - 3
69-050-XX D2(69) 10 - 50 solid
10-50 solid 10 - 50 solid
69-058-XX
69-082-54 31 (for
16 - 34
69-090-54
31 (for 31 (for mm2)
69-109-54 16 - 34 mm2) 16 - 34 mm2) 16 - 150
F69 16 - 150 16 - 120 42 (for
69-146-54 42 (for 42 (for 35-150
69-175-54 35-150 mm2) 35-120 mm2) 16 - 185 ** mm2)
69-200-54 10 **

Table 19 Cable connector range and tightening torque for Emotron FDU69, according to IEC ratings
69-250
69-300
H69 (2x) 25 - 240 (2x) 25 - 240
69-375
69-400
69-430
69-500 I69 (3x) 25 - 240 (3x) 25 - 240
69-595
69-650
69-720 J69 (4x) 25 - 240 31 (for (4x) 25 - 240 31 (for
25-34 mm2)
69-800 25-34 mm2) PE/Earth via mounting
Copper
screws/mounting frame.
69-905 42 (for (Cu)/
42 (for In order to secure proper
KA69 (5x) 25 - 240 35-152 mm2) (5x) 25 - 240 Aluminu
69-995 35-152 mm2) earthing, always use all
m (Al)
mounting screws and
69-1k2 K69 (6x) 25 - 240 56 (for (6x) 25 - 240 75°C
56 (for tighten them thoroughly.
153-240
153-240 mm2)
69-1k4 L69 (7x) 25 - 240 mm2) (7x) 25 - 240
69-1k6 M69 (8x) 25 - 240 (8x) 25 - 240
69-1k8 N69 (9x) 25 - 240 (9x) 25 - 240
69-2k0 O69 (10x) 25 - 240 (10x) 25 - 240
69-2k2 P69 (11x) 25 - 240 (11x) 25 - 240
69-2k4 Q69 (12x) 25 - 240 (12x) 25 - 240
69-2k6 R69 (13x) 25 - 240 (13x) 25 - 240
69-2k8 S69 (14x) 25 - 240 (14x) 25 - 240
69-3k0 T69 (15x) 25 - 240 (15x) 25 - 240

***** XX=20 or 54, module IP-class.

3.4.4 Cable connection data for mains, motor and PE cables according to
NEMA ratings
List of cable cross section connector range with minimum
required AWG cable cross section which fits to the terminals
according to UL-requirements.
Table 20 Cable connector range and tightening torque for Emotron FDU48 and FDU52, according to NEMA ratings
Model Frame Mains and motor Brake PE Cable

FDU size type
Cable range Cable range Cable range
AWG AWG AWG
Lb-In Lb-In Lb-In
##-003-54
##-004-54
##-006-54
##-008-54 B 20 - 8 11.5 20 - 8 11.5 16 - 6 23
##-010-54
##-013-54
##-018-54
48-025-20
48-030-20
48-036-20 C2 12 - 4 18 12 - 4 18 12 - 4* 38
48-045-20
48-058-20
##-026-54
##-031-54 Copper
C 18 - 4 10.6-12.3 18 - 4 10.6-12.3 18 - 4 10.6-12.3 (Cu)
##-037-54 75°C
##-046-54
48-072-20 10 - 0 30 - 50 10 - 0 30 - 50
48-088-20 D2 8 - 2/0* 38
3 - 2/0 70 3 - 2/0 70
48-105-20
##-061-54
D 10 - 0 24.3-26.1 10 - 0 24.3-26.1 10 - 0 24.3-26.1
##-074-54
48-142-20 275 (for
E2
48-171-20 275 (for AWG 6-2)
275 (for
AWG 6 - 2)
48-090-54 AWG 6 - 2) 6 - 300 kcmil
375 (for
6 - 300 kcmil 6 - 250 kcmil
48-109-54 375 (for AWG 1-
375 (for AWG
E AWG 1 - 300Kcmil)
48-146-54 1 -250Kcmil)
300Kcmil)
6 - 2/0**
48-175-54 88**

Table 20 Cable connector range and tightening torque for Emotron FDU48 and FDU52, according to NEMA ratings
Model Frame Mains and motor Brake PE Cable

FDU size type
Cable range Cable range Cable range
AWG AWG AWG
Lb-In Lb-In Lb-In
48-205-20 275 (for

AWG 4 -
48-244-20 F2
2)
275 (for Copper
48-293-20
AWG 4 - 2) (Cu)
375 (for
48-210-54 275 (for 75°C
4 - 500 kcmil AWG 1 -
375 (for AWG AWG 6 - 2)
48-228-54 300 kcmil)
4 - 500 kcmil 1 -300 kcmil) 6 - 300 kcmil
48-250-54 375 (for AWG
500 (for
F 500 (for AWG 1 -300Kcmil)
AWG 350
350 -500
-500
kcmil)
48-295-54 6 - 2/0** kcmil) ***
88**
48-365-20 FA2 Copper
M8
M10 connection 416 M8 connection 212 212 (Cu)
48-365-54 FA connection
75°C
48-300
G
48-375
(2x) 4 - 500 kcmil (2x) 4 - 500 kcmil
48-430
H
48-500
48-600
48-650
I (3x) 4 - 500 kcmil (3x) 4 - 500 kcmil
48-720,
750 275 (for 275 (for
AWG 4 - 2) AWG 4 - 2)
48-860
PE/Earth via mounting
375 (for 375 (for
48-900 J (4x) 4 - 500 kcmil (4x) 4 -500 kcmil screws/mounting frame.
AWG 1 - 300 AWG 1 -300 Copper
In order to secure proper
48-1k0 kcmil) kcmil) (Cu)
earthing, always use all
75°C
48-1k15 mounting screws and
500 (for AWG 500 (for AWG
tighten them thoroughly.
48-1K2 KA (5x) 4 - 500 kcmil 350 -500 (5x) 4 - 500 kcmil 350 -500
kcmil) kcmil)
48-1k25
48-1k35
K (6x) 4 - 500 kcmil (6x) 4 - 500 kcmil
48-1k5
48-1k75 L (7x) 4 - 500 kcmil (7x) 4 - 500 kcmil
48-2k0 M (8x) 4 - 500 kcmil (8x) 4 - 500 kcmil
48-2k25 N (9x) 4 - 500 kcmil (9x) 4 - 500 kcmil
(10x) 4 - 500
48-2k5 O (10x)4-500 kcmil
kcmil
* With cable lug for M6 screw.

*** Use 90 °C Mains and motor cables if surrounding temperature is higher than 35 °C otherwise 75 °C cables.

3.5 Thermal protection on the
motor
Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan.
The cooling capacity of this built-in fan is dependent on the
frequency of the motor. At low frequency, the cooling
capacity will be insufficient for nominal loads. Please
contact the motor supplier for the cooling characteristics of
the motor at lower frequency.
WARNING!
Depending on the cooling characteristics
of the motor, the application, the speed
and the load, it may be necessary to use
forced cooling on the motor.
Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the

motor. Depending on the type of motor thermistor fitted,
the optional PTC input may be used. The motor thermistor
gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the
motor, thus of the speed of the motor fan. See the functions,
Motor I2t type [231] and Motor I2t current [232].
3.6 Motors in parallel

It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total
current does not exceed the nominal value of the AC drive.
The following has to be taken into account when setting the
motor data:
Menu [221] The motors in parallel must have the

Motor Voltage: same motor voltage.
Menu [222]
The motors in parallel must have the
Motor
same motor frequency.
Frequency:
Menu [223] Add the motor power values for the
Motor Power: motors in parallel.
Menu [224]
Add the current for the motors in parallel.
Motor Current:
Menu [225] Set the average speed for the motors in
Motor Speed: parallel.
Menu [227] Set the average Cos PHI value for the
Motor Cos PHI: motors in parallel.

4. Control Connections
4.1 Control board WARNING!

Fig. 56 shows the layout of the control board which is where Always switch off the mains voltage and
the parts most important to the user are located. Although wait at least 7 minutes to allow the DC
capacitors to discharge before connecting
the control board is galvanically isolated from the mains, for
the control signals or changing position of any
safety reasons do not make changes while the mains supply
switches. If the option External supply is used, switch
is on! of the mains to the option. This is done to prevent
damage on the control board.
X5 X6 X7
X4 1 2 3
Option
Communication
C
X8
Control
Panel
Switches
I S1 U I S2 U I S3 U I S4 U
Control
signals R02
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 41 42 43
Relay outputs
AO1 AO2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DO1 DO2 DI8 NC C NO
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X2 31 32 33 51 52
+10V AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 -10V DI1 DI2 DI3 +24V NC C NO X3 NO C
R01 R03
Fig. 56 Control board layout
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Control Connections 47

4.2 Terminal connections Table 21 Control signals
The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is Terminal Name Function (Default)
accessible after opening the front panel.
Relay outputs
The table describes the default functions for the signals. The
inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as 31 N/C 1
Relay 1 output
described in chapter 11. page 95. For signal specifications 32 COM 1 Trip, active when the AC drive
refer to chapter 14. page 235. is in a TRIP condition.
33 N/O 1
NOTE: The maximum total combined current for 41 N/C 2
Relay 2 output
outputs 11, 20 and 21 is 100mA.
42 COM 2 Run, active when the AC
drive is started.
43 N/O 2
NOTE: It is possible to use external 24V DC if
connection to Common (15). 51 COM 3 Relay 3 output
52 N/O 3 Off
Table 21 Control signals
Terminal Name Function (Default) NOTE: N/C is opened when the relay is active and N/
O is closed when the relay is active.
Outputs
1 +10 V +10 VDC supply voltage
NOTE! Using potentiometer for reference signal to
6 -10 V -10 VDC supply voltage Analogue input: Possible potentiometer value in
range of 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ (¼ Watt) linear, where we
7 Common Signal ground advice to use a linear 1 kΩ / ¼ W type potentiometer
11 +24 V +24 VDC supply voltage for best control linearity.
12 Common Signal ground

15 Common Signal ground
Digital inputs WARNING!
The relay terminals 31-52 are single
8 DigIn 1 RunL (reverse) isolated. Do NOT mix SELV voltage with
e.g. 230 VAC on these terminals. A solution
9 DigIn 2 RunR (forward)
when dealing with mixed SELV/system
10 DigIn 3 Off voltage signals is to install an additional I/
O board option ( see chapter 13.8 page
16 DigIn 4 Off 229) and connect all SELV voltage signals
17 DigIn 5 Off to the relay terminals of this option board
while connecting all 230VAC signals to the
18 DigIn 6 Off control board relay terminals 31 - 52.
19 DigIn 7 Off
22 DigIn 8 RESET
Digital outputs
20 DigOut 1 Ready
21 DigOut 2 No trip
Analogue inputs
2 AnIn 1 Process Ref
3 AnIn 2 Off
4 AnIn 3 Off
5 AnIn 4 Off
Analogue outputs
13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed
14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque
48 Control Connections CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

4.3 Inputs configuration
with the switches
The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configuration
for the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1, AnIn2, AnIn3 and AnIn4
as described in table 22. See Fig. 56 for the location of the
switches.
Table 22 Switch settings

Input Signal type Switch
S1 I U
Voltage
AnIn1
S1 I U
Current (default)
S2 I U
Voltage
AnIn2
S2 I U
Current (default)
S3 I U
Voltage
AnIn3
S3 I U
Current (default)
S4 I U
Voltage
AnIn4
S4 I U
Current (default)
NOTE: Scaling and offset of AnIn1 - AnIn4 can be

configured using the software. See menus [512],
[515], [518] and [51B] in section 11.7, page 168.
NOTE: the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2

can be configured using the software. See menu [530]
section 11.7.3, page 176

4.4 Connection example
Fig. 57 gives an overall view of a AC drive connection
example.
EMC-
filter Motor
Alternative for
potentiometer Optional ***
control** Motor PTC
1
Optional
2
3 +10 VDC
0 - 10 V AnIn 1: Reference
4 4 - 20 mA
5 AnIn 2
6 AnIn 3
7 AnIn 4 Common
-10 VDC AnOut 1
Common AnOut 2
DigIn 1:RunL* DigOut 1
DigIn 2:RunR* DigOut 2
DigIn3
+24 VDC
Common
Relay 1
DigIn 4
DigIn 5
DigIn 6
DigIn 7
Relay 2
DigIn 8:Reset*
Relay 3
Comm. options Other options
Fieldbus option Option board

* Default setting or PC
** The switch S1 is set to U
Possible potentiometer value in range of 1 kΩ
to 10 kΩ (¼ Watt) linear, where we advice to use a
linear 1 kΩ / ¼ W type potentiometer for best control linearity.
*** = Optional terminals X1: 78 - 79 for connection of Motor-PTC on frame sizes B, C and D.
Fig. 57 Connection example

4.5 Connecting the Control
Signals
4.5.1 Cables
The standard control signal connections are suitable for
stranded flexible wire up to 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) and for solid Terminal 78 & 79
wire up to 2.5 mm2(AWG14) . see Table 23
NOTE: The screening of control signal cables must

comply with the immunity levels given in the EMC
Directive (reduction of noise level).
NOTE: The control cables must be separated from Screen clamps

motor and mains cables. for signal cables
Table 23 Description of optional terminals in Fig. 58 to Fig. 62.
Terminals 78, 79 For connection of Motor PTC

For connection of 24V Stand-by Control signals
Terminals A-, B+ Supply (Valid for sizes D/D2/C69/
C2(69)/D69/D2(69)/FA/FA2)
Fig. 59 Connecting the control signals, FDU model 026 to
046, frame size C.
Feed-through of
signal cables 78 79
Terminal 78 & 79
see Table 23
See
Table 23
Screen clamps
for signal cables
Screen clamps
for signal cables
motor PTC option
Control signals Fig. 60 Connecting the control signals, FDU model 48-025 to
48-058 frame size C2 and model 69-002 to 69-025
frame size C2(69).

018, frame size B.

Terminal 78 & 79
see Table 23
Terminal A- & B+
see Table 23
Screen clamps
for signal cables
Screen clamps
for signal cables
L1 L2 L3 PE DC- DC+ R U V
Control signals
Control signals

074, frame size D and model 69-033 to 69-058
frame size D(69). Fig. 63 Connecting the control signals, FDU model 48-090 to
295 and FDU model 69-82 to 200, frame size E, F
and F69 (principle drawing).
+
-B
Feed-through of
,A
79
signal cables
78
Feed-through of
signal cables
See
Table 23
(Options)
L1
L2
L3 D
C- D
C+
R
U
V
W
Screen clamps
for signal cables
Screen clamps
for signal cables
Fig. 62 Connecting the control signals, FDU model 48-072 to

48-105 frame size D2 and model 69-033 to 69-058
frame size D2(69).
Fig. 64 Connecting the control signals, FDU model 48-142 to
48-365 frame size E2, F2 and FA2 (principle draw-
ing)

from, for example, a pressure sensor. Therefore it is advised
to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances.
NOTE: The screening of control signal cables is
necessary to comply with the immunity levels given in
the EMC Directive (it reduces the noise level).
4.5.3 Screening
For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the
screening is connected to both ends: the AC drive side and
NOTE: Control cables must be separated from motor at the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See Fig. 65.
and mains cables.
It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowed
to cross mains and motor cables at a 90° angle. Do not let
4.5.2 Types of control signals the signal cable go in parallel with the mains and motor
cable.
Always make a distinction between the different types of
signals. Because the different types of signals can adversely
affect each other, use a separate cable for each type. This is 4.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended
often more practical because, for example, the cable from a
pressure sensor may be connected directly to the AC drive.
connection?
In principle, the same measures applied to motor cables
We can distinguish between the following types of control must be applied to all control signal cables, in accordance
signals: with the EMC-Directives.
Analogue inputs For all signal cables as mentioned in section 4.5.2 the best
Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) normally results are obtained if the screening is connected to both
used as control signals for speed, torque and PID feedback ends. See Fig. 65.
signals.
NOTE: Each installation must be examined carefully
Analogue outputs before applying the proper EMC measurements.
Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) which
change slowly or only occasionally in value. In general, these
are control or measurement signals.
Digital
Voltage or current signals (0-10 V, 0-24 V, 0/4-20 mA)
which can have only two values (high or low) and only
occasionally change in value.
Data
Usually voltage signals (0-5 V, 0-10 V) which change rapidly
and at a high frequency, generally data signals such as
RS232, RS485, Profibus, etc.
Relay
Relay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductive
loads (auxiliary relay, lamp, valve, brake, etc.).
Signal Tightenin
Maximum wire size Cable type
type g torque
Ana- Rigid cable:

Screened
logue 0.14-2.5 mm2
(AWG 26 - 14)
Digital Flexible cable: Screened
0.5 Nm
Data 0.14-1.5 mm2 (4.4 LB- Screened
(AWG 26 - 16) in)
Cable with ferrule:
Relay 0.25-1.5 mm2 Not screened
(AWG 24 - 16)
Example:
The relay output from a AC drive which controls an
auxiliary relay can, at the moment of switching, form a
source of interference (emission) for a measurement signal

4.6 Connecting options
Control board
The option cards are connected by the optional connectors
Pres-
sure
X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig. 56, page 47 and
sensor mounted above the control board. The inputs and outputs
(exam-
ple) of the option cards are connected in the same way as other
control signals.
External control
(e.g. in metal housing)
Control consol
Fig. 65 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signal

cables.
4.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA)

A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive to
disturbances than a 0-10 V signal, because it is connected to
an input which has a lower impedance (250 Ω) than a
voltage signal (20 kΩ). It is therefore strongly advised to use
current control signals if the cables are longer than a few
metres.
4.5.6 Twisted cables

Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interference
if the cables carrying them are “twisted”. This is certainly to
be recommended if screening cannot be used. By twisting
the wires the exposed areas are minimised. This means that
in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency (HF)
interference fields, no voltage can be induced. For a PLC it
is therefore important that the return wire remains in
proximity to the signal wire. It is important that the pair of
wires is fully twisted over 360°.

5. Getting Started 5.1.2 Motor cables
Connect the motor cables as in Fig. 66. To comply with the
EMC directive you have to use screened cables and the
This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the motor cable screen has to be connected on both sides: to the
quickest way to get the motor shaft turning. We will show housing of the motor and the housing of the AC drive.
you two examples, remote control and local control.
We assume that the AC drive is mounted on a wall or in a
AC drive
cabinet as in the chapter 2. page 13.
RFI-Filter
First there is general information of how to connect mains, Mains
motor and control cables. The next section describes how to
use the function keys on the control panel. The subsequent
examples covering remote control and local control describe
how to program/set the motor data and run the AC drive Metal EMC cable
glands
and motor.
Screened cables
5.1 Connect the mains and Metal housing
motor cables Brake

resistor
Output
coils
(option) (option)
Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local
regulations. The cable must be able to carry the AC drive Metal connector housing
load current.
Metal EMC
cable gland Motor
5.1.1 Mains cables
Mains
1. Connect the mains cables as in Fig. 66. The AC drive
has, as standard, a built-in RFI mains filter that complies
with category C3 which suits the Second Environment Fig. 66 Connection of mains and motor cables.
standard.
Table 24 Mains and motor connection
L1,L2,L3 Mains supply, 3 -phase
PE Safety earth
Motor earth
U, V, W Motor output, 3-phase
WARNING!
In order to work safely the mains earth
must be connected to PE and the motor
earth to .
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-03r5 Getting Started 55

5.2 Using the function keys 5.3 Remote control
In this example external signals are used to control the AC
drive/motor.
100 200 300
A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V, an external start button
and a reference value will also be used.
210 220 5.3.1 Connect control cables

Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting. In
this example the motor/AC drive will run with right
221 rotation.
To comply with the EMC standard, use screened control
cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) or
solid wire up to 2.5 mm2(AWG13).
Fig. 67 Example of menu navigation when entering motor
voltage 2. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 (Com-
mon) and 2 (AnIn 1) as in Fig. 68.
3. Connect an external start button between terminal 11
step to lower menu level or confirm changed (+24 VDC) and 9 (DigIn2, RUNR) as in Fig. 68.
setting
X1
12
step to higher menu level or ignore changed 1
+ 13
setting 2
Reference 14
4-20 mA 3
0V 15
4
step to next menu on the same level 16
5
17
6
18
step to previous menu on the same level 7
19
8
20
increase value or change selection 9
Start 21
10
22
11
decrease value or change selection
X2
41
31
42
32
43
33
X3
51
52
Fig. 68 Wiring
5.3.2 Switch on the mains

Once the mains is switched on, the internal fan in the AC
drive will run for 5 seconds (In frame size A3 the fan runs
continuously).
56 Getting Started CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-03r5

5.3.3 Set the Motor Data 5.4 Local control
Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry
motor data is used in the calculation of complete operational out a test run.
data in the AC drive.
Use a 400 V motor and the control panel.
Change settings using the keys on the control panel. For
further information about the control panel and menu
structure, see the chapter 10. page 83. 5.4.1 Switch on the mains
Once the mains is switched on, the AC drive is started and
Menu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed when started.
the internal fan will run for 5 seconds (In frame size A3 the
1. Press to display menu [200], “Main Setup”. fan runs continuously).
2. Press and then to display menu [220], “Motor
Data”. 5.4.2 Select manual control
3. Press to display menu [221] and set motor voltage. Menu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed when started.
4. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm
with . 1. Press to display menu [200], “Main Setup”.
5. Set motor frequency [222]. 2. Press to display menu [210], “Operation”.
6. Set motor power [223]. 3. Press to display menu [211], “Language”.
7. Set motor current [224]. 4. Press to display menu [214], “Reference Control”.
8. Set motor speed [225]. 5. Select Keyboard using the key and press to
confirm.
9. Set power factor (cos ϕ) [227].
6. Press to get to menu [215], “Run/Stop Control”.
10. Select supply voltage level used [21B].
7. Select Keyboard using the key and press to
11. [229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, confirm with confirm.
and give start command .
8. Press to get to previous menu level and then to
The AC drive will now measure some motor parameters. display menu [220], “Motor Data”.
The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft
does not rotate. When the ID run is finished after about
one minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), press to 5.4.3 Set the Motor Data
continue.
Enter correct motor data for the connected motor.
12. Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value. The default
range is 4-20 mA. If you need a 0-10 V reference value, 9. Press to display menu [221].
change switch (S1) on control board. 10. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm
13. Switch off power supply. with .
14. Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as in 11. Press to display menu [222].
Fig. 68. 12. Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered.
15. Ready! 13. Press twice and then to display menu [100],
16. Switch on power supply. Preferred View.
5.3.4 Run the AC drive 5.4.4 Enter a Reference Value

Now the installation is finished, and you can press the Enter a reference value.
external start button to start the motor. 14. Press until menu [300], “Process” is displayed.
When the motor is running the main connections are OK. 15. Press to display menu [310], “Set/View reference”
value.
16. Use the and keys to enter, for example, 300
rpm. We select a low value to check the rotation
direction without damaging the application.
5.4.5 Run the AC drive

Press the key on the control panel to run the motor
forward.
If the motor is running the main connections are OK.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-03r5 Getting Started 57

58 Getting Started CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-03r5
6. Applications
This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many
different applications/duties in which it is suitable to use AC
drives from CG Drives & Automation. Further on you will
find application examples of the most common applications
and solutions.
6.1 Application overview
6.1.1 Pumps
Challenge Emotron FDU solution Menu
Dry-running, cavitation and overheating damage Pump Curve Protection detects deviation.
411–419, 41C1– 41C9
the pump and cause downtime. Sends warning or activates safety stop.
Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been Automatic pump rinsing function: pump is set to
running at low speed or been stationary for a run at full speed at certain intervals, then return 362–368, 560, 640
while. Reduces the pump’s efficiency. to normal speed.
Motor runs at same speed despite varying PID continuously adapts pressure/flow to the
demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and level required. Sleep function activated when 320, 380, 342, 354
equipment stressed. none is needed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked pipe, a Pump Curve Protection detects deviation.
411–419, 41C1–41C9
valve not fully opened or a worn impeller. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
Water hammer damages the pump when
Smooth linear stops protect the equipment.
stopped. Mechanical stress on pipes, valves, 331–336
Eliminates need for costly motorized valves.
gaskets, seals.
6.1.2 Fans
Starting a fan rotating in the wrong direction can Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct
219, 341
be critical, e.g. a tunnel fan in event of a fire. direction and proper function.
Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong Motor is gradually slowed to complete stop
way. Starting causes high current peaks and before starting. Avoids blown fuses and 219, 33A, 335
mechanical stress. breakdown.
Regulating pressure/flow with dampers causes Automatic regulation of pressure/flow with motor
321, 354
high energy consumption and equipment wear. speed gives more exact control.
Motor runs at same speed despite varying PID continuously adapts to the level required.
demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and Sleep function is activated when none is 320, 380, 342, 354
equipment stressed. needed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked filter, a Load Curve Protection detects deviation.
411–419, 41C1–41C9
damper not fully opened or a worn belt. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Applications 59

6.1.3 Compressors
Compressor is damaged when cooling media Overload situation is quickly detected and safety
411–41A
enters the compressor screw. stop can be activated to avoid breakdown.
Load Curve Protection function detects
Pressure is higher than needed, causing leaks,
deviation. Warning is sent or safety stop 411–419, 41C1–41C9
stress on the equipment and excessive air use.
activated.
Motor runs at same speed when no air is
PID continuously adapts to the level required.
compressed. Energy is lost and equipment 320, 380, 342, 354
Sleep function activated when none is needed.
stressed.
Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.
411–419, 41C1–41C9
e.g. the compressor idling. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
6.1.4 Blowers
Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations. PID function continuously adapts pressure to the
320, 380
Wasted energy and risk of production stop. level required.
PID continuously adapts air flow to level
Motor runs at same speed despite varying
required. Sleep function activated when none is 320, 380, 342, 354
demands. Energy is lost and equipment stressed.
needed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a broken damper, Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation.
411–419, 41C1–41C9
a valve not fully opened or a worn belt. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
60 Applications CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

7. Main Features Parameter Set A
Run/Stop
- Set B
This chapter contains descriptions of the main features of -
Torques Set C
the AC drive. -
- Set D
Controllers
7.1 Parameter sets -
-
Only valid if the option HCP - Handheld Control Panel is Limits/Prot.
-
used.
Parameter sets are used if an application requires different -Max Alarm
settings for different modes. For example, a machine can be

used for producing different products and thus requires two
11 +24 V
or more maximum speeds and acceleration/deceleration
times. With the four parameter sets different control options 10 Set Ctrl1
can be configured with respect to quickly changing the 16 Set Ctrl2
{
behaviour of the AC drive. It is possible to adapt the AC (NG06-F03_1)
drive online to altered machine behaviour. This is based on

Fig. 69 Selecting the parameter sets
the fact that at any desired moment any one of the four
parameter sets can be activated during Run or Stop, via the
digital inputs or the control panel and menu [241].
Select and copy parameter set
The parameter set selection is done in menu [241], “Select
Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digital Set”. First select the main set in menu [241], normally A.
input. Parameter sets can be changed during operation and Adjust all settings for the application. Usually most
stored in the control panel. parameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of work
by copying set A>B in menu [242]. When parameter set A is
NOTE: The only data not included in the parameter copied to set B you only change the parameters in the set
set is Motor data 1-4, (entered separately), language, that need to be changed. Repeat for C and D if used.
communication settings, selected set, local remote,
and keyboard locked.
With menu [242], Copy Set, it is easy to copy the complete
contents of a single parameter set to another parameter set.
If, for example, the parameter sets are selected via digital
Define parameter sets inputs, DigIn 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu [523] and DigIn
When using parameter sets you first decide how to select 4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu [524], they are activated as in
different parameter sets. The parameter sets can be selected Table 25.
via the control panel, via digital inputs or via serial
Activate the parameter changes via digital input by setting
communication. All digital inputs and virtual inputs can be
menu [241], “Select Set” to DigIn.
configured to select parameter set. The function of the
digital inputs is defined in the menu [520]. Table 25 Parameter set
Fig. 69 shows the way the parameter sets are activated via
any digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2. Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2
A 0 0
B 1 0
C 0 1
D 1 1
NOTE: The selection via the digital inputs is

immediately activated. The new parameter settings
will be activated on-line, also during Run.
NOTE: The default parameter set is parameter set A.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Main Features 61

Examples 7.1.2 One motor and two parameter
Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the
setup of a AC drive to adapt quickly to different application
sets
requirements. For example when This application is useful if you for example have a machine
running at two different speeds for different products.
• a process needs optimized settings in different stages of
the process, to Once default motor M1 is selected:
- increase the process quality 1. Select parameter set A in menu [241].
- increase control accuracy 2. Enter motor data in menu [220].
- lower maintenance costs 3. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs
- increase operator safety and outputs.
With these settings a large number of options are available. 4. If there are only minor differences between the set-
Some ideas are given here: tings in the parameter sets, you can copy parameter
set A to parameter set B, menu [242].
Multi frequency selection 5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and
Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be outputs.
selected via the digital inputs. In combination with the
parameter sets, 28 preset references can be selected using all Note: Do not change motor data in parameter set B.
5 digital inputs: DigIn1, 2 and 3 for selecting preset
reference within one parameter set and DigIn 4 and DigIn 5
for selecting the parameter sets. 7.1.3 Two motors and two
Bottling machine with 3 different products parameter sets
Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds This is useful if you have a machine with two motors that
when the machine needs to be set up. The 4th parameter set can not run at the same time, such as a cable winding
can be used for “normal” remote control when the machine machine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then turns
is running at full production. the wheel with the other motor.
Manual - automatic control One motor must stop before changing to an other motor.
If in an application something is filled up manually and then 1. Select parameter set A in menu [241].
the level is automatically controlled using PID regulation, 2. Select motor M1 in menu [212].
this is solved using one parameter set for the manual control 3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters
and one for the automatic control. e.g. inputs and outputs.
4. Select parameter set B in menu [241].
5. Select M2 in menu [212].
7.1.1 One motor and one parameter 6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters
set e.g. inputs and outputs.
This is the most common application for pumps and fans.
Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have been 7.1.4 Autoreset at trip
selected: For several non-critical application-related failure
1. Enter the settings for motor data. conditions, it is possible to automatically generate a reset
2. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs command to overcome the fault condition. The selection
and outputs can be made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximum
number of automatically generated restarts allowed can be
set, see menu [251], after this the AC drive will stay in fault
condition because external assistance is required.
62 Main Features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Example 7.1.6 Preset references
The motor is protected by an internal protection for thermal The AC drive is able to select fixed speeds via the control of
overload. When this protection is activated, the AC drive digital inputs. This can be used for situations where the
should wait until the motor is cooled down enough before required motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed values,
resuming normal operation. When this problem occurs according to certain process conditions. Up to 7 preset
three times in a short period of time, external assistance is references can be set for each parameter set, which can be
required. selected via all digital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrl1,
The following settings should be applied: Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. The amount digital inputs used
that are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number of Preset
• Insert maximum number of restarts; set menu [251] to
References available; using 1 input gives 1 speed, using 2
3.
inputs gives 3 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 7 speeds.
• Activate Motor I2t to be automatically reset; set menu
[25A] to 300 s. Example
The use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 / 300 / 800 rpm,
• Set relay 1, menu [551] to “AutoRst Trip”; a signal will requires the following settings:
be available when the maximum number of restarts is
reached and the AC drive stays in fault condition. • Set DigIn 5 as first selection input; set [525] to Preset
Ctrl1.
• The reset input must be constantly activated.
• Set DigIn 6 as second selection input; set [526] to Preset
Ctrl2.
7.1.5 Reference priority • Set menu [341] “Min Speed” to 50 rpm.
The active speed reference signal can be programmed from
several sources and functions. The table below shows the • Set menu [362] “Preset Ref 1” to 100 rpm.
priority of the different functions with regards to the speed • Set menu [363] “Preset Ref 2” to 300 rpm.
reference.
• Set menu [364] “Preset Ref 3” to 800 rpm.
Table 26 Reference priority With these settings, the AC drive switched on and a RUN
command given, the speed will be:
Main Priority Ref. selection Priority
• 50 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are low.
1. Jog, (menu [520], [348]) -
• 100 rpm, when DigIn 5 is high and DigIn 6 is low.
1. Preset
• 300 rpm, when DigIn 5 is low and DigIn 6 is high.
Remote 2. MotPot
• 800 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are high.
2. Reference selection, 3. AnIn
(menu [214]) Keypad -
Com -
Option -

7.2 Remote control functions Enable and Stop functions
Operation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functions Both functions can be used separately or simultaneously.
The choice of which function is to be used depends on the
As default, all the run/stop/reset related commands are
application and the control mode of the inputs (Level/Edge
programmed for remote operation via the inputs on the
[21A]).
terminal strip (terminals 1-22) on the control board. With
the function “Run/Stp Ctrl” [215] and “Reset Control”
[216], this can be selected for keyboard or serial NOTE: In Edge mode, at least one digital input must
be programmed to “stop”, because the Run
communication control.
commands are only able to start the AC drive.
NOTE: The examples in this paragraph do not cover

all possibilities. Only the most relevant combinations Enable
are given. The starting point is always the default Input must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If the
setting (factory) of the AC drive. input is made LOW, the output of the AC drive is
immediately disabled and the motor will coast.
Default settings of the Run/Stop/ CAUTION!

Enable/Reset functions ! If the Enable function is not programmed to a
digital input, it is considered to be active
The default settings are shown in Fig. 70. In this example
internally.
the AC drive is started and stopped with DigIn 2 and a reset
after trip can be given with DigIn 8.
Stop
If the input is low then the AC drive will stop according to
the selected stop mode set in menu [33B] “Stop Mode”. Fig.
X1
12
1 71 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input and
13
2 the Stop Mode=Decel [33B].
14
3
4
15 To run the input must be high.
16
5
17
6 NOTE: Stop Mode=Coast [33B] will give the same
18
7 behaviour as the Enable input.
19
8
20
RunR 9
21
Reset 10
22
+24 V 11
STOP
(STOP=DECEL)
X
Fig. 70 Default setting Run/Reset commands OUTPUT

SPEED
The inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation is
determined by the setting of the digital inputs. t
ENABLE
OUTPUT
SPEED
t
(06-F104_NG) (or if Spinstart is selected)
Fig. 71 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input

Reset and Autoreset operation
If the AC drive is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition, the INPUTS
AC drive can be remotely reset by a pulse (“low” to “high”
transition) on the Reset input, default on DigIn 8. ENABLE
Depending on the selected control method, a restart takes
place as follows: STOP
RUN R
Level-control
If the Run inputs remain in their position the AC drive will RUN L
start immediately after the Reset command is given.
Edge-control
After the Reset command is given a new Run command
must be applied to start the AC drive again. OUTPUT
Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active. STATUS
The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu
“Autoreset [250]”. Right rotation
Left rotation
NOTE: If the control commands are programmed for
Keyboard control or Com, Autoreset is not possible. Standstill
(06-F103new_1)
Run Inputs Level-controlled. Fig. 73 Input and output status for level-control
The inputs are set as default for level-control. This means
that an input is activated by making the input continuously Run Inputs Edge-controlled
“High”. This method is commonly used if, for example, Menu “[21A] Start signal” Level/Edge must be set to Edge
PLCs are used to operate the AC drive. to activate edge control. This means that an input is
activated by a “low” to “high” transition or vice versa.
CAUTION!
! Level-controlled inputs DO NOT comply with
the Machine Directive, if the inputs are
NOTE: Edge-controlled inputs comply with the
Machine Directive (see Chapter 8. page 77), if the
directly used to start and stop the machine.
inputs are directly used for starting and stopping the
machine.
The examples given in this and the following paragraphs
follow the input selection shown in Fig. 72. See Fig. 72. The Enable and Stop input must be active
continuously in order to accept any run-right or run-left
command. The last edge (RunR or RunL) is valid. Fig. 74
gives an example of a possible sequence.
X1
12
1
13
2
14
3
15
4
16
5
Stop 17
6
18
7
19
RunL 8
20
RunR 9
21
Enable 10
Reset 22
+24 V 11
Fig. 72 Example of wiring for Run/Stop/Enable/Reset inputs
The Enable input must be continuously active in order to

accept any run-right or run-left command. If both RunR
and RunL inputs are active, then the AC drive stops
according to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 73 gives an
example of a possible sequence.

7.4 Using the Control Panel
INPUTS Memory
ENABLE Data can be copied from the AC drive to the memory in the
control panel and vice versa. To copy all data (including
STOP parameter set A-D and motor data) from the AC drive to the
control panel, select Copy to CP[234], Copy to CP.
RUN R To copy data from the control panel to the AC drive, enter
RUN L the menu [245], Load from CP and select what you want to
copy.
The memory in the control panel is useful in applications
with AC drives without a control panel and in applications
where several AC drives have the same setup. It can also be
OUTPUT
used for temporary storage of settings. Use a control panel to
STATUS upload the settings from one AC drive and then move the
control panel to another AC drive and download the
settings.
Right rotation
Left rotation NOTE: Load from and copy to the AC drive is only
possible when the AC drive is in stop mode.
Standstill (06-F94new_1)
Fig. 74 Input and output status for edge-control
7.3 Performing an
AC drive
Identification Run
To get the optimum performance out of your AC drive/
motor combination, the AC drive must measure the
electrical parameters (resistance of stator winding, etc.) of
the connected motor. See menu [229] “Motor ID-Run”.
Fig. 75 Copy and load parameters between AC drive and

control panel

7.5 Load Monitor and
Process Protection [400]
7.5.1 Load Monitor [410]

The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as a
load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines
and processes against mechanical overload and underload,
such as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt
failure on a fan or a pump dry running. The load is
measured in the AC drive by the calculated motor shaft
torque. There is an overload alarm (Max Alarm and Max
Pre-Alarm) and an underload alarm (Min Alarm and Min
Pre-Alarm).
The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and
underload (pre-)alarms over the whole speed range. This
function can be used in constant load applications where the
torque is not dependent on the speed, e.g. conveyor belt,
displacement pump, screw pump, etc.
For applications with a torque that is dependent on the
speed, the Load Curve monitor type is preferred. By
measuring the actual load curve of the process,
characteristically over the range of minimum speed to
maximum speed, an accurate protection at any speed can be
established.
The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. The
pre-alarms act as a warning condition. All the alarms can be
monitored on the digital or relay outputs.
The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm levels
whilst running: maximum alarm, maximum pre-alarm,
minimum alarm and minimum pre-alarm.
Fig. 76 gives an example of the monitor functions for
constant torque applications.

68
Fig. 76
Ramp-up phase Stationary phase Stationary phase Ramp-down phase
[413] Ramp Alarm=On [413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off [413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off [413] Ramp Alarm=On
Main Features
Torque [%] [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min
[4161] MaxAlarmMar (15%)
[4171] MaxPreAlMar (10%)

[41B] 100%
Default: TNOM or
Autoset: TMOMENTARY
[4181] MinPreAlMar (10%)
[4191] MinAlarmMar (15%)
[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) [4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) t [s]

Max Alarm
[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s) [4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s) Must be <t (or t´) otherwise no (pre)alarm
Max PreAlarm
[4182] MinPreAlDel (0.1s) [4182] MinPreAlDel (0.1s)
Min Alarm
[4192] MinAlarmDel (0.1s) Must be <t (or t´) otherwise no (pre)alarm [4192] MinAlarmDel (0.1s)
Min PreAlarm
[414] Start Delay (0.2s)
Must be elapsed before first (pre)alarm
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

7.6 Pump function All additional pumps can be activated via an AC drive, soft
starter, Y/ Δ or D.O.L. switches.
7.6.1 Introduction PM P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
A maximum of 4 pumps can be controlled with the standard
AC drive.
FDU R:SlavePump1
MASTER
If I/O Board options are installed, a maximum of 7 pumps Set R:SlavePump2
PRESSURE
can be controlled. The I/O Board can also be used as a AnIn R:SlavePump3
Feedback PI D
general extended I/O. PRESSURE
AnIn R:SlavePump4
The Pump Control function is used to control a number of R:SlavePump5
drives (pumps, fans, etc., with a maximum of 3 additional R:SlavePump6
drives per I/O-board connected) of which one is always

driven by the AC drive. Other names for these kind of
controllers are 'Cascade controller' or 'Hydrophore
controller'. Pressur e
4
Depending on the flow, pressure or temperature, additional
pumps can be activated via the appropriate signals from the 3
output relays of the AC drive and/or the I/O Board. The
system is developed in such a way that one AC drive will be 2
the master of the system. 1
Select a relay on the control board or on an option board. Power Flow
The relays are set to functions for controlling pumps. In the (50-PC-2_1)
pictures in this section, the relays are named R:Function, Fig. 78 Pressure control with pump control option
e.g. R:SlavePump1, which means a relay on the control
board or on a option board set to function SlavePump1. Pumps in parallel will operate as a flow controller, See Fig.
77.
Pumps in a series will operate as a pressure controller see Fig.
78. The basic control principle is shown in Fig. 79.
PM P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before
FDU
MASTER
R:SlavePump1 commencing installation, connecting or working with
Set FLOW
R:SlavePump2 the AC drive with Pump Control option.
AnIn
R:SlavePump3
Feedback
FLOW
PID
AnIn R:SlavePump4
R:SlavePump5
R:SlavePump6
FREQUENCY (master pump P)
Add pump
Pressur e
Stop pump
P=on P1=on P2=on P3=on P4=on P5=on P6=on FLOW /

Power PRESSURE
Flow
1 2 3 4
(50-PC-1_1) FLOW /
PRESSURE
Fig. 77 Flow control with pump control option
TIM E
(50-PC-3_1)
Fig. 79 Basic Control principle

7.6.2 Fixed MASTER
This is the default setting of the Pump Control. The AC
drive controls the Master pump which is always running.
The relay outputs start and stop the other pumps P1 to P6,
depending on flow/pressure. In this configuration, a R: SlavePump6
R: SlavePump5
maximum of 7 pumps can be controlled, see Fig. 80. To FDU

MASTER
R: SlavePump4
R: SlavePump3
R: SlavePump2
equalize the lifetime of the additional pumps it is possible to R: SlavePump1
select the pumps depending on the run time history of each R: MasterPump6
R: MasterPump5
pump. R: MasterPump4
R: MasterPump3
R: MasterPump2
R: MasterPump1
(NG_50-PC-5_1)
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
See menu:
R:SlavePump6
FDU R:SlavePump5 [393] to [396]
R:SlavePump4
MASTER R:SlavePump3
R:SlavePump2
[553] to [55C]
R:SlavePump1
Fig. 81 Alternating MASTER Control
(NG_50-PC-4_1)
NOTE: The pumps MUST have all the same power.
See menu:
[393] Select Drive 7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input
[39H] to [39N] Run Time 1 - 6, Pump In this example, the additional pumps are controlled by an
[554] to [55C] Relays different kind of drive (e.g. soft starter, frequency inverter,
etc.). The digital inputs on the I/O Board can be
programmed as a "Error" input for each pump. If a drive
Fig. 80 Fixed MASTER control
fails, the digital input will monitor this and the PUMP
CONTROL option will not use that particular drive
NOTE: The pumps MAY have different powers, anymore and automatically switch to another drive. This
however the MASTER pump MUST always be the means that the control continues without using this (faulty)
largest. drive. This function can also be used to manually stop a
particular pump for maintenance purposes, without
shutting down the whole pump system. Of course the
7.6.3 Alternating MASTER maximum flow/pressure is then limited to the maximum
With this function the Master pump is not fixed to the AC pump power of the remaining pumps.
drive all the time. After the AC drive is powered up or
started again after a stop or sleep mode the Master pump is
selected via the relay set to function Master Pump. section
7.6.7 on page 73 shows a detailed wiring diagram with 3
pumps. The purpose of this function is that all pumps are
used equally, so the lifetime of all pumps, including the
Master pump, will be equalized. Maximum 6 pumps can be
controlled with this function.

See menu:
[529] to [52H] Digital Input
[554] to [55C] Relay
FDU R:SlavePump3
MASTER R:SlavePump2
R:SlavePump1
other
drive other
feedback DI:Pump1Feedb other
DI:Pump2Feedb drive
inputs DI:Pump3Feedb drive
(NG_50-PC-6_1) PM P1 P2 P3
Fig. 82 Feedback "Status" input
7.6.5 Fail safe operation obtained by using the NC contacts of the pump control
relays. These can be programmed for each individual
Some pump systems must always have a minimum flow or
additional pump. In this example, pumps P5 and P6 will
pressure level, even if the frequency inverter is tripped or
run at maximum power if the inverter fails or is powered
damaged. So at least 1 or 2 (or maybe all) additional pumps
down.
must keep running after the inverter is powered down or
tripped. This kind of "safe" pump operation can be
See menu:
[554] to [55C] Relays
[55D4] to [55DC] Mode
R:SlavePump6
R:SlavePump5
FDU R:SlavePump4
MASTER R:SlavePump3
R:SlavePump2
R:SlavePump1
(50-PC-7_1) PM P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
Fig. 83 Example of "Fail safe" operation

7.6.6 PID control
When using the Pump Control option, it is mandatory to
activate the PID controller function. Analogue inputs AnIn1
to AnIn4 can be set as functions for PID set values and/or
feedback values.
See menu:
[381] to [385]
[553] to [55C]
[411] to [41C]
R:SlavePump6
FDU R:SlavePump5
R:SlavePump4
MASTER R:SlavePump3
Set R:SlavePump2
Value AnIn
R:SlavePump1
Feedback
PID
AnIn
Value
Flow/Pressure
measurement (NG_50-PC-8_1)
Fig. 84 PID control

7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master
Fig. 85 and Fig. 86 show the relay functions MasterPump1-
CAUTION!
!
6 and SlavePump1-6. The Master and Additional contactors The wiring for the Alternating Master
also interlock with each other to prevent dual powering of control needs special attention and should
the pump and damage to the inverter. (K1M/K1S, K2M/ be wired exactly as described here, to
K2S, K3M/K3S). Before running, the FDU will select a avoid destructive short circuit at the output
pump to be Master, depending on the pump run times. of the inverter.
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE L1 L2 L3
FDU
K1S K2S K3S
U V W
K1M K2M K3M
P1 P2 P3
(NG_50-PC-10_1) 3~ 3~ 3~
Fig. 85 Power connections for Alternating MASTER circuit

with 3 pumps
~
B1:R1 B2:R1 B1:R2 B2:R2 B1:R3 B2:R3
Master Slave Master Slave Master Slave
Pump1 Pump1 Pump2 Pump2 Pump3 Pump3
K1S K1M K2S K2M K3S K3M
K1M K1S K2M K2S K3M K3S
(NG_50-PC-11_3)
Fig. 86 Control connections for Alternating MASTER circuit

with 3 pumps

7.6.8 Checklist And Tips
1. Main Functions
Start by choosing which of the two main functions to use:

- "Alternating MASTER" function
In this case the “Master” pump can be alternated, although this function needs slightly more complicated wiring than the
“Fixed MASTER” function described below. The I/O Board option is necessary.
- "Fixed MASTER" function:
One pump is always the master, only the additional pumps alternate.
Notice that there is a big difference in the wiring of the system between these main functions, so it not possible to switch
between these 2 functions later on. For further information see section 7.6.2, page 70.
2. Number of pumps/drives
If the system consists of 2 or 3 pumps the I/O Board option is not needed. However, this does mean that the following
functions are not then possible:
- "Alternating MASTER" function
- With isolated inputs
With the I/O Board option installed, the maximum number of pumps is:
- 6 pumps if "Alternating MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.3 on page 70)
- 7 pumps if "Fixed MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.2, page 70)
3. Pump size
- "Alternating MASTER" function:

The sizes of the pumps must be equal.
- "Fixed MASTER" function:
The pumps may have different power sizes, but the master pump (FDU) must always have the greatest power.
4. Programming the Digital inputs
If the digital inputs are used, the digital input function must be set to Drive feedback.
5. Programming the Relay outputs
After the Pump controller is switched on in menu [391] the number of drives (pumps, fans, etc.) must be set in menu
[392] (Number of Drives). The relays themselves must be set to the function SlavePump1-6 and if Alternate master is
used, MasterPump1-6 as well.
6. Equal Pumps
If all pumps are equal in power size it is likely that the Upper band is much smaller than the Lower band, because the
maximum pump discharge of the master pump is the same if the pump is connected to the mains (50Hz). This can give
a very narrow hysteresis causing an unstable control area in the flow/pressure. By setting the maximum frequency of the
inverter only slightly above 50Hz it means that the master pump has a slightly bigger pump discharge than the pump on
the mains. Of course caution is essential in order to prevent the master pump running at a higher frequency for a longer
period of time, which in turn prevents the master pump from overloading.
7. Minimum Speed
With pumps and fans it is normal to use a minimum speed, because at lower speed the discharge of the pump or fan
will be low until 30-50% of the nominal speed (depending on size, power, pump properties, etc.). When using a
minimum speed, a much smoother and better control range of the whole system will be achieved.

7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/ relay in this example starts the pump directly on line. Of
course other start/stop equipment, like a soft starter, could
Stop Transitions be controlled by the relay output.
Starting an additional pump
This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and
functions involved when a additional pump is started by
means of the pump control relays. The starting of the
second pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The
Flow Set view ref. [310]
Feedback Flow
time
Master pump
Speed
Max speed
[343] Upper band
Transition Speed Start

[39E]
Min speed
[341] Lower band
time
Start delay [399] Settle time start [39D]
2nd pump
Speed
Start ramp depends

on start method
Start command time
Fig. 87 Time sequence starting an additional pump

Stopping an additional pump
This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and
functions involved when an additional pump is stopped by
means of the pump control relays. The stopping of the
second pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs. The
relay in this example stops the pump directly on line. Of
course other start/stop equipment like a soft starter could,
like a softstarter, be controlled by the relay output.
Set view ref. [310]
Feedback Flow
time
Master pump
Speed
Max speed
[343] Upper band
Transition Speed Stop

[39G]
Min speed
[341] Lower band
Stop delay [39A] Settle time stop [39F] time
2nd pump
Speed
Stop ramp depends

on start method
Stop command time
(NG_50-PC-20_1)
Fig. 88 Time sequence stopping an additional pump

8. EMC and standards
8.1 EMC standards 8.2 Stop categories and

The AC drive complies with the following standards: emergency stop
EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electronic power The following information is important if emergency stop
drive systems, part 3, EMC product standards: circuits are used or needed in the installation where a AC
Standard: Category C3, for systems of rated supply drive is used. EN 60204-1 defines 3 stop categories:
voltage< 1000 VAC, intended for use in the second
environment. Category 0: Uncontrolled STOP:
Optional: Category C2 for systems of rated supply voltage Stopping by switching off the supply voltage. A mechanical
<1.000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable stop must be activated. This STOP may not be
device and, when used in the first environment, is intended implemented with the help of a AC drive or its input/output
to be installed and commissioned only by experienced signals.
person with the necessary skills in installing and/or
commissioning AC drives including their EMC aspects.
Category 1: Controlled STOP:
Stopping until the motor has come to rest, after which the
mains supply is switched off. This STOP may not be
implemented with the help of a AC drive or its input/output
signals.
Category 2: Controlled STOP:

Stopping while the supply voltage is still present. This
STOP can be implemented with each of the AC drives
STOP command.
WARNING!
EN 60204-1 specifies that every machine
must be provided with a category 0 stop.
If the application prevents this from being
implemented, this must be explicitly stated.
Furthermore, every machine must be provided with
an Emergency Stop function. This emergency stop
must ensure that the voltage at the machine
contacts, which could be dangerous, is removed as
quickly as possible, without resulting in any other
danger. In such an Emergency Stop situation, a
category 0 or 1 stop may be used. The choice will be
decided on the basis of the possible risks to the
machine.
NOTE: With option Safe Stop, a “Safe Torque Off

(STO)” stop according EN-IEC 62061:2005 SIL 3 &
EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, can be achieved.
See Chapter 13.13 page 231.
CG Drives & Automation,01-5325-01r5 EMC and standards 77

78 EMC and standards CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5
9. Serial communication WARNING!
Correct and safe use of a RS232
connection depends on the ground pins of
both ports being the same potential.
The AC drive provides possibility for different types of serial
Problems can occur when connecting two
communication. ports of e.g. machinery and computers where both
• Modbus RTU via RS232/485 ground pins are not the same potential. This may
cause hazardous ground loops that can destroy the
• Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet RS232 ports.
• Industrial Ethernet as Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO, The RS232 connection behind the control panel is not
EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP galvanically isolated.
The RS232/485 option board from CG Drives &

9.1 Modbus RTU Automation is galvanically isolated.
Use the isolated RS232/485 option board for serial Note that the control panel RS232 connection can
communication. This port is galvanically isolated. safely be used in combination with commercial
The protocol used for data exchange is based on the Modbus available isolated USB to RS232 converters.
RTU protocol, originally developed by Modicon. The
physical connection is RS232/485. The AC drive acts as a
slave with selectable address in a master-slave configuration.
The communication is half-duplex. It has a standard non
return zero (NRZ) format.
The baud rate is adjustable between 2400 to 38400.
The character frame format (always 11 bits) has:
• one start bit
• eight data bits
• two stop bits
• no parity
Fig. 89 RS232 connector behind the control panel

The AC drive has also an asynchronous serial
communication interface behind the control panel.
Please note that this port is not galvanically isolated. 9.2 Parameter sets
It is possible to temporarily connect a personal computer Communication information for the different parameter
sets.
with for example the software EmoSoftCom (programming
and monitoring software) to the RS232 connector on the The different parameter sets in the AC drive have the
control panel. This can be useful when copying parameters following DeviceNet instance numbers, Profibus slot/index
between AC drives etc. For permanent connection of a numbers, Profinet IO index and EtherCAT index numbers:
personal computer you have to use one of the
communication option boards. EtherCAT
Modbus/
and
Param. DeviceNet Profibus Profinet IO
CANopen
set Instance Slot/Index index
NOTE: This RS232 port is not isolated. index
number
(hex)
43001– 168/160 to 19385 -

A 4bb9 - 4f3b
43899 172/38 20283
44001– 172/140 to 20385 -

B 4fa1 - 5323
44899 176/18 21283
45001– 176/120 to 21385 -

C 5389 - 5706
45899 179/253 22283
46001– 180/100 to 22385 -

D 5771 - 5af3
46899 183/233 23283
Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43899. The

parameter sets B, C and D contains the same type of
information. For example parameter 43123 in parameter set
A contain the same type of information as 44123 in
parameter set B.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Serial communication 79

9.3 Motor data 9.5 Reference signal
Communication information for the different motors. When menu “Reference Control [214]” is set to “Com” the
following parameter data should be used:
EtherCAT
Modbus/
Profibus and Default 0
DeviceNet Profinet IO
Motor Slot/ CANopen
Instance index Range -16384 to 16384
Index index
number
(hex)
Corresponding to -100% to 100% ref
168/200
43041– 19425 -
M1 to 4be1 - 4be8 Communication information
43048 19432
168/207
Modbus /DeviceNet Instance number 42905
172/180 Profibus slot /Index 168/64
44041– 20425 -
M2 to 4fc9 - 4fd0
44048 20432 EtherCAT index (hex) 4b59
174/187
Profinet IO index 19289
176/160 Fieldbus format Int
45041– 21425 -
M3 to 53b1 - 53b8
45048 21432 Modbus format Int
176/167
180/140
46041– 22425 -
M4
46048
to
22432
5799 - 57a0 9.5.1 Process value
180/147
It is also possible to send the Process value feedback
signal over a bus (e.g. from a process or temperature sensor)
M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048. The M2, M3, and for use with PID Process controller [380].
M4 contains the same type of information. For example
Set menu “Process Source [321]” to F(Bus). Use following
parameter 43043 in motor M1 contain the same type of
parameter data for the process value:
information as 44043 in M2.
Default 0
9.4 Start and stop Range -16384 to 16384
commands Corresponding to -100% to 100% process value
Set start and stop commands via serial communication.
Communication information
Modbus/DeviceNet Modbus /DeviceNet Instance number 42906
Function Profibus slot /Index 168/65
Instance number
EtherCAT index (hex) 4b5a
42901 Reset Profinet IO index 19290
Run, active together with either Fieldbus format Int
42902 RunR or RunL to Modbus format Int
perform start.
42903 RunR Example:
(See Emotron Fielbus manual for detailed information)
42904 RunL
We would like to control the AC drive over a bus system
using the first two bytes of the Basic Control Message by
Note! Bipolar reference mode is activated if both setting menu “[2661] FB Signal 1” to 49972. Further, we
RunR and RunL is active.
also want to transmit a 16 bit signed reference and a 16 bit
process value. This is done by setting menu
“[2662] FB Signal 2” to 42905 and menu “[2663] FB Signal
3” to 42906.
NOTE! It is possible to view the transmitted process

value in control panel menu Operation [710]. The
presented value is depending on settings in menus
“Process Min [324]” and “Process Max [325]”.
80 Serial communication CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

9.6 Description of the EInt Value Binary
formats -8 1000
Eint is only used with Modbus-RTU and Modbus-TCP -7 1001
protocols. ..
A parameter with Eint format can be represented in two -2 1110
different formats (F). Either as a 15 bit unsigned integer -1 1111
format (F= 0) or a Emotron floating point format (F=1). 0 0000
The most significant bit (B15) indicates the format used.
1 0001
See detailed description below.
2 0010
All parameters written to a register may be rounded to the
..
number of significant digits used in the internal system.
6 0110
The matrix below describes the contents of the 16-bit word 7 0111
for the two different EInt formats:
The value represented by the Emotron floating point format

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 is m·10e.
F=1 e3 e2 e1 e0 m10 m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0
F=0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 To convert a value from the Emotron floating point format
to a floating point value, use the formula above.
If the format bit (B15) is 0, then all bits may be treated as a To convert a floating point value to the Emotron floating
standard unsigned integer (UInt) point format, see the C-code example below.
If the format bit is 1, then is the number interpreted as this: Example, floating point format
Value = M * 10^E, where M=m10..m0 represents a The number 1.23 would be represented by this in Emotron
two- complement signed mantissa and E= e3..e0 represents a floating point format,
two- complement signed exponent.
F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM
1 1110 00001111011
F=1 -> floating point format used
NOTE: Parameters with EInt format may return values
E=-2
both as 15 bit unsigned int (F=0) or in Emotron
floating point (F=1). M=123
The value is then 123x10-2 = 1.23

Example, resolution
If you write the value 1004 to a register and this register has Example 15bit unsigned int format
3 significant digits, it will be stored as 1000. The value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point number
In the Emotron floating point format (F=1), one 16-bit 72. It is within the range 0-32767, which means that the
word is used to represent large (or very small numbers) with 15-bit fixed point format may be used.
3 significant digits. The value will then be represented as:
If data is read or written as a fixed point (i.e. no decimals)
number between 0-32767, the 15 bit Unsigned integer
format (F=0) may be used. B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
Detailed description of Emotron floating point
format
Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point
format (F=0).
e3-e0 4-bit signed exponent. Gives a value
range:
-8..+7 (binary 1000 .. 0111)
m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa.Gives a value
range:
-1024..+1023 (binary
10000000000..01111111111)
A signed number should be represented as a two

complement binary number, like below:
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Serial communication 81

Programming example:
typedef struct
{
int m:11; // mantissa, -1024..1023
int e: 4; // exponent -8..7
unsigned int f: 1; // format, 1->special emoint format
} eint16;
//---------------------------------------------------------------------------
unsigned short int float_to_eint16(float value)
{
eint16 etmp;
int dec=0;
while (floor(value) != value && dec<16)

{
dec++; value*=10;
}
if (value>=0 && value<=32767 && dec==0)
*(short int *)&etmp=(short int)value;
else if (value>=-1000 && value<0 && dec==0)
{
etmp.e=0;
etmp.f=1;
etmp.m=(short int)value;
}
else
{
etmp.m=0;
etmp.f=1;
etmp.e=-dec;
if (value>=0)
etmp.m=1; // Set sign
else
etmp.m=-1; // Set sign
value=fabs(value);
while (value>1000)
{
etmp.e++; // increase exponent
value=value/10;
}
value+=0.5; // round
etmp.m=etmp.m*value; // make signed
}
Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp);
}
//---------------------------------------------------------------------------
float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value)
{
float f;
eint16 evalue;
evalue=*(eint16 *)&value;
if (evalue.f)
{
if (evalue.e>=0)
f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e);
else
f=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e));
}
else
f=value;
return f;
}
//---------------------------------------------------------------------------
82 Serial communication CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

10. Operation via the 10.2 Control panel with 4-line
Control Panel display
This control panel with 4-line display is equipped with real
time clock function. This means that actual date and time
This chapter describes how to use the control panel. The AC will be shown at e.g. a trip condition.
drive can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel. There is also an optional Control panel with Bluetooth
communication available. See chapter“13. Options” on
page 225 for more information.
10.1 General
The control panel displays the status of the AC drive and is
used to set all the parameters. It is also possible to control
the motor directly from the control panel. The control panel 4 line
LCD display
can be built-in or located externally via serial
communication.The AC drive can be ordered without the LEDs
control panel. Instead of the control panel there will be a
blank panel. Control Keys
NOTE: The AC drive can run without the control panel

being connected. However the settings must be such
that all control signals are set for external use.
Function Keys
10.1.1 Two different control panels

There are two different control panels available for Emotron
AC drives IP54 and IP20/21 versions. One with 4-line LCD
Toggle Key
display and one with a 2-line LCD display. Each described
in chapter “10.2 Control panel with 4-line display” on Fig. 90 Control panel with 4 line display, LEDs and Keys.
page 83 and “10.3 Control panel with 2-line display” on
page 88.
10.2.1 The display
The display is back lit and consists of 4 rows, each with
space for 20 characters. The display is divided into following
areas. The different areas in the display are described below:
A J I
100 1240rpm
B Torque 0% 0.0Nm H
C Current 123.3A G
Sby Key/Key
D E F
Fig. 91 The display
Area A:Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4

digits).
Area B:Menu name or heading (Except in menus
100+ mode), 8 characters field.
Area C:Edit Cursor if editing or heading in menu[100],
8 characters field.
Area D *:Shows the status of the AC drive (3 digits).
The following status indications are possible:
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Operation via the Control Panel 83

Digits Description Bit*
Stp Motor is stopped 0
Run Motor runs 1
Acc Acceleration 2
Dec Deceleration 3
Trp Tripped 4
Operating Safe Stop, is flashing when
SST 5
activated
VL Operating at voltage limit 6
SL Operating at speed limit 7
CL Operating at current limit 8
TL Operating at torque limit 9
OT Operating at temperature limit 10
I2t Active I2t protection 11
LV Operating at low voltage 12
Sby Operating from Standby power supply 13
LCL Operating with low cooling liquid level 14
Slp Sleep mode 15
SPS Spin start active 16
*) The status shown in Area D on the control panel can
be read via a fieldbus or serial communication, e.g.
using Modbus address nr 30053.
It is also possible to read all status indications, not just
the highest prioritized one, via a fieldbus or serial
communication, e.g. using Modbus address nr 30180
and 30182. This information is also shown in
EmoSoftCom PC-tool (optional) see menu “Area D
stat [72B]”.Area I:Active Motor set M1 - M4 (Set in
menu [212]).
Area E:Shows active parameter set: , , , or
[241].
Area F:Active control source.
Area G:Parameter value, shows the setting or selection in
the active menu, 12 characters field.
This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd level
menu. This area also shows warnings and alarm
messages. In some situations this area could
indicate “+++” or ” - - -” see further
information in the Instruction manual.
Area H:Signal values shown in menu [100],
12 characters field.
Area I:Preferred read-out value (chosen in menu [110])
Area JShows if the menu is in the toggle loop and/or
the AC drive is set for Local operation.
= in Toggle loop
L = in Local operation and Toggle loop
L = Local operation
NOTE:
In area B and area C only 8 characters are available,
this means that some texts will be shortened.
84 Operation via the Control Panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Menu [100] Preferred view
This menu is displayed at every power-up. During
operation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayed
when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes.
Menu “[100] Preferred View” displays the settings made in
menu “[110], 1st line”, “[120], 2nd line” and
“[130], 3rd line”.
100 1240rpm First line - set in Menu[110].

Torque 0% 0.0Nm Second line - set in Menu[120]
Current 123.3A Third line - set in Menu[130]
Sby Key/Key
Extended signal monitoring

If you hold the key when in menu [100] following
window will appear, as long as the key is pressed.
Here First, Second and Third line are shown as selected in
menu [100].
Then additional information will be displayed, selected in
the menus [140], [150] and [160] according to below.
Fifth line - set in Menu[150].

3.9V 0.0A Second line - set in Menu[120].
0.0°C 0.0Hz Third line - set in Menu[130].
Sby /Rem/Rem/-- Fourth line - set in Menu[140]
Sixth line - set in Menu[160]

Use menu “[170] View mode” to select active type of
menu [100] presentation, select if “Normal 100” or
“Always 100+” Extended signal monitoring” shall be
shown at power-up. A third choice is menu
“Normal100wo” = menu [100] without explaining text
at second and third line.
10.2.2 Editing mode

All other menus (read and read/write menus) are used in
following way.
Shows Menu number to the left and to the right signal selected
221 1240rpm in menu [110].
Motor Volts Shows menu name to the left
M1 380V Shows menu value to the right and if it is a Motor parameter active
Run Key/Key Motor set (M1 in this case) is displayed to the left.
Shows Drive status/Parameter set and Control source as in menu [100]
During editing, preferred view will not be displayed and the

cursor will appear blinking to the left. See also below.
211 Preferred view is not shown during editing.

Language = blinking during editing
English
Run Loc/Loc

10.2.3 Fault logger 10.2.5 LED indicators
As real-time clock is available, line 2 will show trip/warning The symbols on the control panel have the following
message and line three will show date and time when the trip functions:
condition occurred.
810 1240rpm
Ext trip
2017-01-25 12:34.40
Run Rem/Rem Run Trip Power
Green Red Green
Fig. 92 LED indications
10.2.4 Real Time clock
In this 4 line Control panel (PPU) there is a built in Real Table 27 LED indication
time clock. This means that actual date and time will be
shown at e.g. a trip condition. There is a built-in capacitor Function
to be able to keep the clock running if the power disappear. Symbol
In case of loss of power, the backup time for the Real time ON FLASHING OFF
clock function is at least 60 days. POWER
Actual date and time will be set from factory. Date and time (green)
Power on ---------------- Power off
is shown and can be set in following menus.
TRIP AC drive No warning
Clock [930] (red) tripped
Warning/Limit
or trip
This menu group displays actual time and date, read only.
Time and date are factory set to CET (Central European Motor speed
RUN Motor shaft Motor
mean time). Adjust if required in following sub-menus. increase/
(green) rotates stopped
decrease
930 1240rpm
Clock
2017-01-23 12:34.40 10.2.6 Control keys
Run Key/Key The control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or Reset
commands directly. As default these keys are disabled, set for
remote control. Activate the control keys by selecting
Time [931] Keyboard in the menus “Ref Control [214]”,
Actual time, displayed as HH:MM:SS. Adjustable setting. “Run/Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Ctrl [216]”.
931 1240rpm If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digital
Time inputs, this input must be active to allow Run/Stop
12:34.40 commands from the control panel.
Run Key/Key
Table 28 Control keys
Unit hh:mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)
gives a start with
RUN L:
left rotation
Date [932]
Actual date, displayed as YYYY-MM-DD. Adjustable setting. stops the motor or resets
STOP/RESET:
the AC drive after a trip
932 1240rpm
Date
gives a start with
2017-01-23 RUN R:
right rotation
Run Key/Key
Unit: YYYY-MM-DD (year-month-day) NOTE: It is not possible to simultaneously activate

the Run/Stop commands from the keyboard and
remotely from the terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
Weekday [933] Exception is the JOG-function which can give start
Display of actual weekday, read only. command, see “ Jog Speed [348]” on page 146.
933 1240rpm
Weekday
Monday
Run Key/Key

10.2.7 The Toggle and Loc/Rem
Key
This key has two functions: Toggle and
switching between Loc/Rem function. Sub menus
Press one second to use the toggle function
Press and hold the toggle key for more than 213
five seconds to switch between Local and Remote function,
depending on the settings in [2171] and [2172]. 212
When editing values, the toggle key can be used to change 100
the sign of the value, see section 10.6, page 92.
511 Toggle loop 211
Toggle function
Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily step 341 221
through selected menus in a loop. The toggle loop can
contain a maximum of ten menus. As default the toggle loop 222
contains the menus needed for Quick Setup. You can use the 331
Sub menus
toggle loop to create a quick-menu for the parameters that
are most importance to your specific application.
NOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more

than five seconds without pressing either the +, - or
Esc key, as this may activate the Loc/Rem function of 228
this key instead. See menu [217].
Fig. 93 Toggle loop example.
Add a menu to the toggle loop
1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop. Indication of menus in toggle loop
2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while press- Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a
ing the + key. in area B in the display.
Delete a menu from the toggle loop
1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle Loc/Rem function
key. The Loc/Rem function of this key is disabled as default.
2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while press- Enable the function in menu [2171] and/or [2172].
ing the - key.
With the function Loc/Rem you can change between local
Delete all menus from the toggle loop and remote control of the AC drive from the control panel.
1. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while press- The function Loc/Rem can also be changed via the DigIn,
ing the Esc key. see menu “Digital inputs [520]”.
2. Confirm with Enter. Change control mode
Default toggle loop 1. Press the Loc/Rem key for five seconds, until Local?
Fig. 93 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains the or Remote? is displayed.
necessary menus that need to be set before starting. Press 2. Confirm with Enter.
Toggle to enter menu [211] then use the Next key to enter 3. Cancel with Esc.
the sub menus [212] to [21A] and enter the parameters.
Local mode
When you press the Toggle key again, menu [221] is
Local mode is used for temporary operation. When switched
displayed.
to LOCAL operation, the AC drive is controlled via the
defined Local operation mode, i.e. [2171] and [2172]. The
actual status of the AC drive will not change, e.g. Run/Stop
conditions and the actual speed will remain exactly the
same. When the AC drive is set to Local operation, the
display will show L in area B in the display.

Remote mode 10.3 Control panel with 2-line
When the AC drive is switched to REMOTE operation, the
AC drive will be controlled according to selected control display
methods in the menu’s “Reference Control [214]”, “Run/
Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Control [216]”.
To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the AC
drive control, a “Loc/Rem” signal is available on the LCD display
Digital Outputs or Relays. When the AC drive is set to
Local, the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active/high, LEDs
in Remote the signal will be inactive/low. See menu “Digital
Outputs [540]” and “Relays [550]”. Control Keys
10.2.8 Function keys Toggle Key

The function keys operate the menus and are also used for
programming and read-outs of all the menu settings.
Function Keys
Table 29 Function keys
- step to a lower menu
level
ENTER key:
- confirm a changed
setting
- step to a higher Fig. 94 Control panel display, LEDs and Keys.
menu level
ESCAPE key: - ignore a changed
setting, without 10.3.1 The display
confirming The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows, each with
- step to a previous
space for 16 characters. The display is divided into six areas.
menu within the same The different areas in the display are described below:
PREVIOUS
level
key:
- go to more significant A B C
digit in edit mode
- step to a next menu 221 Motor Volt
within the same level Stp M1: 400V
- go to less significant
NEXT key:
digit in edit mode
D E F
Fig. 95 The display

- decrease a value
- key:
- change a selection Area A:Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4
digits).
- increase a value Area BShows if the menu is in the toggle loop or the
+ key:
- change a selection AC drive is set for Local operation.
- Toggle between menus Area C:Shows the heading of the active menu.
in the toggle loop Area D *:Shows the status of the AC drive (3 digits).
TOGGLE and - Switching between
The following status indications are possible:
LOC/REM local
key: and remote control Digits Description Bit*
- Change the sign of a StpMotor is stopped 0
value
RunMotor runs 1
AccAcceleration 2
DecDeceleration 3
TrpTripped 4
Operating Safe Stop, is flashing when
SST 5
activated
VL Operating at voltage limit 6
SL Operating at speed limit 7
CL Operating at current limit 8

Digits Description Bit* 10.3.3 LED indicators
TL Operating at torque limit 9 The symbols on the control panel have the following
OT Operating at temperature limit 10 functions:
I2t Active I2t protection 11
LV Operating at low voltage 12
Sby Operating from Standby power supply 13
LCL Operating with low cooling liquid level 14
Slp Sleep mode 15
Run Trip Power
SPS Spin start active 16 Green Red Green
*) The status shown in Area D on the control panel can be
read via a fieldbus or serial communication, e.g. using Fig. 100 LED indications
Modbus address nr 30053.
It is also possible to read all status indications, not just the Table 30 LED indication
highest prioritized one, via a fieldbus or serial
Function
communication, e.g. using Modbus address nr 30180 and Symbol
30182. This information is also shown in EmoSoftCom ON FLASHING OFF
PC-tool (optional) see menu “Area D stat [72B]”.
POWER
Power on ---------------- Power off
(green)
Area E:Shows active parameter set and if it is a motor
parameter. TRIP AC drive No warning
Warning/Limit
(red) tripped or trip
Area F:Shows the setting or selection in the active menu.
This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd level Motor speed
RUN Motor shaft Motor
menu. This area also shows warnings and alarm increase/
(green) rotates stopped
messages. In some situations this area could decrease
indicate “+++” or ” - - -” please see further
information in Chapter 10.3.2 page 89
10.3.4 Control keys
The control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or Reset
300 Process commands directly. As default these keys are disabled, set for
Stp remote control. Activate the control keys by selecting
Keyboard in the menus “Ref Control [214]”,
Fig. 96 Example 1st level menu “Run/Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Ctrl [216]”.
If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digital
220 Motor Data inputs, this input must be active to allow Run/Stop
Stp commands from the control panel.
Table 31 Control keys

Fig. 97 Example 2nd level menu
gives a start with
RUN L:
221 Motor Volt left rotation
Stp M1: 400V
stops the motor or resets
STOP/RESET:
the AC drive after a trip
Fig. 98 Example 3d level menu
4161MaxAlarm Mar gives a start with

RUN R:
right rotation
Stp 15%
Fig. 99 Example 4th level menu NOTE: It is not possible to simultaneously activate
the Run/Stop commands from the keyboard and
remotely from the terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
10.3.2 Indications on the display Exception is the JOG-function which can give start
The display can indicate “+++” or “- - -” if a parameter is out command, see “ Jog Speed [348]” on page 146.
of range. In the AC drive there are parameters which are
dependent on other parameters. For example, if the speed
reference is 500 and the maximum speed value is set to a
value below 500, this will be indicated with “+++” on the
display. If the minimum speed value is set over 500, “- - -”
is displayed.

10.3.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem
Key
This key has two functions: Toggle and
switching between Loc/Rem function. Sub menus
Press one second to use the toggle function
NEXT
Press and hold the toggle key for more than 213
five seconds to switch between Local and Remote function,
depending on the settings in [2171] and [2172]. 212
When editing values, the toggle key can be used to change 100
the sign of the value, see section 10.6, page 92.
511 Toggle loop 211
Toggle function
Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily step 341 221
through selected menus in a loop. The toggle loop can
contain a maximum of ten menus. As default the toggle loop 222
contains the menus needed for Quick Setup. You can use the 331
Sub menus
toggle loop to create a quick-menu for the parameters that
are most importance to your specific application.
NEXT
NOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more

than five seconds without pressing either the +, - or
Esc key, as this may activate the Loc/Rem function of 228
this key instead. See menu [217].
Fig. 101 Toggle loop example.
Add a menu to the toggle loop
1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop. Indication of menus in toggle loop
2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while press- Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a
ing the + key. in area B in the display.
Delete a menu from the toggle loop
1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle Loc/Rem function
key. The Loc/Rem function of this key is disabled as default.
2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while press- Enable the function in menu [2171] and/or [2172].
ing the - key.
With the function Loc/Rem you can change between local
Delete all menus from the toggle loop and remote control of the AC drive from the control panel.
1. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while press- The function Loc/Rem can also be changed via the DigIn,
ing the Esc key. see menu “Digital inputs [520]”.
2. Confirm with Enter. Change control mode
Default toggle loop 1. Press the Loc/Rem key for five seconds, until Local?
Fig. 93 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains the or Remote? is displayed.
necessary menus that need to be set before starting. Press 2. Confirm with Enter.
Toggle to enter menu [211] then use the Next key to enter 3. Cancel with Esc.
the sub menus [212] to [21A] and enter the parameters.
Local mode
When you press the Toggle key again, menu [221] is
Local mode is used for temporary operation. When switched
displayed.
to LOCAL operation, the AC drive is controlled via the
defined Local operation mode, i.e. [2171] and [2172]. The
actual status of the AC drive will not change, e.g. Run/Stop
conditions and the actual speed will remain exactly the
same. When the AC drive is set to Local operation, the
display will show L in area B in the display.

Remote mode 10.4 The menu structure
When the AC drive is switched to REMOTE operation, the
The menu structure consists of 4 levels:
AC drive will be controlled according to selected control
methods in the menu’s “Reference Control [214]”, “Run/
Main Menu
Stop Control [215]” and “Reset Control [216]”. The first character in the menu number.
1st level
To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the AC
drive control, a “Loc/Rem” signal is available on the 2nd level The second character in the menu number.
Digital Outputs or Relays. When the AC drive is set to 3rd level The third character in the menu number.
Local, the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active/high,
in Remote the signal will be inactive/low. See menu “Digital 4th level The fourth character in the menu number.
Outputs [540]” and “Relays [550]”.
This structure is consequently independent of the number
of menus per level.
10.3.6 Function keys
For instance, a menu can have one selectable menu (Set/
The function keys operate the menus and are also used for
View Reference Value [310]), or it can have 17 selectable
programming and read-outs of all the menu settings.
menus (menu Speeds [340]).
Table 32 Function keys
NOTE: If there are more than 10 menus within one
- step to a lower menu level, the numbering continues in alphabetic order.
level
ENTER key:
- confirm a changed
setting
- step to a higher
menu level
ESCAPE key: - ignore a changed
ESC setting, without
confirming
- step to a previous
menu within the same
PREVIOUS
level
key:
- go to more significant
digit in edit mode
- step to a next menu
within the same level
NEXT key:
NEXT - go to less significant
digit in edit mode
- decrease a value
- key:
- change a selection 4161
NG_06-F28
- increase a value 4162

+ key:
- change a selection
Fig. 102 Menu structure
- Toggle between menus
in the toggle loop
TOGGLE and - Switching between
LOC/REM local and remote
key: control
- Change the sign of a
value

10.4.1 The main menu 10.6 Editing values in a menu
This section gives you a short description of the functions in Most values in the second row in a menu can be changed in
the Main Menu. two different ways. Enumerated values like the baud rate can
only be changed with alternative 1.
100 Preferred View
Displayed at power-up. It displays the actual process value as
default. Programmable for many other read-outs.
2621 Baudrate
Stp 38400
200 Main Setup
Main settings to get the AC drive operable. The motor data
settings are the most important. Also option utility and Alternative 1
settings. When you press the + or - keys to change a value, the cursor
is flashing to the left in the display and the value is increased
300 Process and Application Parameters or decreased when you press the appropriate key. If you keep
Settings more relevant to the application such as Reference
the + or - keys pressed, the value will increase or decrease
Speed, torque limitations, PID control settings, etc.
continuously. When you keep the key pressed the change
400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process speed will increase. The Toggle key is used to change the
sign of the entered value. The sign of the value will also
Protection
change when zero is passed. Press Enter to confirm the value.
The monitor function enables the AC drive to be used as a
load monitor to protect machines and processes against
mechanical overload and underload. 331 Acc Time
500 Inputs/Outputs and Virtual Stp 2.00s
Connections Flashing
All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here.
600 Logical Functions and Timers Alternative 2

All settings for conditional signals are entered here. Press the + or - key to enter edit mode. Then press the Prev
or Next key to move the cursor to the right most position of
700 View Operation and Status the value that should be changed. The cursor will make the
Viewing all the operational data like frequency, load, power, selected character flashes. Move the cursor using the Prev or
current, etc. Next keys. When you press the + or - keys, the character at
the cursor position will increase or decrease. This alternative
800 View Trip Log is suitable when you want to make large changes, i.e. from 2
Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory. s to 400 s.
900 Service Information and AC drive Data To change the sign of the value, press the toggle key. This
Electronic type label for viewing the software version and makes it possible to enter negative values (Only valid for
AC drive type. certain parameters).
Example: When you press Next the 4 will flash.
10.5 Programming during
331 Acc Time
operation Stp 4.00s
Most of the parameters can be changed during operation
Flashing
without stopping the AC drive. Parameters that can not be
changed are marked with a lock symbol in the display. Press Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the edit
mode.
NOTE: If you try to change a function during
operation that only can be changed when the motor
is stopped, the message “Stop First” is displayed. 10.7 Copy current parameter
to all sets
When a parameter is displayed, press the Enter key for
5 seconds. Now the text To all sets? is displayed. Press Enter
to copy the setting for current parameter to all sets.

10.8 Programming example
This example shows how to program a change of the Acc.
100 0rpm Menu 100 appears
Time set from 2.0 s to 4.0 s.
Stp 0.0A after power-up.
The flashing cursor indicates that a change has taken place
but is not saved yet. If at this moment, the power fails, the or
Press “Next” key for
change will not be saved.
NEXT menu [200].
Use the ESC, Prev, Next or the Toggle keys to proceed and
to go to other menus. 200 MAIN SETUP
Stp
or
Press “Next” key for
NEXT menu [300].
300 Process
Stp
or
Press “Enter” key for
menu [310].
310 Set/View Ref

Stp
or
Press “Next” key two
NEXT times for menu [330].
330 Run/Stop
Stp
or
Press “Enter” for
menu [331].
331 Acc Time

Stp 2.00s
or
Press “+” key
331 Acc Time Keep “+” key pressed

Stp 2.00s until desired value has
been reached.
Flashing
or Save the changed
value by pressing
“Enter” key.
331 Acc Time

Stp 4.00s
Fig. 103 Programming example

11. Functional Description 11.1 2-line LCD display
See chapter “10.3 Control panel with 2-line display”
on page 88 for detailed information.
This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the
software. It also briefly describes how menus and parameters 100 1240rpm
are shown in the LCD windows in the two different Control Sby Key/Key
panels that are available for Emotron AC drives versions
IP54 and IP20/21.
Preferred View [100]
There are two models of Control panels available with This menu is displayed at every power-up. During
different LCD displays and layout. operation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayed
when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. The
automatic return function will be switched off when the
Toggle and Stop key is pressed simultaneously. As default it
displays the reference and current values.
100 0rpm
Stp 0.0A
menu “[110], 1st line”, and “[120], 2nd line”. See Fig. 104.
100 (1st Line)

Stp (2nd Line)
2-line display 4-line display Fig. 104 Display functions
CG Drives & Automation,01-5325-01r5 Functional Description 95

11.2 4-line LCD display
See chapter “10.2 Control panel with 4-line display”
on page 83 for detailed information
100 1240rpm
Torque 0% 0.0Nm
Current 123.3A
Sby Key/Key
Menu [100] Preferred view

This menu is displayed at every power-up. During
operation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayed
when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes.
menu “[110], 1st line”, “[120], 2nd line” and
“[130], 3rd line”.

Torque 0% 0.0Nm Second line - set in Menu[120]
Current 123.3A Third line - set in Menu[130]
Sby Key/Key
Extended signal monitoring

If you hold the key when in menu [100] following
window will appear, as long as the key is pressed.
Here First, Second and Third line are shown as selected in
menu [100].
Then additional information will be displayed, selected in
the menus [140], [150] and [160] according to below.
Fifth line - set in Menu[150].

3.9V 0.0A Second line - set in Menu[120].
0.0°C 0.0Hz Third line - set in Menu[130].
Sby /Rem/Rem/-- Fourth line - set in Menu[140]
Sixth line - set in Menu[160]

Use menu “[170] View mode” to select active type of
menu [100] presentation, select if “Normal 100” or
“Always 100+” Extended signal monitoring” shall be
shown at power-up. A third choice is menu
“Normal 100wo” = menu [100] without explaining
text at second and third line.
96 Functional Description CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

11.3 Menus Resolution of settings
Following chapters describes the menus and parameters in The resolution for all range settings described in this chapter
the software. You will find a short description of each is 3 significant digits. Exceptions are speed values which are
function and information about default values, ranges, etc. presented with 4 significant digits. Table 33 shows the
There are also tables containing communication resolutions for 3 significant digits.
information. You will find the parameter number for all Table 33
available fieldbus options as well as the enumeration for the
data. 3 Digit Resolution
On our home page in the download area, you could find a
"Communication information" list and a list to note 0.01-9.99 0.01
“Parameter set” information. 10.0-99.9 0.1
100-999 1
NOTE: Functions marked with the sign cannot be
changed during Run Mode. 1000-9990 10
10000-99900 100
Description of menu table layout

Following two kinds of tables are used in this chapter. 11.3.1 1st Line [110]
Sets the content of the first line in the menu
332  Dec Time  “[100] Preferred View.”
Read only
 110 1st Line
Default:  Default: Process Val
   Dependent on menu
Process Val 0 Process value
222  Motor Frequ  Speed 1 Speed
Read-only
 Torque 2 Torque
Default: 50% Process Ref 3 Process reference

Shaft Power 4 Shaft power
Resolution 
El Power 5 Electrical power
1. Parameter cannot be changed during operation. Current 6 Current
2. Parameter only for viewing. Output volt 7 Output voltage
3. Menu information as displayed on control panel. Frequency 8 Frequency

For explanation of display text and symbols, see DC Voltage 9 DC voltage
Chapter 10. page 83.
IGBT Temp 10 IGBT temperature
4. Factory setting of parameter (also showed on dis-
Motor Temp * 11 Motor temperature
play).
VSD Status 12 AC drive status
5. Available settings for the menu, listed selections.
Run Time 13 Run Time
6. Communication integer value for the selection.
For use with communication bus interface (only if Energy 14 Energy
selection type parameters). Mains Time 15 Mains time
7. Description of selection alternative, setting or range
(min - max value). * The “Motor temp” is only visible if you have the option
PTC/PT100 card installed and a PT100 input is
selected in menu[236].

Communication information 11.3.4 4th Line [140]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43001 Sets the content of the fourth line in the menu
Profibus slot/index 168/160 “[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110].
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bb9
140 4th Line
Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt Default: VSD Status
11.3.2 2nd Line [120]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43004
Sets the content of the second line in the menu
Profibus slot/index 168/163
“[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110].
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bbc
120 2nd Line Fieldbus format
Default: Current Modbus format
Communication information 11.3.5 5th Line [150]

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43002 Sets the content of the fifth line in the menu
Profibus slot/index 168/161 “[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110].
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bba
150 5th Line
Modbus format UInt Default: DC Voltage
NOTE: Following menus [130] to [170] are only valid Communication information
for the control panel with 4-line display. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43005
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bbd
11.3.3 3rd Line [130] Profinet IO index 19389
Sets the content of the third line in the menu Fieldbus format
“[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110]. Modbus format
130 3rd Line

11.3.6 6th Line [160]
Default: Frequency Sets the content of the sixth line in the menu
“[100] Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110].
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43003 160 6th Line
Default: IGBT Temp
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bbb
Fieldbus format Communication information
Modbus format Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43006
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bbe
Fieldbus format
Modbus format

11.3.7 View mode [170] 11.4 Main Setup [200]
Select how menu [100] shall be displayed. The Main Setup menu contains the most important settings
to get the AC drive operational and set up for the
170 View mode application. It includes different sub menus concerning the
control of the unit, motor data and protection, utilities and
Default: Normal 100
automatic resetting of faults. This menu will instantaneously
Preferred view as set in menu 110, 120, be adapted to build in options and show the required
Normal 100
130 settings.
As Normal 100 without text at second
Normal 100wo
and third lines. 11.4.1 Operation [210]
Extended signal monitoring as set in Selections concerning the used motor, AC drive mode,
Always 100+
menus 110 - 160 control signals and serial communication are described in
this submenu and is used to set the AC drive up for the
Communication information application.
Profibus slot/index 168/166 Language [211]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bbf
Select the language used on the LC Display. Once the
language is set, this selection will not be affected by the Load
Fieldbus format
Default command.
Modbus format
There are two software sets with different languages available
for delivery. “Standard software, Language set 1” and the
optional “Standard software, Language set 2”, see table
below and Fig. 1, page 9.
211 Language Language set
Default: English Set 1 Set 2

English 0 English selected X X
Svenska 1 Swedish selected X -
Nederlands 2 Dutch selected X -
Deutsch 3 German selected X X
Français 4 French selected - X
Español 5 Spanish selected X -
Руccкий 6 Russian selected X X
Italiano 7 Italian selected X -
Cesky 8 Czech selected - X
Turkish 9 Turkish selected - X
- 10 - -
Polski 11 Polish selected X
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bc3
Modbus format UInt

Select Motor [212] Drive Mode [213]
This menu is used if you have more than one motor in your This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor.
application. Select the motor to define. It is possible to Settings for the reference signals and read-outs is made in
define up to four different motors, M1 to M4, in the AC menu “Process source, [321]”.
drive. For parameter set handling including Motor sets
• V/Hz Mode (output speed [712] in rpm)
M1 - M4 see Chapter 11.4.6 page 117.
212 Select Motor 213 Drive Mode

Default: M1
Default: V/Hz
Motor Data is connected to selected
M1 0 All control loops are related to frequency
motor.
control. In this mode multi-motor
applications are possible.
212 Select Motor NOTE: All the functions and menu
V/Hz 2 read-outs with regard to speed and
Default: M1 rpm (e.g. Max Speed = 1500 rpm, Min
M1 0 Speed=0 rpm, etc.) remain speed and
rpm, although they represent the
M2 1 Motor Data is connected to selected output frequency.
M3 2 motor.
M4 3
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43012 Profinet IO index 19397
Profibus slot/index 168/171 Fieldbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bc4 Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt

Reference control [214] Run/Stop Control [215]
To control the speed of the motor, the AC drive needs a This function is used to select the source for run and stop
reference signal. This reference signal can be controlled by a commands. This is described on page 143.
remote source from the installation, the keyboard of the AC
Start/stop via analogue signals can be achieved by using
drive, or by serial or fieldbus communication. Select the
function “Stp<MinSpd [342]”.
required reference control for the application in this menu.
215 Run/Stp Ctrl

214 Ref control
Default: Remote
Default: Remote
The start/stop signal comes from the digital
The reference signal comes from the inputs of the terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
Remote 0 analogue inputs of the terminal strip Remote 0
For settings, see menu group [330] and
(terminals 1-22). [520].
Reference is set with the + and - keys on Keyboard 1 Start and stop is set on the Control Panel.
Keyboard 1 the Control Panel. Can only be done in
menu “Set/View reference [310]”. The start/stop is set via the serial
communication (RS 485, Fieldbus.) See
The reference is set via the serial Com 2
Fieldbus or RS232/485 option manual for
communication (RS 485, Fieldbus.) details.
Com 2
See section 9.5, page 80 for further
information. Option 3 The start/stop is set via an option.
The reference is set via an option. Only
Option 3 available if the option can control the Communication information
reference value. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43015
NOTE: If the reference is switched from Remote to EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bc7
Keyboard, the last remote reference value will be the Profinet IO index 19399
default value for the control panel. Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt

Reset Control [216] Local/Remote key function [217]
When the AC drive is stopped due to a failure, a reset The Toggle key on the keyboard, see section 10.2.7, page
command is required to make it possible to restart the AC 87, has two functions and is activated in this menu. As
drive. Use this function to select the source of the reset default the key is just set to operate as a Toggle key that
signal. moves you easily through the menus in the toggle loop. The
second function of the key allows you to easily swap between
216 Reset Ctrl Local and normal operation (set up via [214] and [215]) of
the AC drive. Local mode can also be activated via a digital
Default: Remote input. If both [2171] and [2172] is set to Standard, the
The command comes from the inputs of function is disabled.
Remote 0
the terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
The command comes from the 2171 LocRefCtrl
Keyboard 1
command keys of the Control Panel. Default: Standard
The command comes from the serial Standard 0 Local reference control set via [214]
Com 2
communication (RS 485, Fieldbus).
Remote 1 Local reference control via remote
The command comes from the inputs of
Remote + Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard
3 the terminal strip (terminals 1-22) or the
Keyb
keyboard.
Com 3 Local reference control via communication
The command comes from the serial
Com +
4 communication (RS485, Fieldbus) or the
Keyb Communication information
keyboard.
The command comes from the inputs of Profibus slot/index 168/168
Rem+Keyb the terminal strip (terminals 1-22), the
5 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bc1
+Com keyboard or the serial communication
(RS485, Fieldbus).
The command comes from an option. Modbus format UInt
Option 6 Only available if the option can control
the reset command.
2172 LocRunCtrl
Communication information Default: Standard
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43016 Standard 0 Local Run/Stop control set via [215]
Remote 1 Local Run/Stop control via remote
Profinet IO index 19400 Keyboard 2 Local Run/Stop control via keyboard
Fieldbus format UInt Local Run/Stop control via
Modbus format UInt Com 3
communication
Modbus format UInt

Lock Code? [218]
To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setup
of the AC drive and/or process control, the keyboard can be
locked with a password. This menu, “Lock Code [218]”, is
used to lock and unlock the keyboard. Enter the password
“291” to lock/unlock the keyboard operation. If the
Right
keyboard is not locked (default) the selection “Lock Code?”
will appear. If the keyboard is already locked, the selection Left
“Unlock Code?” will appear.
When the keyboard is locked, parameters can be viewed but
not changed. The reference value can be changed and the
AC drive can be started, stopped and reversed if these
Fig. 105 Rotation
functions are set to be controlled from the keyboard.
In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor.
218 Lock code?
Default: 0 219 Rotation
Range: 0–9999 Default: R+L
Speed direction is limited to right
R 1 rotation. The input and key RunL are
disabled.
Speed direction is limited to left rotation.
Profibus slot/index 168/177 L 2
The input and key RunR are disabled.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bca
Profinet IO index 19402 R+L 3 Both speed directions allowed.
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1
Modbus format UInt Communication information
Rotation [219] Profibus slot/index 168/178
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bcb
Overall limitation of motor rotation Profinet IO index 19403
direction Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
This function limits the overall rotation, either to left or
right or both directions. This limit is prior to all other
selections, e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a Run-Left
command will be ignored. To define left and right rotation
we assume that the motor is connected U-U, V-V and W-W.
Speed Direction and Rotation

The speed direction can be controlled by:
• RunR/RunL commands on the control panel.
• RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip
(terminals 1-22).
• Via the serial interface options.
• The parameter sets.

11.4.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge 11.4.3 Mains supply voltage [21B]
[21A]
In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for WARNING!
RunR, RunL and Reset that are operated via the digital This menu must be set according to the
AC drive product label and the supply
inputs on the terminal strip. The inputs are default set for
voltage used. Wrong setting might damage
level-control, and will be active as long as the input is made
the AC drive or brake resistor.
and kept high. When edge-control is selected, the input will
be activated by the low to high transition of the input. See
Chapter 7.2 page 64 for more information. In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected to
the AC drive can be selected. The setting will be valid for all
parameter sets. The default setting, Not defined, is never
21A Level/Edge
selectable and is only visible until a new value is selected.
Default: Level
This menu specifies the AC supply voltage. The
The inputs are activated or deactivated corresponding DC voltage is 1.34 times higher.
by a continuous high or low signal. Is
Level 0 Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not be
commonly used if, for example, a PLC is
used to operate the AC drive. affected by the Load Default command [243].
The inputs are activated by a transition; Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the setting
Edge 1 for Run and Reset from “low” to “high” of [21B].
and for Stop from "high" to "low".
NOTE: The setting is affected by the “Load from CP”
Communication information command [245] and if loading parameter file via
EmoSoftCom.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bcc 21B Supply Volts
Default: Not defined
Modbus format UInt Inverter default value used. Only valid if
Not Defined 0
this parameter is never set.
CAUTION! 220-240 VAC 1 Only valid for FDU48/52

! Level controlled inputs DO NOT comply with
the Machine Directive if the inputs are
380-415 VAC 3 Only valid for FDU48/52/69
directly used to start and stop the machine. 440-480 VAC 4 Only valid for FDU48/52/69
500-525 VAC 5 Only valid for FDU52/69
NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with the 550-600 VAC 6 Only valid for FDU69
Machine Directive (see the Chapter 8. page 77) if the
inputs are directly used to start and stop the 660-690 VAC 7 Only valid for FDU69
machine.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d35
Modbus format UInt

Supply Type [21C] 11.4.4 Motor Data [220]
Set supply voltage type. In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the AC drive
to the connected motor. This is crucial for the control
21C Supply Type accuracy as well as different read-outs and analogue output
signals.
Default: AC Supply
AC Supply 0 Normal AC supply Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered will
AFE Supply 1 DC supply voltage by AFE be valid for motor M1. If you have more than one motor
you need to select the correct motor in menu [212] before
DC Supply 2 DC supply voltage
entering motor data.
AC/DC Suppl 3 AC/DC supply voltage
NOTE 1: The parameters for motor data cannot be
Communication information changed during run mode.
Profibus slot/index 170/31 NOTE 2: The default settings are for a standard 4-
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d36 pole motor according to the nominal power of the AC
Profinet IO index 19766 drive.
Modbus format UInt
NOTE 3: Parameter set cannot be changed during run
if the parameter set is set for different motors.
When changing to / from the “AFE Supply” selection, the
following parameters are set to following values:
NOTE 4: Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4
can be revert to default setting in menu “[243]
Menu to AFE from AFE
Default>Set”.
[523] DigIn 3 Sleep Off
[542] DigOut 3 Run Brake WARNING!
Enter the correct motor data to prevent
[527] DigIn 7 Off Off
dangerous situations and assure correct
[561] VIO 1 Dest External Trip Off control.
[562] VIO 1 Source !D1 Off
[6151] CD 1 DigIn 7 Run Motor Voltage [221]
Set the nominal motor voltage.
221 Motor Volts

400 V for FDU48
Default: 500 V for FDU52
690 V for FDU69
Range: 100-700 V
Resolution 1V
NOTE: The Motor Volts value will always be stored as

a 3 digit value with a resolution of 1 V.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4be1
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 V
Modbus format EInt

Motor Frequency [222] Motor Power [223]
Set the nominal motor frequency. Set the nominal motor power. If parallel motors, set the
value as sum of motors power. The nominal motorpower
222 Motor Freq must be within the range of 1 - 150% of the AC drives
nominal power.
Default: 50 Hz
Range: 20.0 - 300.0 Hz 223 Motor Power
Resolution 0.1 Hz Default: (PNOM) kW, AC drive
Range: 1-150 % x PNOM
Resolution 3 significant digits
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43060 = 0.1 43042 = 1
Profibus slot/index 168/219 168/201
EtherCAT and CANopen index NOTE: The Motor Power value will always be stored
4bf4 4be2
(hex) as a 3 digit value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all
Profinet IO index 19444 19426 higher powers.
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 Hz Long, 1=1 Hz
Modbus format EInt EInt Communication information
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 W
Modbus format EInt
PNOM is the nominal AC drive power.
Motor Current [224]

Set the nominal motor current. If parallel motors, set the
value as sum of motors current.
224 Motor Curr

Default: (IMOT) A (see Note 2 page 105)
Range: 25 - 150 % x INOM A
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 A
Modbus format EInt
NOTE: The default settings are for a standard 4-pole

motor according to the nominal power of the AC
drive.

Motor Speed [225] Motor Cos ϕ [227]
Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed. Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor).
225 Motor Speed 227 Motor Cosϕ

Default: (nMOT) rpm (see Note 2 page 105) Default: CosϕNOM (see Note 2 page 105)
Range: 30 - 18000 rpm Range: 0.45 - 1.00
Resolution 1 rpm, 4 sign digits
WARNING!
Do NOT enter a synchronous (no-load) Profibus slot/index 168/206
motor speed. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4be7
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01
NOTE: Maximum speed [343] is not automatically Modbus format EInt
changed when the motor speed is changed.
Motor ventilation [228]

NOTE: Entering a wrong, too low value can cause a
Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation. Affects
dangerous situation for the driven application due to
high speeds. the characteristics of the I2t motor protection by lowering
the actual overload current at lower speeds.
228 Motor Vent
Profibus slot/index 168/204 Default: Self
None 0 Limited I2t overload curve.
Fieldbus format UInt. 1=1 rpm Normal I2t overload curve. Means that the
Self 1
Modbus format UInt motor stands lower current at low speed.
Expanded I2t overload curve. Means that
Forced 2 the motor stands almost the whole current
Motor Poles [226] also at lower speed.
When the nominal speed of the motor is ≤500 rpm, the
additional menu for entering the number of poles, [226], Communication information
appears automatically. In this menu the actual pole number
can be set which will increase the control accuracy of the AC
drive.
226 Motor Poles Fieldbus format UInt
Default: 4 Modbus format UInt
Range: 2-144
When the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected and
the current level is limited to 55% of rated motor current.
With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected and
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43046 the current for overload is limited to 87% from 20% of
Profibus slot/index 168/205 synchronous speed. At lower speed, the overload current
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4be6 allowed will be smaller.
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 pole
When the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced is
Modbus format EInt
selected and the overload current allowed starts at 90% from
rated motor current at zero speed, up to nominal motor
current at 70% of synchronous speed.
Fig. 106 shows the characteristics with respect for Nominal
Current and Speed in relation to the motor ventilation type
selected.

xInom for I2t NOTE: If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the
Forced
message “Interrupted!” will be displayed. The
1.00
0.90
previous data do not need to be changed in this case.
0.87 Check that the motor data are correct.
Self
None
0.55 Motor Sound [22A]
Sets the sound characteristic of the AC drive output stage by
changing the switching frequency and/or pattern. Generally
the motor noise will go down at higher switching
frequencies.
0.20 0.70 2.00
xSync Speed
22A Motor Sound
F
Fig. 106 I2t curves Default: (“Advanced” for models 48-293/295 and
48-365)
Motor Identification Run [229] E 0 Switching frequency 1.5 kHz
This function is used when the AC drive is put into
F 1 Switching frequency 3 kHz
operation for the first time. To achieve an optimal control
performance, fine tuning of the motor parameters using a G 2 Switching frequency 6 kHz
motor ID run is needed. During the test run the display Switching frequency 6 kHz, random
shows “Test Run” flashing. H 3
frequency (+750 Hz)
To activate the Motor ID run, select “Short” and press Switching frequency and PWM mode
Enter. Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel to Advanced 4
setup via [22E]
start the ID run. If menu
“[219] Rotation” is set to L the RunR key is inactive and
vice versa. The ID run can be aborted by giving a Stop
command via the control panel or Enable input. The Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43050
parameter will automatically return to OFF when the test is Profibus slot/index 168/209
completed. The message “Test Run OK!” is displayed. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bea
Before the AC drive can be operated normally again, press Profinet IO index 19434
the STOP/RESET key on the control panel. Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate.
The AC drive measures the rotor and stator resistance.
NOTE: At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating may
become necessary.
229 Motor ID-Run

NOTE: If the heat sink temperature gets too high the
Default: Off, see Note switching frequency is decreased to avoid tripping.
This is done automatically in the AC drive. The default
Off 0 Not active switching frequency is 3 kHz.
Parameters are measured with injected
Short 1 DC current. No rotation of the shaft will
occur.
Encoder Feedback [22B]
Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This
parameter enables or disables the encoder feedback from the
Communication information motor to the AC drive.
Profibus slot/index 168/208 22B Encoder
Profinet IO index 19433 Default: Off
Off 0 Encoder feedback disabled
Modbus format UInt
On 1 Encoder feedback enabled
NOTE: To run the AC drive it is not mandatory for the

ID RUN to be executed, but without it the
performance will not be optimal.

Communication information PWM Fswitch [22E1]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43051 Set the PWM switching frequency of the AC drive
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4beb 22E1 PWM Fswitch
Fieldbus format UInt 3.00 kHz
Modbus format UInt Default: (2 kHz for models 48-293/295 and
48-365)
Encoder Pulses [22C] Range 1.50 - 6.00kHz

Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This Resolution 0.01kHz
parameter describes the number of pulses per rotation for
your encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific. For more
information please see the encoder manual.
22C Enc Pulses
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bed
Default: 1024 Profinet IO index 19437
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1Hz
Range: 5–16384
Modbus format EInt
PWM Mode [22E2]
22E2 PWM Mode
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bec
Default: Standard
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 pulse
Modbus format EInt Standard 0 Standard
Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine
Sine Filt 1
Filters
Encoder Speed [22D]
Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This
parameter shows the measured motor speed. To check if the NOTE: Switching frequency is fixed when “Sine Filt”
encoder is correctly installed, set Encoder Feedback [22B] to is selected. This means that it is not possible to
Off, run the AC drive at any speed and compare with the control the switching frequency based on
value in this menu. The value in this menu [22D] should be temperature.
about the same as the motor speed [230]. If you get the
wrong sign for the value, swap encoder input A and B.
22D Enc Speed
Unit: rpm EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bee
Resolution: speed measured via the encoder
Modbus format UInt
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42911 PWM Random [22E3]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4b5f
22E3 PWM Random
Fieldbus format Int, 1=1 rpm
Modbus format Int Default: Off
Off 0 Random modulation is Off.
Motor PWM [22E] Random modulation is active. Random

On 1 frequency variation range is ± 1/8 of level
Menus for advanced setup of motor modulation properties
set in [E22E1].
PWM = Pulse Width Modulation).
Note: Menus [22E1] - [22E3] are only visible if [22A] is

set to “Advanced”.

Communication information Encoder fault and speed monitoring
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43055 [22G]
Parameters for encoder fault monitoring and speed
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bef
supervision by use of the encoder feedback for detecting
speed deviation compared to internal speed reference signal.
Similar speed deviation functionality is also available in the
Modbus format UInt
Crane option, with parameters for speed bandwidth and
delay time.
Udc filter [22E4]
Activating the Udc filter makes the drive less responsive to Encoder fault trip conditions:
fast Udc changes. This can be useful to improve system 1. No encoder board detected after power up and AC
stability when connected to a weak power grid but may drive is setup to use encoder.
reduce the dynamics of motor control. 2. Lost communication to encoder board for more
than 2 seconds.
22E4 Udc filter 3. If no pulses detected for set delay time [22G1] and
drive in Torque Limit (TL) or Current Limit (CL).
Default: Off Encoder speed deviation trip condition:
Encoder speed outside set speed deviation band [22G2] for
Off 0 The Udc filter is not active. set delay time [22G1].
On 1 The Udc filter is active.
Note: Encoder speed deviation trip re-uses
Communication information “Deviation 2” trip message with ID = 2.

Profibus slot/index 168/199 Encoder fault delay time [22G1]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4be0 Define the encoder fault and speed deviation delay time.
Fieldbus format UInt 22G1 Enc F Delay
Modbus format UInt
Default: Off
Encoder Pulse counter [22F] Range Off, 0.01 - 10.00 s where Off = 0
Only visible if the Encoder option is installed. Added menu/
parameter for accumulated QEP (Quadrature Encoder Communication information
Pulse) encoder pulses. Can be preset to any value within bus Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43056
format used (Int = 2 byte, Long = 4 byte). Profibus slot/index 168/215
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bf0
22F Enc Puls Ctr Profinet IO index 19440
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
Default: 0 Modbus format EInt
Resolution 1
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4b60
Long, 1=1 quad
Fieldbus format
encoder pulse
Modbus format Int
Note: For a 1024 pulse encoder [22F] will count

1024 * 4= 4096 pulses per turn.

Encoder fault speed deviation band Communication information
[22G2] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43058
Defines the max allowed speed deviation band = difference Profibus slot/index 168/217
between measured encoder speed and speed ramp output. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bf2
22G2 Enc F Band Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Default: 10%
Motor type [22I]
Range 0 - 400 %
In this menu select type of motor. Emotron AC drives can
control Asynchronous motors, Permanent Magnet
Communication information Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Reluctance Motors.
Profibus slot/index 168/216 22I Motor Type
Profinet IO index 19441 Default: Async
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 %
Modbus format EInt
Async 0 Asynchronous motor
PMSM 1 Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Encoder max fault counter [22G3] Sync Rel 2 Synchronous Reluctance motor
This is a measured signal showing the maximum time that
the speed deviation has exceeded the allowed speed deviation
band level, set in [22G2]. The parameter is intended to be
used during commissioning for setting up [22G1] and Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43059
[22G2] to avoid nuisance trips and can be cleared by setting Profibus slot/index 168/218
it to 0. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bf3
22G3 Max EncFCtr
Modbus format UInt
Default: 0.000s
NOTE: If PMSM is selected in menu [22I], following
Range 0.00 - 10.00 s will be set automatically:
Communication information • Menu “Spin start [33A] “will be hidden. Means

that spinstart is not possible.
Extend data [22J]
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.001s Additional motor parameters for Permanent Magnet
Modbus format EInt Synchronous Motors (PMSM) and Synchronous Reluctance
motors.
NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down. It This menu is only available if PMSM or Sync Rel is selected
is possible to reset the value by clearing the in menu [22I].
parameter.
BEMF [22J1]
Set the back EMF of the motor at the nominal operating
Phase order [22H] point. This parameter may not be explicitly available from
Phase sequence for motor output. In this menu you can the manufacturer, but can then be computed from the
correct rotation direction on the motor by selecting “reverse” electrical constant Ke and the nominal speed.
instead of switching the motor cables..
22J1 BEMF
22H Phase order
Default: Motor dependent
Default: Normal
Range: 100-700 V
Normal 0 Normal phase order (U,V,W)
Resolution 1V
Reverse 1 Reverse phase order (U, W, V)

Communication information Lsq (mH/ph) [22J4]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43391 Set the per phase q-axis inductance.
EtherCAT and CANopenindex (hex) 4d3f 22J4 Lsq (mH/ph)
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1V Default: Undef
Modbus format EInt
Undef Undefined
Rs (Ω/ph) [22J2] Range: 0.001-10000.000 mH

Set the per phase resistance.
22J2 Rs (Ω/ph) Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43394
Default: Undef EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d42
Undef Undefined
Range: 0.000001-40.000000 ohm Modbus format EInt
Modbus format EInt
Lsd (mH/ph) [22J3]

Set the per phase d-axis inductance.
22J3 Lsd (mH/ph)
Default: Undef
Undef Undefined
Range: 0.001-10000.000 mH
Modbus format EInt

11.4.5 Motor Protection [230] Motor I2t Current [232]
This function protects the motor against overload based on Sets the current limit for the motor I2t protection in percent
the standard IEC 60947-4-2. of IMOT.
Motor I2t Type [231] 232 Mot I2t Curr

The motor protection function makes it possible to protect Default: 100% of IMOT
the motor from overload as published in the standard IEC Range: 0–150% of IMOT (set in menu [224])
60947-4-2. It does this using “Motor I2t Current [232]” as a
reference. The “Motor I2t Time [233]” is used to define the
time behaviour of the function. The current set in [232] can Communication information
be delivered infinite in time. If for instance in [233] a time Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43062
of 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig. 107 is valid. The Profibus slot/index 168/221
value on the x-axis is the multiple of the current chosen in EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bf6
[232]. The time [233] is the time that an overloaded motor Profinet IO index 19446
is switched off or is reduced in power at 1.2 times the Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%
current set in [232]. Modbus format EInt
231 Mot I2t Type NOTE: When the selection Limit is set in menu [231],
the value must be above the no-load current of the
Default: Trip
motor.
Off 0 I2t motor protection is not active.
When the I2t time is exceeded, the AC
Trip 1
drive will trip on “Motor I2t”.
Motor I2t Time [233]
Sets the time of the I2t function. After this time the limit for
This mode helps to keep the inverter
the I2t is reached if operating with 120% of the I2t current
running when the Motor I2t function is just
value. Valid when start from 0 rpm.
before tripping the AC drive. The trip is
replaced by current limiting with a
maximum current level set by the value NOTE: Not the time constant of the motor.
Limit 2
out of the menu [232]. In this way, if the
reduced current can drive the load, the
AC drive continues running. If there is no 233 Mot I2t Time
reduction in thermal load, the drive will
Default: 60 s
trip.
Range: 60–1200 s
Profibus slot/index 168/220 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43063
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bf5 Profibus slot/index 168/222
Profinet IO index 19445 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bf7
Fieldbus format UInt Profinet IO index 19447
Modbus format UInt Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format EInt
NOTE: When Mot I2t Type=Limit, the AC drive can

control the speed < MinSpeed to reduce the motor
current.

100000
10000
t [s]
1000
1000 s (120%)
480 s (120%)
100
240 s (120%)
120 s (120%)
60 s (120%)
10
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2
Actual output current/ I2t-current

i / I2t-current
2
Fig. 107 I t function
Fig. 107 shows how the function integrates the square of the Example
motor current according to the “Mot I2t Curr [232]” and In Fig. 107 the thick grey line shows the following example.
the “Mot I2t Time [233]”.
• Menu “[232] Mot I2t Curr” is set to 100%.
When the selection Trip is set in menu [231] the AC drive 1.2 x 100% = 120%
trips if this limit is exceeded.
• Menu “[233] Mot I2t Time” is set to 1000 s.
When the selection Limit is set in menu [231] the AC drive
This means that the AC drive will trip or reduce the current
reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95% or closer to
(depending on the setting in menu [231]) after 1000 s if the
the limit, so that the limit cannot be exceeded.
current is 1.2 times of 100% nominal motor current.
NOTE: If it is not possible to reduce the current, the

AC drive will trip after exceeding 110% of the limit.

Thermal Protection [234] Motor Class [235]
This menu selects active sensors for PTC motor protection Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set
and activates/deactivates PT100 motor protection. Select the class of motor used. The trip levels for the PT100 sensor
active PT100 sensors in menu [236]. The PTC sensor will automatically be set according to the setting in this
connected to the first board is activated if two boards are menu.
installed but only one PTC sensor is activated.
Only visible if one or two PTC/PT100 option boards are 235 Mot Class
installed. The motor thermistors (PTC) must comply with Default: F 140°C
DIN 44081/44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/
PT100 option board. A 100°C 0
E 115°C 1
234 Thermal Prot B 120°C 2
Default: Off F 140°C 3
PTC and PT100 motor protection are F Nema
Off 0 4
disabled. 145°C
1xPTC 1 Activates one PTC sensor. H 165°C 5
PT100 2 Activates PT100 protection.
1xPTC+ Activate one PTC sensor and PT100 Communication information
3
PT100 protection. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43065
2xPTC 4 Activates two PTC sensors. Profibus slot/index 168/224
2xPTC+ Activates PTC sensors and PT100 Profinet IO index 19449
5
PT100 protection. Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43064 NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100.
Profinet IO index 19448 PT100 Inputs [236]
Fieldbus format UInt Sets which of PT100 inputs (3 inputs per board) that should
Modbus format UInt be used for thermal protection. Deselecting not used PT100
inputs on the PTC/PT100 option board in order to ignore
NOTE: PTC option and PT100 selections can only be those inputs, i.e. extra external wiring is not needed if port is
selected in menu [234] if one or two option boards are not used.
mounted.
236 PT100 Inputs
NOTE: If you select the PTC option, the PT100 inputs Default: PT100 1+2+3
as motor protection are ignored.
PT100 1, PT100 2, PT100 1+2, PT100
3, PT100 1+3, PT100 2+3, PT100
Selection:
1+2+3, PT100 1-4, PT100 1-5, PT100
1-6
PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protection
PT100 1+2 3 Channel 1+2 used for PT100 protection
PT100 Channel 1+2+3 used for PT100
7
1+2+3 protection

Channel 1 - 4 used for PT100 Communication information
PT100 1-4 8
protection Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43067
Channel 1 - 5 used for PT100 Profibus slot/index 168/226
PT100 1-5 9 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bfb
protection
Channel 1 - 6 used for PT100 Fieldbus format UInt
PT100 1-6 10
protection
Modbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bfa
Modbus format UInt
NOTE: This menu is only active if PT100 is enabled in

menu [234].
Motor PTC [237]

For AC drive sizes B to D (FDU48/52-003--074),
C2 & D2 (FDU48-025--105), C69 & D69 (FDU69-002--
058-54) and C2(69) & D2(69) (FDU69-002--058-20)
there is optional possibility to directly connect motor PTC
(not to be mixed up with PTC/PT100 option board, see
Chapter 13.10 page 229).
In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is
activated. This PTC input complies with DIN 44081/
44082. For electrical specification please refer to the separate
manual for the PTC/PT100 option board, same data applies
(could be found on www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.com).
This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor <2 kOhm) is
connected to terminals X1: 78–79. See Chapter 4.5 page 51
and Chapter 4.5.1 page 51.
NOTE: This function is not related to PTC/PT100

option board.
To enable the function:

1. Connect the thermistor wires to X1: 78–79 or for
testing the input, connect a resistor to the terminals
. Use a resistor value between 50 and 2000 ohm.
Menu [237] will now appear.
2. Activate input by setting menu “[237] Motor
PTC”=On.
If activated and <50 ohm a sensor error trip will occur. The
fault message “Motor PTC” is shown.
If the function is disabled and the PTC or resistor is
removed, the menu will disappear after the next power on.
237 Motor PTC

Default: Off
Off 0 Motor PTC protection is deactivated
On 1 Motor PTC protection is activated

11.4.6 Parameter Set Handling The active set can be viewed with function
[721] VSD status.
[240]
There are four different parameter sets available in the AC
NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if
drive. These parameter sets can be used to set the AC drive the parameter set includes change of the motor set
up for different processes or applications such as different (M2-M4). In this case always stop the motor before
motors used and connected, activated PID controller, changing parameter set.
different ramp time settings, etc.
A parameter set consists of all parameters with the exception Prepare parameter Set when different Motor data
of the Global parameters. The Global parameters are only M1 - M4:
able to have one value for all parameter sets. 1. Select desired parameter Set to be set in [241] A -
Following parameters are Global: [211] Language, [217] D.
Local Remote, [218] Lock Code, [220] Motor Data, [241] 2. Select “Motor Set [212]” if other than the default
Select Set, [260] Serial Communication and [21B]Mains Set M1.
Supply Voltage . 3. Set relevant motor data in the Menu group [220].
4. Set other desired parameter settings to belong to
NOTE: Actual timers are common for all sets. When a this parameter Set.
set is changed the timer functionality will change To prepare a Set for another motor, repeat these steps.
according to the new set, but the timer value will stay
unchanged.
Copy Set [242]
This function copies the content of a parameter set into
Select Set [241] another parameter set.
Here you select the parameter set. Every menu included in
the parameter sets is designated A, B, C or D depending on 242 Copy Set
the active parameter set. Parameter sets can be selected from
Default: A>B
the keyboard, via the programmable digital inputs or via
serial communication. Parameter sets can be changed during A>B 0 Copy set A to set B
the run. If the sets are using different motors (M1 to M4)
A>C 1 Copy set A to set C
the set will be changed only when the motor is stopped.
A>D 2 Copy set A to set D
241 Select Set B>A 3 Copy set B to set A
Default: A B>C 4 Copy set B to set C
Selection: A, B, C, D, DigIn, Com, Option B>D 5 Copy set B to set D

A 0 C>A 6 Copy set C to set A
B 1 Fixed selection of one of the 4 parameter C>B 7 Copy set C to set B
C 2 sets A, B, C or D. C>D 8 Copy set C to set D
D 3 D>A 9 Copy set D to set A
Parameter set is selected via a digital D>B 10 Copy set D to set B

DigIn 4 input. Define which digital input in menu
D>C 11 Copy set D to set C
“[520] Digital inputs”.
Parameter set is selected via serial
Com 5 Communication information
communication.
The parameter set is set via an option. Profibus slot/index 168/180
Option 6 Only available if the option can control the
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bcd
selection.
Communication information Modbus format UInt
Profibus slot/index 168/181 NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bce copied into the other set.
A>B means that the content of parameter set A is copied
Modbus format UInt
into parameter set B.

Load Default Values Into Set [243] Copy All Settings to Control Panel
With this function three different levels (factory settings) [244]
can be selected for the four parameter sets. When loading
All the settings can be copied into the control panel
the default settings, all changes made in the software are set
including the motor data. Start commands will be ignored
to factory settings. This function also includes selections for
during copying.
loading default settings to the four different Motor Data
Sets.
244 Copy to CP
243 Default>Set Default: No Copy
Default: A No Copy 0 Nothing will be copied
A 0 Copy 1 Copy all settings
B 1 Only the selected parameter set will revert

C 2 to its default settings.
D 3 Profibus slot/index 168/183
All four parameter sets will revert to the EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bd0
ABCD 4 Profinet IO index 19408
default settings.
All settings, except [211], [221]-[228],
Modbus format UInt
Factory 5 [261] and [923], will revert to the default
settings.
NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be
M1 6
copied into control panel memory set.
M2 7 Only the selected motor set will revert to
M3 8 its default settings.
M4 9
All four motor sets will revert to default
M1234 10
settings.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bcf
Modbus format UInt
NOTE: Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY

menus are not regarded as settings and will be
unaffected.
NOTE: If “Factory” is selected, the message “Sure?”

is displayed. Press the + key to display “Yes” and
then Enter to confirm.
NOTE: The parameters in menu “[220] Motor data”,

are not affected by loading defaults when restoring
parameter sets A–D.

Load Settings from Control Panel 11.4.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip
[245] Conditions [250]
This function can load all four parameter sets from the The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not
control panel to the AC drive. Parameter sets from the affect the process will be automatically reset. Only when the
source AC drive are copied to all parameter sets in the target failure keeps on coming back, recurring at defined times and
AC drive, i.e. A to A, B to B, C to C and D to D. therefore cannot be solved by the AC drive, will the unit give
an alarm to inform the operator that attention is required.
Start commands will be ignored during loading.
For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you
245 Load from CP can select to control the motor down to zero speed according
to set deceleration ramp to avoid water hammer.
Default: No Copy
Also see section 12.2, page 218.
No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded.
A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded.
Autoreset example:
In an application it is known that the main supply voltage
B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded. sometimes disappears for a very short time, a so-called “dip”.
C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded. That will cause the AC drive to trip an “Undervoltage
alarm”. Using the Autoreset function, this trip will be
D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded. acknowledged automatically.
Data from parameter sets A, B, C and D • Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input
ABCD 5
are loaded.
continuously high.
Parameter set A and Motor data are
A+Mot 6 • Activate the Autoreset function in the menu [251],
loaded.
Number of trips.
Parameter set B and Motor data are
B+Mot 7 • Select in menu [259] Undervoltage the trip conditions
loaded.
that shall be allowed to be automatically reset by the
Parameter set C and Motor data are Autoreset function, after the set delay time has expired.
C+Mot 8
loaded.
Parameter set D and Motor data are
D+Mot 9
loaded.
ABCD+Mo Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor data
10
t are loaded.
M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded.
M1M2M3
15 Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded.
M4
All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bd1
Modbus format UInt
NOTE: Loading from the control panel will not affect

the value in menu [310].

Number of Trips [251] Over temperature [252]
Any number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This means Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
that after a trip, the AC drive will restart automatically time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
according to the number of attempts selected. No restart is active.
attempts will take place unless all conditions are normal.
If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more trips 252 Over temp
than the selected number of attempts, the Autoreset cycle Default: Off
will be interrupted. No Autoreset will then take place.
Off 0 Off
If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the Autoreset
counter decreases by one. 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the trip

message hour counter is marked with an “A”. A normal reset Communication information
is then required. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43072
Example: EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c00
• Number of allowed autoreset attempts [251]= 5. Profinet IO index 19456
• Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur. Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format EInt
• At the 6th trip there is no autoreset, because the
autoreset counter is set to allow only 5 attempts to
autoreset a trip. NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining
ramp time.
• To reset the autoreset counter, give a new reset command
(from one of the sources for reset control selected in
menu [216]). Over volt D [253]
• The autoreset counter is now zeroed. Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active.
251 No of Trips
253 Over volt D
Default: 0 (no Autoreset)
Default: Off
Range: 0–10 attempts
Off 0 Off
Communication information 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s

Profibus slot/index 168/230 Communication information
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bff Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43075
Profinet IO index 19455 Profibus slot/index 168/234
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c03
Modbus format UInt Profinet IO index 19459
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format EInt
NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining
ramp time.
NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining
ramp time.

Over volt G [254] Communication information
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43083
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function Profibus slot/index 168/242
is active. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c0b
254 Over volt G
Modbus format EInt
Default: Off
Off 0 Off
Locked Rotor [257]
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
Communication information is active.
Profibus slot/index 168/235 257 Locked Rotor
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c04
Default: Off
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Off 0 Off
Modbus format EInt 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
Over volt [255] Communication information

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43086
is active. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c0e
255 Over volt
Modbus format EInt
Default: Off
Off 0 Off
Power Fault [258]
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
Communication information is active.
Profibus slot/index 168/236 258 Power Fault
Default: Off
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Off 0 Off
Modbus format EInt 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
Motor Lost [256] Communication information

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43087
is active. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c0f
256 Motor Lost
Modbus format EInt
Default: Off
Off 0 Off
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
NOTE: Only visible when Motor Lost is selected in

menu [423].

Undervoltage [259] PT100 [25C]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function
is active. is active.
259 Undervoltage 25C PT100

Default: Off Default: Off
Off 0 Off Off 0 Off
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
Communication information Communication information

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43088 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43078
Profibus slot/index 168/247 Profibus slot/index 168/237
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c10 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c06
Profinet IO index 19472 Profinet IO index 19462
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format EInt Modbus format EInt
Motor I2t [25A] PT100 Trip Type [25D]

25A Motor I2t 25D PT100 TT

Default: Off Default: Trip
Off 0 Off Selection: Same as menu [25B]
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
Communication information Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43079
Fieldbus format Uint
Modbus format UInt
Modbus format EInt
PTC [25E]
2
Motor I t Trip Type [25B] Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I2t trip.
is active.
25B Motor I2t TT

25E PTC
Default: Trip
Default: Off
Trip 0 The motor will coast
Off 0 Off
Deceleration 1 The motor will decelerate
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
Modbus format UInt

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c0c EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c09
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format EInt Modbus format UInt
PTC Trip Type [25F] Communication Error [25I]

Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip. Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
25F PTC TT is active.
Default: Trip
25I Com Error
Selection: Same as menu [25B]
Default: Off
Communication information Off 0 Off
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43085 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c0d Communication information
Modbus format UInt
External Trip [25G] Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s

Modbus format EInt
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
is active. Communication Error Trip Type
[25J]
25G Ext Trip
Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip.
Default: Off
Off 0 Off 25J Com Error TT
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s Default: Trip
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43080 Communication information
Modbus format EInt
Modbus format UInt
External Trip Type [25H]
Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.
25H Ext Trip TT

Default: Trip

Min Alarm [25K] Max Alarm Trip Type [25N]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip.
is active. 25N Max Alarm TT
Default: Trip
25K Min Alarm
Default: Off
Off 0 Off Communication information
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43094
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c16
Modbus format UInt
Over current F [25O]
Modbus format EInt
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the
Min Alarm Trip Type [25L] is active.
Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip.
25O Over curr F
25L Min Alarm TT Default: Off
Default: Trip Off 0 Off
Selection: Same as menu [25B] 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c14 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c0a
Fieldbus format UInt Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format UInt Modbus format EInt
Max Alarm [25M] Pump [25P]

25M Max Alarm 25P Pump

Off 0 Off Off 0 Off
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c15 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c17
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s

Over Speed [25Q] External Motor Trip Type [25S]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.
is active. 25S Ext Mot TT
Default: Trip
25Q Over speed
Default: Off
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c1a
Modbus format UInt
Liquid cooling low level [25T]
Modbus format EInt
Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When
the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the
External Motor Temperature [25R] function is active.
Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When
the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the 25T LC Level
function is active. Default: Off
Off 0 Off
25R Ext Mot Temp
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s
Default: Off
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c1b
Modbus format EInt
Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type
Modbus format EInt
[25U]
Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.
25U LC Level TT
Default: Trip
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c1c
Modbus format UInt

Brake Fault [25V] 11.4.8 Serial Communication [260]
Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When This function is to define the communication parameters for
the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the serial communication. There are two types of options
function is active. available for serial communication, RS232/485 (Modbus/
RTU) and fieldbus modules (CANopen, Profibus,
25V Brk Fault DeviceNet, Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO, EtherCAT and
EtherNet/IP).
Default Off For more information see Chapter 9. page 79 and respective
option manual.
Off 0 Autoreset not activated.
1 - 3600s 1 - 3600 Brake fault auto reset delay time.
Comm Type [261]
Select RS232/485 [262] or Fieldbus [263].
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43070 261 Com Type
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bfe Default: RS232/485
RS232/485 0 RS232/485 selected
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s
Modbus format EInt Fieldbus selected (CANopen, Profibus,
Fieldbus 1 DeviceNet, Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO,
EtherCAT or EtherNet/IP)
Encoder [25W]
Encoder delay time, starts counting when the fault Communication information
disappears. When the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43031
be reset if the function is active. Profibus slot/index 168/190
25W Encoder Profinet IO index 19415
Default: Off Modbus format UInt
Off 0 Off
NOTE: Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a
1- 3600 1- 3600 1- 3600 s
soft reset (re-boot) of the Fieldbus module.
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43561 RS232/485 [262]
Profibus slot/index 170/210 Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232/485
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4de9 (Modbus/RTU) communication.
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s 262 RS232/485
Modbus format EInt
Baud rate [2621]

Set the baud rate for the communication.
NOTE: This baud rate is only used for the isolated

RS232/485 option.
2621 Baudrate
Default: 9600
2400 0
4800 1
9600 2 Selected baud rate
19200 3
38400 4

Communication information Process Data Mode [2632]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43032 Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For further
Profibus slot/index 168/191 information, see the Fieldbus option manual.
Profinet IO index 19416 NOTE: For CANopen module this menu is forced to
Fieldbus format UInt “8”.
Modbus format UInt
2632 PrData Mode

Address [2622]
Enter the unit address for the AC drive. Default: Basic
None 0 Control/status information is not used.
NOTE: This address is only used for the isolated
4 byte process data control/status
RS232/485 option. Basic 4
information is used.
4 byte process data (same as Basic
2622 Address Extended 8 setting) + additional proprietary protocol
for advanced users is used.
Default: 1
Selection: 1–247
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43033 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bdb
Profibus slot/index 168/192 Profinet IO index 19419
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bd9 Fieldbus format UInt
Profinet IO index 19417 Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Read/Write [2633]
Select read/write to control the inverter over a fieldbus
Fieldbus [263] network. For further information, see the Fieldbus option
manual.
Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus
communication.
2633 Read/Write
263 Fieldbus Default: RW
RW 0
Address [2631] Read 1
Enter/view the unit/node address of the AC drive. Read &
write access for CANopen, Profibus, DeviceNet. Read - only Valid for process data. Select R (read only) for logging
process without writing process data. Select RW in normal
for EtherCAT.
cases to control inverter.
2631 Address
Default: 62 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43036
CANopen 1-127, Profibus 0–126, Profibus slot/index 168/195
Range:
DeviceNet 0–63 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bdc
Node address valid for CANopen (RW), Profibus(RW),
DeviceNet (RW) and EtherCAT (RO). Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bda
Modbus format UInt

Additional Process Values [2634] * Under normal traffic conditions, i.e. with cyclic bus traffic
Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic above 2 Hz, the baud rate should be detected within
messages. 5 seconds.
NOTE: For CANopen module this menu is forced to NOTE: The automatic baud rate detection will NOT
“Basic”. work if there is no traffic on the network.
2634 AddPrValues Communication Fault [264]

Default: 0 Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. For
further details please see the Fieldbus option manual.
Range: 0-8
Communication Fault Mode [2641]
Communication information Selects action if a communication fault is detected.
Profibus slot/index 168/198 2641 ComFlt Mode
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bdf
Default: Off
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 Off 0 No communication supervision.
Modbus format UInt RS232/485 selected:
The AC drive will trip if there is no
CANBaudrate [2635] communication for time set in parameter
Set the baud rate for CANopen fieldbus. [2642].
Fieldbus selected:
Trip 1
The AC drive will trip if:
NOTE: Used for CANopen module only 1. The internal communication between
the control board and fieldbus option is
lost for time set in parameter [2642].
2635 CANBaudrate 2. If a serious network error has occurred.
Default: 8 RS232/485 selected:
0 10 kbps The AC drive will give a warning if there is
no communication for time set in
1 20 kbps parameter [2642].
2 50 kbps Fieldbus selected:
Warning 2
The AC drive will give a warning if:
3 Reserve 1. The internal communication between
the control board and fieldbus option is
4 100 kbps
lost for time set in parameter [2642].
5 125 kbps 2. If a serious network error has occurred.
6 250 kbps
7 500 kbps NOTE: Menu [214] and/or [215] must be set to COM
to activate the communication fault function.
8 1 Mbps
9 Auto * Communication information
Communication information Profibus slot/index 168/196
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43030 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bdd
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bd6 Fieldbus format UInt
Profinet IO index 19414 Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt

Communication Fault Time [2642] Communication information
Defines the delay time for the trip/warning. 42705, 42706, 42707,
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:
42708, 42709, 42710
2642 ComFlt Time 167/119, 167/120,
Profibus slot/index 167/121, 167/122,
Default: 0.5 s 167/123, 167/124
4a91, 4a92, 4a93,
Range: 0.1-15 s EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex)
4a94, 4a95, 4a96,
19089, 19090, 19091,
Profinet IO index
Communication information 19092, 19093, 19094
Modbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4bde
Profinet IO index 19422 Subnet Mask [2653]
Modbus format EInt 2653 Subnet Mask
Default: 0.0.0.0
Ethernet [265]
Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP, Profinet IO). Communication information
For further information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 42711, 42712, 42713,
42714
NOTE: The Ethernet module must be re-booted to 167/125, 167/126,
Profibus slot/index
activate the below settings. For example by toggling 167/127, 167/128
parameter [261]. Non-initialized settings indicated by EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a97, 4a98, 4a99, 4a9a
flashing display text. 19095, 19096, 19097,
Profinet IO index
19098
IP Address [2651] Modbus format UInt
2651 IP Address
Default: 0.0.0.0 Gateway [2654]
Communication information 2654 Gateway

42701, 42702, 42703,
42704
Default: 0.0.0.0
167/115, 167/116,
Profibus slot/index
167/117, 167/118 Communication information
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a8d, 4a8e, 4a8f, 4a90
42715, 42716, 42717,
19085, 19086, 19087, Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:
19088
167/129, 167/130,
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 Profibus slot/index
167/131, 167/132
Modbus format UInt EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a9b, 4a9c, 4a9e, 4a9f
19099, 19100, 19101,
Profinet IO index
MAC Address [2652] 19102
Modbus format UInt
2652 MAC Address
An unique number for the Ethernet
Default:
module.

DHCP [2655] 11.5 Process and Application
2655 DHCP
Parameters [300]
These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain optimum
Default: Off process or machine performance.
Selection: On/Off The read-out, references and actual values depends on
selected process source, [321}:
Table 34
Profibus slot/index 167/133 Selected process Unit for reference
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a9f Resolution
source and actual value
Fieldbus format UInt Speed rpm 4 digits
Modbus format UInt Torque % 3 digits
PT100 °C 3 digits
Frequency Hz 3 digits
Fieldbus Signals [266]

Defines mapping for additional process values. For further 11.5.1 Set/View Reference Value
information, see the Fieldbus option manual. [310]
FB Signal 1 - 16 [2661]-[266G] View reference value
Used to create a block of parameters which are read/written
As default the menu [310] is in view operation. The value of
via communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write parameters
the active reference signal is displayed. The value is displayed
possible.
according to selected process source, [321] or the process
unit selected in menu [322].
2661 FB Signal 1
Set reference value
Default: 0
If the function “Reference Control [214]” is set to
Range: 0-65535 “Keyboard”, the reference value can be set in menu “Set/
View Ref [310]” or as a motor potentiometer with the + and
Communication information - keys (default) on the control panel. Selection is made with
parameter Keyboard Reference Mode in menu [369]. The
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42801-42816
ramp times used when setting the reference value with
Profibus slot/index 167/215-167/230
MotPot function selected in [369] are according to menus
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4af1 - 4b00
“Acc MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]”.
Profinet IO index 19185 - 19200
The ramp times used for the reference value when Normal
function is selected in menu [369], are according to “Acc
Modbus format UInt
Time [331]” and “Dec Time [332]”.
Menu [310] displays on-line the actual reference value
FB Status [269] according to the Mode Settings in Table 34.
Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. Please see
the Fieldbus manual for detailed information. 310 Set/View ref
Default: 0 rpm
269 FB Status Process Source [321] and Process Unit
Dependent on:
[322]
Speed mode 0 - max speed [343]
Torque mode 0 - max torque [351]
Min according to menu [324] - max
Other modes
according to menu [325]

Communication information 11.5.2 Process Settings [320]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42991 With these functions, the AC drive can be set up to fit the
Profibus slot/index 168/150 application. The menus [110], [120], [310], [362]-[368]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4baf and [711] use the process unit selected in [321] and [322]
Profinet IO index 19375 for the application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3/h. This makes it
Long, 1=1 rpm, possible to easily set up the AC drive for the required process
1 %,1 °C or requirements, as well as for copying the range of a feedback
Fieldbus format 0.001 if Process
Value/Process Ref
sensor to set up the Process Value Minimum and Maximum
using a [322] unit in order to establish accurate actual process information.
Modbus format EInt
Process Source [321]

NOTE: The actual value in menu [310] is not copied, Select the signal source for the process value that controls
or loaded from the control panel memory when Copy the motor. The Process Source can be set to act as a function
Set [242], Copy to CP [244] or Load from CP [245] is
of the process signal on AnIn F(AnIn), a function of the
performed.
motor speed F(Speed) or as a function of a process value
from serial communication F(Bus). The right function to
NOTE: If the MotPot function is used, the reference select depends on the characteristics and behaviour of the
value ramp times are according to the “Acc MotPot process. If the selection Speed or Frequency is set, the AC
[333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]” settings. Actual speed drive will use speed, torque or frequency as reference value.
ramp will be limited according to “Acc Time [331]”
and Example
“Dec Time [332]”. An axial fan is speed-controlled and there is no feedback
signal available. The process needs to be controlled within
fixed process values in “m3/hr” and a process read-out of the
NOTE: Write access to this parameter is only allowed
air flow is needed. The characteristic of this fan is that the air
when menu “Ref Control [214]” is set to Keyboard.
When Reference control is used, see section “9. flow is linearly related to the actual speed. So by selecting
Serial communication” on page 79 F(Speed) as the Process Source, the process can easily be
controlled.
The selection F(xx) indicates that a process unit and scaling
is needed, set in menus [322]-[328]. This makes it possible
to e.g. use pressure sensors to measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) is
selected, the source is automatically connected to the AnIn
which has Process Value as selected.
321 Proc Source

Default: Speed
Function of analogue input. E.g. via PID
F(AnIn) 0
control, [380].
Speed 1 Speed as process reference.
PT100 3 Temperature as process reference.
F(Speed) 4 Function of speed
F(Bus) 6 Function of communication reference
Frequency 7 Frequency as process reference1.
1. Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Speed or V/Hz.
NOTE: When PT100 is selected, use PT100 channel 1

on the PTC/PT100 option board.
NOTE: If Speed or Frequency is chosen in menu

“[321] Proc Source”, menus [322] - [328] are hidden.

NOTE: If F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321] see “11.7.1 User-defined Unit [323]
Analogue Inputs [510]” on page 168. This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu
[322]. The function enables the user to define a unit with six
Communication information symbols. Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to
required position. Then use the + and - keys to scroll down
the character list. Confirm the character by moving the
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ce6
cursor to the next position by pressing the Next key.
Fieldbus format UInt No. for serial No. for serial
Character Character
Modbus format UInt comm. comm.
Space 0 m 58
Process Unit [322] 0–9 1–10 n 59
A 11 ñ 60
322 Proc Unit
B 12 o 61
Default: rpm
C 13 ó 62
Off 0 No unit selection
D 14 ô 63
% 1 Percent
E 15 p 64
°C 2 Degrees Centigrade
F 16 q 65
°F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit
G 17 r 66
bar 4 bar
H 18 s 67
Pa 5 Pascal
I 19 t 68
Nm 6 Torque
J 20 u 69
Hz 7 Frequency
K 21 ü 70
rpm 8 Revolutions per minute
L 22 v 71
m3/h 9 Cubic meters per hour
M 23 w 72
gal/h 10 Gallons per hour
N 24 x 73
ft3/h 11 Cubic feet per hour
O 25 y 74
User 12 User defined unit
P 26 z 75
Q 27 å 76
R 28 ä 77
Profibus slot/index 169/207 S 29 ö 78
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ce7
T 30 ! 79
Fieldbus format UInt U 31 ¨ 80
Modbus format UInt Ü 32 # 81
V 33 $ 82
W 34 % 83
X 35 & 84
Y 36 · 85
Z 37 ( 86
Å 38 ) 87
Ä 39 * 88
Ö 40 + 89
a 41 , 90
á 42 - 91

No. for serial No. for serial Process Min [324]
Character Character
comm. comm. This function sets the minimum process value allowed.
b 43 . 92
324 Process Min
c 44 / 93
Default: 0
d 45 : 94
0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed),
e 46 ; 95 Range: F(Torque))
é 47 < 96 -10000– +10000 (F(AnIn, PT100, F(Bus))
ê 48 = 97
ë 49 > 98
f 50 ? 99 Profibus slot/index 169/214
g 51 @ 100 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cee
h 52 ^ 101 Long, 1=1 rpm,
i 53 _ 102 1 %,1 °C or
í 54 ° 103 Value/Process Ref
using a [322] unit
j 55 2 104 Modbus format EInt
k 56 3 105
l 57 Process Max [325]
This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency is
Example: selected. The function sets the value of the maximum
Create a user unit named kPa. process value allowed.
1. When in the menu [323] press to show the cur-
sor. 325 Process Max
2. Press to move the cursor to the right most posi-
NEXT
Default: 0
tion.
3. Press until the character a is displayed. Range: 0.000-10000
4. Press .
5. Then press the until P is displayed and press Communication information
. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43311
6. Repeat until you have entered kPa, confirm with Profibus slot/index 169/215
. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cef
323 User Unit Long, 1=1 rpm,
1 %,1 °C or
Default: No characters shown Fieldbus format 0.001 if Process
Value/Process Ref
using a [322] unit
Modbus format EInt
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43304 - 43309
169/208 -
Profibus slot/index
169/213
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ce8 - 4ced
Modbus format UInt

Ratio [326] F(Value), Process Min [327]
This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or torque is This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers
selected. The function sets the ratio between the actual you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by
process value and the motor speed so that it has an accurate scaling the process values. The process values are scaled by
process value when no feedback signal is used. See Fig. 108. linking them to known data in the AC drive. With
“F(Value) Proc Min [327]” the precise value at which the
326 Ratio entered “Process Min [324]“is valid can be entered.
Default: Linear
NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in
Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed/torque menu “[321] Proc Source”, menus [322]- [328] are
hidden.
Process is quadratic related to speed/
Quadratic 1
torque
327 F(Val) PrMin
Communication information Default: Min
According to Min Speed setting in
Profibus slot/index 169/216 Min -1
[341].
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cf0
Profinet IO index 19696 According to Max Speed setting in
Max -2
Fieldbus format UInt [343].
Modbus format UInt 0.000-10000 0-10000 0.000-10000
Process
unit Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43313
Process
Max Profibus slot/index 169/217
[325] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cf1
Long, 1=1 rpm,
Fieldbus format
1%
Modbus format EInt
Ratio=Linear
F(Value), Process Max [328]
This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers
Ratio=Quadratic you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by
scaling the process values. The process values are scaled by
Process linking them to known data in the AC drive. With F(Value),
Min Speed Proc Max the precise value at which the entered “Process
[324] Min Max
Speed Speed Max [525]” is valid can be entered.
[341] [343]
Fig. 108 Ratio NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in

menu “[321] Proc Source”, menus [322]- [328] are
hidden.
328 F(Val) PrMax

Default: Max
Min -1 Min
Max -2 Max
0.000-
0-10000 0.000-10000
10000

Communication information 11.5.3 Start/Stop settings [330]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43314 Submenu with all the functions for acceleration,
Profibus slot/index 169/218 deceleration, starting, stopping, etc.
Long, 1=1 rpm, Acceleration Time [331]
Fieldbus format
1% The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the
Modbus format EInt motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor speed.
Example NOTE: If the Acc Time is too short, the motor is

A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles. The required accelerated according to the Torque Limit. The actual
bottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 bottles/s. Process Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value
characteristics: set.
10 bottles/s = 150 rpm

100 bottles/s = 1500 rpm 331 Acc Time
The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the
Default: 10.0 s
conveyor belt.
Range: 0.50–3600 s
Set-up:
“Process Min [324]” = 10
“Process Max [325]” = 100
“Ratio [326]” = linear Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43101
“F(Value), ProcMin [327]” = 150 Profibus slot/index 169/5
“F(Value), ProcMax [328]” = 1500 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c1d
With this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked to Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
known values which results in an accurate control. Modbus format EInt
Fig. 110 shows the relationship between nominal motor

F(Value) speed/max speed and the acceleration time. The same is
PrMax 1500
[328] valid for the deceleration time.
rpm
Nominal
Linear 100% nMOT
Speed
F(Value
PrMin 150 Max Speed 80% nMOT
[327]
Bottles/s
10 100
Process Min [324] Process Max [325]
Fig. 109 8s 10s t

(06-F12)
Fig. 110 Acceleration time and maximum speed
Fig. 111 shows the settings of the acceleration and

deceleration times with respect to the nominal motor speed.

Acceleration Time Motor
rpm
Potentiometer [333]
It is possible to control the speed of the AC drive using the
Nom. Speed
motor potentiometer function. This function controls the
speed with separate up and down commands, over remote
signals. The MotPot function has separate ramps settings
which can be set in “Acc MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot
[334]”.
If the MotPot function is selected, this is the acceleration
Acc Time [331] Dec Time [332] time for the MotPot up command. The acceleration time is
(NG_06-F11)
defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer
value to increase from 0 rpm to nominal speed.
Fig. 111 Acceleration and deceleration times
333 Acc MotPot

Deceleration Time [332]
The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the Default: 16.0 s
motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 0 rpm. Range: 0.50–3600 s
332 Dec Time Communication information

Default: 10.0 s Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43103
Range: 0.50–3600 s
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c1f
Communication information Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43102 Modbus format EInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c1e
Deceleration Time Motor
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s Potentiometer [334]
Modbus format EInt If the MotPot function is selected, this is the deceleration
time for the “MotPot” down command. The deceleration
NOTE: If the Dec Time is too short and the generator time is defined as the time it takes for the motor
energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor, the potentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed to 0
motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage rpm.
limit. The actual deceleration time may be longer than
the value set.
334 Dec MotPot
Default: 16.0 s
Range: 0.50–3600 s
Modbus format EInt

Acceleration Time to Minimum Example:
“Motor speed [225]” 3000 rpm
Speed [335] Minimum speed [341] 600 rpm
If minimum speed, [341]>0 rpm, is used in an application, Maximum speed [343] 3000 rpm
the AC drive uses separate ramp times below this level. With Acceleration time [331] 10 seconds
“Acc<MinSpeed [335]” and “Dec<MinSpeed [336]” you can Deceleration time [332] 10 seconds
set the required ramp times. Short times can be used to Acc>Min speed[335] 40 seconds
prevent damage and excessive pump wear due too little Dec<Min speed[336] 40 seconds
lubrication at lower speeds. Longer times can be used to fill
up a system smoothly and prevent water hammer due to
rapidly exhausting air from the pipe system. A. The drive will start from 0 rpm and accelerate to
Minimum speed [341] = 600 rpm in 8 seconds
If a Minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be according to ramp time parameter
used to set the the acceleration time parameter [335] for Acc>Min speed [335].
speeds up to minimum speed at a run command. The ramp Calculated as following:
time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to 600 rpm is 20% of 3000 rpm => 20% of 40 s = 8 s.
accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor speed.
B. The acceleration continues from minimum speed level
600 rpm to maximum speed level 3000 rpm with
335 Acc<Min Spd acceleration rate according to ramp time Acceleration
Default: 10.0 s time [331].
Calculate by following:
Range: 0.50-3600 s
3000 - 600= 2400 rpm which is 80 % of 3000 rpm =>
acceleration tim is 80 % x 10 s = 8 s.
Communication information This means that the total acceleration time from 0 -
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43105 3000 rpm will take 8 + 8 = 16 seconds.
Deceleration Time from Minimum
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s Speed [336]
Modbus format EInt If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be
used to set the deceleration time from the minimum speed
to 0 rpm at a stop command. The ramp time is defined as
the time it takes for the motor to decelerate from the
rpm nominal motor speed to 0 rpm.
Motor Speed 3000 Max speed
[343]
[225] 336 Dec<Min Spd
Default: 10.0 s
Min speed Range: 0.50-3600 s

600
[341]
time
Fig. 112 Calculation example of accelerating times
(graphics not proportional). Modbus format EInt

Acceleration Ramp Type [337] Deceleration Ramp Type [338]
Sets the type of all the acceleration ramps in a parameter set. Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters in a
See Fig. 113. Depending on the acceleration and parameter set Fig. 114.
deceleration requirements for the application, the shape of
both the ramps can be selected. For applications where speed 338 Dec Rmp
changes need to be started and stopped smoothly, such as a
conveyor belt with materials that can drop following a quick Default: Linear
speed change, the ramp shape can be adapted to a S-shape Selection: Same as menu [337]
and prevent speed change shocks. For applications that are
not critical in this, the speed change can be fully linear over
the complete range.
337 Acc Rmp
Default: Linear Profinet IO index 19492
Linear 0 Linear acceleration ramp.
Modbus format UInt
S-Curve 1 S-shape acceleration ramp.
NOTE: For S-curve ramps the ramp times, [331] and

[332], defines the maximum acceleration and
deceleration rated, i.e. linear part of S-curve, just as
for the linear ramps. The S-curves are implemented
so that for a speed step below sync speed the ramps
are fully
S-shaped while for larger steps the middle part will S-curve
be linear. Therefore will a S-curve ramp from 0 –sync
speed take 2 x Time while a step from 0–2 x sync
speed will take 3 x Time (middle part 0.5sync speed –
Linear
1.5sync speed linear). Also valid for menu [338],
Deceleration ramp type.
t
Communication information Fig. 114 Shape of deceleration ramp
Start Mode [339]
Profinet IO index 19491 Sets the way of starting the motor when a run command is
Fieldbus format UInt given.
Modbus format UInt
339 Start Mode
Default: Fast (fixed)
rpm
The motor shaft starts rotating
Fast 0 immediately once the Run command is
given. The motor flux increases gradually.
Linear Communication information

S-curve
Modbus format UInt
Fig. 113 Shape of acceleration ramp

Spinstart [33A] 11.5.4 Mechanical brake control
The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is already The four brake-related menus [33C] to [33F] can be used to
rotating by catching the motor at the actual speed and
control it to the desired speed. If in an application, such as control mechanical brakes.
an exhausting fan, the motor shaft is already rotating due to Support is included for a Brake Acknowledge signal via a
external conditions, a smooth start of the application is
required to prevent excessive wear. With the spinstart=On, digital input. It is monitored using a brake fault time
the actual control of the motor is delayed due to detecting parameter. Additional output and trip/warning signals are
the actual speed and rotation direction, which depend on also included. The acknowledge signal is either connected
motor size, running conditions of the motor before the
Spinstart, inertia of the application, etc. Depending on the from the brake contactor or from a proximity switch on the
motor electrical time constant and the size of the motor, it brake.
can take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor is
caught.
Brake not released - Brake Fault trip
33A Spinstart During start and running the brake acknowledge signal is
compared to the actual brake output signal and if no
Default: Off acknowledge, i.e. brake not released, while brake output is
No spinstart. If the motor is already running high for the Brake Fault time [33H], then a Brake trip is
Off 0 the AC drive can trip or will start with high generated.
current.
Spinstart will allow the start of a running
motor without tripping or high inrush
Brake not engaged - Brake Warning
On 1 currents. If encoder feedback is used, both and continued operation (keep
encoder speed and current signals are used
to perform spinstart function. torque)
Only encoder speed used for detecting The brake acknowledge signal is compared to the actual
rotating machine, i.e. no rotating machine brake output signal at stop. If acknowledge is still active, i.e.
Encoder 2
detection via initial motor current. brake not engaged, while brake output is low for the Brake
Note: Only active if encoder is present. If no Engage time [33E] then a Brake warning is generated and
Encoder, functionality is equal to selection
the torque is kept, i.e. prolonging normal brake engage
Off.
mode, until brake closes or an emergency action is needed
by the operator, such as setting down the load.
Profibus slot/index 169/14 Brake Release Time [33C]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c26 The Brake Release Time sets the time the AC drive delays
Profinet IO index 19494 before ramping up to whatever final reference value is
Fieldbus format UInt selected. During this time a predefined speed can be
Modbus format UInt generated to hold the load where after the mechanical brake
finally releases. This speed can be selected at Release Speed,
[33D]. Immediate after the brake release time expiration the
Stop Mode [33B] brake lift signal is set. The user can set a digital output or
When the AC drive is stopped, different methods to come to relay to the function Brake. This output or relay can control
a standstill can be selected in order to optimize the stop and
prevent unnecessary wear, like water hammer. Stop Mode the mechanical brake.
sets the way of stopping the motor when a Stop command is
given. 33C Brk Release
Default: 0.00 s
33B Stop Mode
Range: 0.00–3.00 s
Default: Decel
The motor decelerates to 0 rpm according Communication information
Decel 0
to the set deceleration time.
Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm. Profibus slot/index 169/16
Communication information Profinet IO index 19496
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43111 Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s
Profibus slot/index 169/15 Modbus format EInt
Profinet IO index 19495 Fig. 115 shows the relation between the four Brake
Fieldbus format UInt functions.
Modbus format UInt

• Brake Release Time [33C]
• Release Speed [33D]
• Brake Engage Time [33E]
• Brake Wait Time [33F]
The correct time setting depends on the maximum load and
the properties of the mechanical brake. During the brake
release time it is possible to apply extra holding torque by
setting a release speed reference with the function release
speed [33D].
Brake release Brake wait Brake engage

time [33C] time [33F] time [33E]
Start
Release Speed [33D]
Open
Mechanical
Brake Closed
Brake Relay On
Output
Off
Action must take place within
these time intervals
Fig. 115 Brake Output functions
NOTE: This function is designed to operate a mechanical brake via the digital outputs or relays (set to brake function)
controlling a mechanical brake.

Release Speed [33D] Communication information
The release speed only operates with the brake function: Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43115
brake release [33C]. The release speed is the initial speed Profibus slot/index 169/19
reference during the brake release time. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c2b
33D Release Spd
Modbus format EInt
Default: 0 rpm
Range: - 4x Sync. Speed to 4x Sync.
Vector Brake [33G]
4xmotor sync speed, 1500 rpm for 1470 Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in the
Depend on:
rpm motor. motor.
Communication information 33G Vector Brake

Default: Off
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c29 Vector brake switched off. AC drive brakes
Off 0
Profinet IO index 19497 normal with voltage limit on the DC link.
Fieldbus format Int, 1=1 rpm Maximum AC drive current (ICL) is available
Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm On 1
for braking.
Brake Engage Time [33E] Communication information

The brake engage time is the time the load is held while the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43116
mechanical brake engages. It is also used to get a firm stop Profibus slot/index 169/20
when transmissions, etc. cause “whiplash” effects. In other EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c2c
words, it compensates for the time it takes to engage a Profinet IO index 19500
mechanical brake. Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
33E Brk Engage

Default: 0.00 s Brake Fault trip time [33H]
The “Brake Fault trip time” for “Brake not released”
Range: 0.00–3.00 s
function is specified in this menu.
33H Brk Fault
Profibus slot/index 169/18 Default: 1.00s
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c2a
Profinet IO index 19498 Range 0.00 - 5.00s
Modbus format EInt Communication information
Wait Before Brake Time [33F]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c2d
The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open and to Profinet IO index 19501
hold the load, either in order to be able to speed up Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01s
immediately, or to stop and engage the brake. Modbus format EInt
33F Brk Wait Note: The Brake Fault trip time should be set to
Default: 0.00 s longer time than the Brake release time[33C].
Range: 0.00–30.0 s
The “Brake not engaged” warning is using the setting of
parameter “Brake Engaged time [33E]”.
Fig. 116 shows principle of brake operation for fault during
run (left) and during stop (right).

Release torque [33I] Note! Function is deactivated if set to 0%.
The Brake Release Time [33C] sets the time the AC drive
delays before ramping up to whatever final speed reference
Note! Release Torque [33I] has priority over torque
value is selected, to allow the brake to be fully opened.
reference initialization by Release Speed [33D].
During this time a holding torque to prevent roll-back of the
load can be activated. The parameter Release Torque [33I] is
used for this purpose.
The release torque initiates the torque reference from the
speed controller during the Brake Release Time [33C]. The
release torque defines a minimum level of release (holding)
torque. The set release torque is internally overruled if the
actual required holding torque measured at the previous
closing of brake is higher.
The release torque is set with sign in order to define the
holding torque direction.
33I Release Trq
Default: 0%
Range -400% to 400%
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%
Modbus format EInt
Brake Brake
release time release time Brake wait Brake engage
33C 33C time time
33F 33E
Start
Running
*
Torque
Speed>0
Brake relay
Brake acknowledge
Brake Trip
<33H 33H <33H
Brake warning
**
During run Brake Fault trip time During stop
* Memorized load torque level, if function activated with parameter [33I] Release Torque.
** Time for operator to set down the load.
Fig. 116 Principle of Brake operation for fault during run and during stop

Start Vector [33K] 11.5.5 Speed [340]
Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds,
Select the voltage vector applied at start. The start vector is such as Min/Max speeds, Jog speeds, Skip speeds.
normally in the direction of the U-phase. It is also possible
to sequentially select different start vectors each start. This
can be advantageous as it distributes the wear more evenly Minimum Speed [341]
between different IGBTs. In particular if DC-start is used. Sets the minimum speed. The minimum speed will operate
The start vector may also be selected based on the encoder as an absolute lower limit. Used to ensure the motor does
position (when applicable). not run below a certain speed and to maintain a certain
performance.
33K Start Vector
341 Min Speed
Default: 0
Default: 0 rpm
Normal (U) 0 U-phase
Range: 0 - Max Speed
Sequence 1 Sequentially selct different vectors
Dependent
Encoder 2 Based on encoder position Set/View ref [310]
on:
NOTE: A lower speed value than the set minimum
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43119 speed can be shown in the display due to motor slip.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c2f
Modbus format UInt
Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm
Stop/Sleep when less than

Minimum Speed [342]
With this function it is possible to put the AC drive in “sleep
mode” when it is running at minimum speed for the length
of time set in menu “Stp<MinSpd [342]”. The AC drive will
go into sleep mode after programmed time.
When the reference signal or PID Process controller output
value (if PID Process controller is used) raises the required
speed value above the min speed value, the AC drive will
automatically wake up and ramp up to the required speed.
Speed
[342]
Min
speed
[341]
= Speed + Reference Time
= Speed
= Reference
Fig. 117

If you want to use this function when having “process Communication information
reference” signal via an analogue input, you need to make Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43123
sure that the concerning analogue input is set up correct, Profibus slot/index 169/27
meaning that AnIn Advanced parameter "AnIn1 FcMin EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c33
[5134]" should be set from "Min" (=default) to Profinet IO index 19507
"User defined" and “AnIn1 VaMin[5135]” set to a value less Fieldbus format Int, 1=1 rpm
than “Min Speed [341]” to make it possible that the Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm
analogue input reference can go below the "Min Speed" level
to activate the “Sleep mode”. This applies when PID Process
controller is not used. NOTE: It is not possible to set the maximum speed
lower than the minimum speed.
NOTE: If [381] PID Process controller is used, then

the PID sleep functionality [386] - [389] is Note: Maximum speed [343] has priority over Min
recommended instead of [342]. See further page 151. Speed [341], i.e. if [343] is set below [341] then the
drive will run at [343] Max Speed with acceleration
times given by [335] and [336] respectively.
NOTE: Menu [386] has higher priority than menu
[342].
Skip Speed 1 Low [344]
342 Stp<MinSpd Within the Skip Speed range High to Low, the speed cannot
be constant in order to avoid mechanical resonance in the
Default: Off
AC drive system.
Off 0 Off
When Skip Speed Low ≤ Ref Speed ≤ Skip Speed High, then
1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s Output Speed=Skip Speed HI during deceleration and
Output Speed=Skip Speed LO during acceleration. Fig. 118
Communication information shows the function of skip speed hi and low.
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43122 Between Skip Speed HI and LO, the speed changes with the
Profibus slot/index 169/26 set acceleration and deceleration times. Skipspd1 LO sets
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c32 the lower value for the 1st skip range.
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s 344 SkipSpd 1 Lo
Modbus format EInt
Default: 0 rpm
Range: 0 - 4 x Motor Sync Speed
Maximum Speed [343]
Sets the maximum speed. The maximum speed will operate Communication information
as an absolute maximum limit. This parameter is used to
prevent damage due to high speed.
The synchronous speed (Sync-spd) is determined by the
parameter motor speed [225].
343 Max Speed Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm
Default: Sync Speed
Synchronous speed, i.e. no load
Sync Speed 0
speed, at nominal frequency.
Min Speed - 4 x Motor Sync
1-24000rpm 1- 24000
Speed

Skip Speed 2 Low [346]
n
The same function as menu [344] for the 2nd skip range.
346 SkipSpd 2 Lo
Default: 0 rpm
Skip Speed HI Range: 0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed
Skip Speed Communication information

LO
Speed Reference Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm
(NG_06-F17)
Fig. 118 Skip Speed Skip Speed 2 High [347]

The same function as menu [345] for the 2nd skip range.
NOTE: The two Skip Speed ranges may be
overlapped.
347 SkipSpd 2 Hi
Default: 0 rpm
Skip Speed 1 High [345]
Range: 0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed
Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip range.
345 SkipSpd 1 Hi
Default: 0 rpm Profibus slot/index 169/31
Range: 0 – 4 x Sync Speed EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c37

Jog Speed [348] 11.5.6 Torques [350]
The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digital Menu with all parameters for torque settings.
inputs. The digital input must be set to the Jog function
[520]. The Jog command/function will automatically
generate a run command as long as the Jog command/ Maximum Torque [351]
function is active. This is valid independent of settings in Sets the maximum motor torque (according to menu group
menu [215]. The rotation is determined by the polarity of “Motor Data [220]”). This Maximum Torque operates as an
the set Jog Speed. upper torque limit. A Speed Reference is always necessary to
run the motor.
Example
If Jog Speed = -10, this will give a Run Left command at P MOT ( kw )x9550
T MOT ( Nm ) = -----------------------------------------
- = 100%
10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands. Fig. 119 n MOT ( rpm )
shows the function of the Jog command/function.
351 Max Torque
348 Jog Speed
Default: 120% calculated from the motor data
Default: 50 rpm
Range: 0–400%
-4 x motor sync speed to +4 x motor sync
Range:
speed Communication information
Defined motor sync speed. Max = 400%, Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43141
Dependent
normally max=AC drive Imax/motor Inom x Profibus slot/index 169/45
on:
100%.
Communication information Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43128 Modbus format EInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c38 NOTE: The Max Torque parameter will limit the
Profinet IO index 19512 maxmum output current of the AC drive following the
Fieldbus format Int, 1=1 rpm relation: 100% Tmot corresponds to 100% Imot.
Modbus format Int, 1=1 rpm The maximum possible setting for parameter 351 is
limited by Inom/Imot x 120%, but not higher than
400%.
f
NOTE: The motor temperature increases very quickly

Jog due to extensive power losses.
Freq
IxR Compensation [352]

t
This function compensates for the drop in voltage over
different resistances such as (very) long motor cables, chokes
Jog and motor stator by increasing the output voltage at a
com- constant frequency. IxR Compensation is most important at
mand
low frequencies and is used to obtain a higher starting
t
torque. The maximum voltage increase is 25% of the
(NG_06-F18) nominal output voltage. See Fig. 120.
Selecting “Automatic” will use the optimal value according
Fig. 119 Jog command to the internal model of motor. “User-Defined” can be
selected when the start conditions of the application do not
change and a high starting torque is always required. A fixed
IxR Compensation value can be set in the menu [353].
352 IxR Comp

Default: Off
Off 0 Function disabled
Automatic 1 Automatic compensation
User Defined 2 User defined value in percent.

Communication information Flux Optimization [354]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43142 Asynchronous motors
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c46 Flux Optimization for asynchronous motors reduces the
Profinet IO index 19526 energy consumption and the motor noise, at low or no load
Fieldbus format UInt conditions. Flux Optimization automatically decreases the
Modbus format UInt V/Hz ratio, depending on the actual load of the motor when
the process is in a steady state. Fig. 121 shows the area
within which the Flux Optimization is active.
U Permanent magnet synchronous and
%
100
synchronous reluctance motors
Flux optimization for permanent magnet synchronous
motors and synchronous reluctance motors adjusts the
IxR Comp=25% V/Hz ratio, to either minimize the current or by predicting a
suitable level based on the torque (and speed). Note that
IxR compensation is needed for synchronous motors to get a
good start, also when flux optimization is activated.
IxR Com=0%
25 354 Flux optim

Default: Off
Off 0 Function disabled
f
10 20 30 40 50 Hz On(lmin) 1 Flux controlled to minimize current
Fig. 120 IxR Comp at Linear V/Hz curve On 2 Flux adjusted based on the torque
IxR Comp_user [353]
Only visible if User-Defined is selected in previous menu.
353 IxR CompUsr Profinet IO index 19528
Default: 0.0% Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Range: 0-25% x UNOM (0.1% of resolution)
Communication information U
%
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43143 100

Fieldbus format Long, 1= 0.1 %
Flux optimizing
Modbus format EInt area
NOTE: A too high level of IxR Compensation could

cause motor saturation. This can cause a “Power f
50 Hz
Fault” trip. The effect of IxR Compensation is
stronger with higher power motors. Fig. 121 Flux Optimizing
NOTE: The motor may be overheated at low speed. NOTE: Flux optimization works best at stable
Therefore it is important that the Motor I2t Current situations in slow changing processes.
[232] is set correctly.

Maximum power [355] 11.5.7 Preset References [360]
Sets maximum power. Can be used for limiting motor
power in field weakening operation. This function operates Motor Potentiometer [361]
as an upper power limit and internally limits the parameter Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer function. See
“Max Torque [351]” according to : the parameter “DigIn1 [521]” for the selection of the motor
Tlimit = Plimit[%] / (Actual Speed / Sync Speed) potentiometer function.
355 Max Power 361 Motor Pot

Default: Off Default: Non Volatile
Off 0 Off. No power limit After a stop, trip or power down, the AC
Volatile 0 drive will start always from zero speed (or
1 - 400 1 - 400 1 - 400% of motor nominal power minimum speed, if selected).
Non Volatile. After a stop, trip or power
NOTE: The maximum possible setting for parameter down of the AC drive, the reference value
at the moment of the stop will be
[355] is limited by INOM/IMOT x 120%, but not higher Non volatile 1
memorized. After a new start command
than 400%. the output speed will resume to this
saved value.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c49 Profibus slot/index 169/35
Profinet IO index 19529 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c3b
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% Profinet IO index 19515
Modbus format EInt Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Motpot
UP
t
Motpot
DOWN
Fig. 122 MotPot function
Preset Ref 1 [362] to Preset Ref 7

[368]
Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs. Preset
speeds are activated by the digital inputs. The digital inputs
must be set to the function Pres. Ref 1, Pres. Ref 2 or Pres.
Ref 4.
Depending on the number of digital inputs used, up to 7
preset speeds can be activated per parameter set. Using all
the parameter sets, up to 28 preset speeds are possible.

Keyboard reference mode [369]
This parameter sets how the reference value [310] is edited.
362 Preset Ref 1
Default: Speed, 0 rpm 369 Key Ref Mode
Dependent Process Source [321] and Process Unit Default: MotPot
on: [322]
The reference value is edited as a normal
Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] parameter (the new reference value is
Normal 0 activated when Enter is pressed after the
Torque mode 0 - max torque [351]
value has been changed). The “Acc Time
Min according to menu [324] - max [331]” and “Dec Time [332]” are used.
Other modes
according to menu [325]
The reference value is edited using the
motor potentiometer function (the new
Communication information reference value is activated directly when
MotPot 1
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43132–43138 the key + or - is pressed). The “Acc
Profibus slot/index 169/36–169/42
MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]”
are used.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c3c - 4c42
Profinet IO index 19516 - 19522 This selection makes it possible to
Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1 update the reference in “[310]” directly
%, 1°C or from the [100]-menu. Pressing +/- in the
Fieldbus format 0.001 if Process [100]-menu changes the menu to [310]
Value/Process Ref MotPot+ 2
and there you can continue to press +/-
using a [322] unit to update the reference. When no key
Modbus format EInt has been pressed for a second the menu
returns to [100] automatically.
The same settings are valid for the menus:
“[363] Preset Ref 2”, with default 250 rpm Communication information
“[364] Preset Ref 3”, with default 500 rpm Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43139
“[365] Preset Ref 4”, with default 750 rpm Profibus slot/index 169/43
“[366] Preset Ref 5”, with default 1000 rpm EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c43
“[367] Preset Ref 6”, with default 1250 rpm
“[368] Preset Ref 7”, with default 1500 rpm
The selection of the presets is as in Table 35. Modbus format UInt
Table 35
NOTE: When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot, the
Preset Preset Preset reference value ramp times are according to the “Acc
Output Speed
Ctrl3 Ctrl2 Ctrl1 MotPot [333]” and “Dec MotPot [334]” settings.
Actual speed ramp will be limited according to “Acc
0 0 0 Analogue reference Time [331]” and “Dec Time [332]”.
1)
0 0 1 Preset Ref 1
0 11) 0 Preset Ref 2
0 1 1 Preset Ref 3
1)
1 0 0 Preset Ref 4
1 0 1 Preset Ref 5
1 1 0 Preset Ref 6
1 1 1 Preset Ref 7
1)
= selected if only one preset reference is active
1 = active input
0 = non active input
NOTE: If only Preset Ctrl3 is active, then the Preset

Ref 4 can be selected. If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are
active, then the Preset Ref 2, 4 and 6 can be selected.

11.5.8 PID Process Control [380]
The PID controller is used to control an external process via Process
a feedback signal. The reference value can be set via analogue reference
Process AC drive M
+
input AnIn1, at the Control Panel [310] by using a Preset -
PID
Process
Reference, or via serial communication. The feedback signal feedback
(actual value) must be connected to an analogue input that
is set to the function Process Value.
Process
Process PID Control [381] 06-F95
This function enables the PID controller and defines the Fig. 123 Closed loop PID control
response to a changed feedback signal.
PID I Time [384]
381 PID Control Setting the integration time for the PID controller.
Default: Off
Off 0 PID control deactivated. 384 PID I Time
The speed increases when the feedback Default: 1.00 s
On 1 value decreases. PID settings according to Range: 0.01–300 s
menus [381] to [385].
The speed decreases when the feedback Communication information
Invert 2 value decreases. PID settings according to
menus [383] to [385].
Fieldbus format UInt Process PID D Time [385]
Modbus format UInt Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller.
PID P Gain [383] 385 PID D Time

Setting the P gain for the PID controller. Default: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00–30 s
383 PID P Gain
Default: 1.0 Communication information
Range: 0.0–30.0
Modbus format EInt

PID sleep functionality PID Activation Margin [387]
This function is controlled via a wait delay and a separate The PID activation (wake-up) margin is related to the
wake-up margin condition. With this function it is possible process reference and sets the limit when the AC drive
to put the AC drive in “sleep mode” when the process value should wake-up/start again.
is at it’s set point and the motor is running at minimum
speed for the length of the time set in [386]. By going into
sleep mode, the by the application consumed energy is
387 PID Act Marg
reduced to a minimum. When the process feedback value Default: 0
goes below the set margin on the process reference as set in
[387], the AC drive will wake up automatically and normal Range: 0 –10000 in Process unit
PID operation continues, see examples.
NOTE: When the drive is in Sleep mode, this is Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43372
indicated with “slp” in the lower left corner of the Profibus slot/index 170/21
display. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d2c
Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1
PID sleep when less than minimum %, 1°C or
speed [386] Value/Process Ref
If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speed using a [322] unit
for given delay time, the AC drive will go to sleep. Modbus format EInt
386 PID<MinSpd NOTE: The margin is always a positive value.

Default: Off
Range: Off, 0.01 –3600 s Example 1 PID control = normal (flow or
pressure control)
[321] = F (AnIn)
Communication information [322] = Bar
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43371 [310] = 20 Bar
Profibus slot/index 170/20 [342] = 2 s (inactive since [386] is activated and have higher
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d2b priority)
Profinet IO index 19755 [381]= On
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 s [386] = 10 s
Modbus format EInt [387] = 1 Bar
The AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) is
NOTE: Menu [386] has higher priority than menu below or equal to Min Speed for 10 seconds. The AC drive
[342]. will activate/wake up when the “Process value” goes below
the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process
reference, i.e. goes below (20-1) Bar. See Fig. 124.
[711] Process Value

[310] Process Ref
[387]
Activate/Wake up
[712] Speed
[386]
Stop/Sleep
[341] Min Speed
Fig. 124 PID Stop/sleep with normal PID

Example 2 PID control = inverted (tank PID Steady State Margin [389]
level control) PID steady state margin defines a margin band around the
[321] = F (AnIn) reference that defines “steady state operation”. During the
[322] = m
steady state test the PID operation is overruled and the AC
[310] = 7 m
[342] = 2 s (inactive since [386] is activated and have higher drive is decreasing the speed as long as the PID error is
priority) within the steady state margin. If the PID error goes outside
[381]= Inverted the steady state margin the test failed and normal PID
[386] = 30 s operation continues, see example.
[387] = 1 m
The AC drive will stop/sleep when the speed (PID output) is 389 PID Stdy Mar
below or equal to Min Speed for 30 seconds. The AC drive
will activate/wake up when the “Process value” goes above Default: 0
the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process Range: 0–10000 in process unit
reference, i.e. goes above (7+1) m. See Fig. 125.
[711] Process Value
Activate/Wake up Profibus slot/index 170/23
[387] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d2e
[310] Process Ref Profinet IO index 19758
[712] Speed Long, 1= 1 rpm, 1 %,
[386]
Stop/Sleep 1°C or
[341] Min Speed Fieldbus format 0.001 if Process Value/
Process Ref using a [322]
unit
Modbus format EInt
Fig. 125 PID Stop/sleep with inverted PID
Example: The PID Steady Test starts when the process value
PID Steady State Test [388] [711] is within the margin and Steady State Test Wait Delay
has expired. The PID output will decrease speed with a step
In application situations where the feedback can become
value which corresponds to the margin as long as the Process
independent of the motor speed, this PID Steady Test
value [711] stays within steady state margin. When Min
function can be used to overrule the PID operation and
Speed [341] is reached the steady state test was successful
force the AC drive to go in sleep mode i.e. the AC drive
and stop/sleep is commanded if PID sleep function
automatically reduces the output speed while at the same
[386]and [387] is activated. If the Process value [711] goes
time ensures the process value.
outside the set steady state margins then the test failed and
Example: pressure controlled pump systems with low/no normal PID operation will continue, see Fig. 126.
flow operation and where the process pressure has become
independent of the pump speed, e.g. due to slowly closed
valves. By going into Sleep mode, heating of the pump and
motor will be avoided and no energy is spilled.
PID Steady state test delay.
NOTE: It is important that the system has reached a

stable situation before the Steady State Test is
initiated.
388 PID Stdy Tst

Default: Off
Range: Off, 0.01–3600 s
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d2d
Modbus format EInt

[711] Process Value
[389]
[310] Process Ref
[389]
time
[387] [388]
Start steady Stop steady

state test state test
[712] Speed
Normal PID
Normal PID
Steady state
test Stop/Sleep
[341] Min Speed [386] PID<Min Spd
Fig. 126 Steady state test

11.5.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] Communication information
The Pump Control functions are in menu [390]. The Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43162
function is used to control a number of drives (pumps, fans, Profibus slot/index 169/66
etc.) of which one is always driven by the AC drive. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c5a
Modbus format UInt
Pump enable [391]
This function will enable the pump control to set all relevant
pump control functions. Select Drive [393]
Sets the main operation of the pump system. 'Sequence' and
391 Pump enable 'Runtime' are Fixed MASTER operation. 'All' means
Alternating MASTER operation.
Default: Off
Off 0 Pump control is switched off. 393 Select Drive
Pump control is on: Default: Sequence
- Pump control parameters [392] to [39G]
appear and are activated according to Fixed MASTER operation:
On 1 - The additional drives will be selected in
default settings.
- View functions [39H] to [39M] are added Sequence 0 sequence, i.e. first pump 1 then pump 2
in the menu structure. etc.
- A maximum of 7 drives can be used.
Communication information Fixed MASTER operation:

- The additional drives will be selected
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43161 depending on the Run Time. So the drive
Profibus slot/index 169/65 with the lowest Run Time will be selected
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c59 first. The Run Time is monitored in menus
Run Time 1
Profinet IO index 19545 [39H] to [39M] in sequence. For each drive
Fieldbus format UInt the Run Time can be reset.
Modbus format UInt - When drives are stopped, the drive with
the longest Run Time will be stopped first.
- Maximum 7 drives can be used.
Number of Drives [392] Alternating MASTER operation:
Sets the total number of drives which are used, including the - When the drive is powered up, one drive
Master AC drive. The setting here depends on the parameter is selected as the Master drive. The
“Select Drive [393]”. After the number of drives is chosen it selection criteria depends on the Change
is important to set the relays for the pump control. If the Condition [394]. The drive will be selected
digital inputs are also used for status feedback, these must be according to the Run Time. So the drive
All 2
set for the pump control according to; Pump 1 OK– Pump6 with the
lowest Run Time will be selected first. The
OK in menu [520].
Run Time is monitored in menus [39H] to
[39M] in sequence. For each drive the Run
392 No of Drives Time can be reset.
- A maximum of 6 drives can be used.
Default: 2
1-3 Number of drives if I/O Board is not used.
Number of drives if 'Alternating MASTER' is Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43163
1-6 used, see Select Drive [393]. (I/O Board is Profibus slot/index 169/67
used.)
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c5b
Number of drives if 'Fixed MASTER' is Profinet IO index 19547
1-7 used, see Select Drive [393]. Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1
(I/O Board is used.) Modbus format UInt
NOTE: Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or NOTE: This menu will NOT be active if only one drive
Master Pump. Used digital inputs must be defined as is selected.
Pump Feedback.

Change Condition [394] Change Timer [395]
This parameter determines the criteria for changing the When the time set here is elapsed, the master drive will be
master. This menu only appears if Alternating MASTER changed. This function is only active if “Select Drive
operation is selected. The elapsed run time of each drive is [393]”=All and “Change Cond [394]”= Timer/ Both.
monitored. The elapsed run time always determines which
drive will be the 'new' master drive. 395 Change Timer
This function is only active if the parameter “Select Drive Default: 50 h
[393]”= “All” is used.
Range: 1-3000 h
394 Change Cond Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43165
Default: Both Profibus slot/index 169/69
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c5d
The Runtime of the master drive
determines when a master drive has to be
changed. The change will only take place Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h
after a: Modbus format UInt, 1=1 h
Stop 0
- Power Up
- Stop
- Standby condition Drives on Change [396]
- Trip condition. If a master drive is changed according to the timer function
The master drive will be changed if the (Change Condition=Timer/Both [394]), it is possible to
timer setting in Change Timer [395] has leave additional pumps running during the change
elapsed. The change will take place operation. With this function the change operation will be
immediately. So during operation the as smooth as possible. The maximum number to be
additional pumps will be stopped programmed in this menu depends on the number of
Timer 1 temporarily, the 'new' master will be additional drives.
selected according to the Run Time and
the additional pumps will be started again. Example:
It is possible to leave 2 pumps running If the number of drives is set to 6, the maximum value will
during the change operation. This can be be 4. This function is only active if “Select Drive [393]”=All.
set with Drives on Change [396].
The master drive will be changed if the 396 Drives on Ch
timer setting in Change Timer [395] has
elapsed. The 'new' master will be selected Default: 0
according to the elapsed Run Time. The Range: 0 to (the number of drives - 2)
Both 2 change will only take place after a:
- Power Up
- Stop Communication information
- Standby condition. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43166
- Trip condition. Profibus slot/index 169/70
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43164 Fieldbus format UInt
Profibus slot/index 169/68 Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
NOTE: If the Status feedback inputs (DigIn 9 to Digin

14) are used, the master drive will be changed
immediately if the feedback generates an 'Error'.

Upper Band [397] Lower Band [398]
If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band, If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower band
an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is set an additional drive will be stopped after a delay time. This
in “Start delay [399]”. delay time is set in the parameter “Stop Delay [39A]”.
397 Upper Band 398 Lower Band

Default: 10% Default: 10%
Range: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed Range: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c5f EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c60
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%
Example: Example:
Max Speed = 1500 rpm Max Speed = 1500 rpm
Min Speed = 300 rpm Min Speed = 300 rpm
Upper Band = 10% Lower Band = 10%
Start delay will be activated: Stop delay will be activated:
Range = Max Speed to Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm Range = Max Speed - Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 rpm
10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm
Start level = 1500–120 = 1380 rpm Start level = 300 + 120 = 420 rpm
Speed next pump starts Speed

Max
Upper band Max
“top” pump stops
Min Lower band

Min
Flow/Pressure
Start Delay [399] Flow/Pressure
(NG_50-PC-12_1)
Stop Delay [39A]
(NG_50-PC-13_1)
Fig. 127 Upper band
Fig. 128 Lower band

Start Delay [399] Upper Band Limit [39B]
This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump is If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit, the
started. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of next pump is started immediately without delay. If a start
pumps. delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is between
0%, equalling max speed, and the set percentage for the
399 Start Delay “UpperBand [397]”.
Default: 0s
39B Upp Band Lim
Range: 0-999 s
Default: 0%
Communication information 0 to Upper Band level. 0% (=max speed)

Range:
means that the Limit function is switched off.
Profinet IO index 19553 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43171
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s Profibus slot/index 169/75
Modbus format EInt EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c63
Stop Delay [39A] Modbus format EInt
This delay time must have elapsed before the 'top' pump is
stopped. A delay time prevents the nervous switching of
pumps. Speed next pump starts
immediately
39A Stop Delay Max
Upper band
Default: 0s limit [39B]
Upper band
Range: 0-999 s
Min
Flow/Pressure
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c62 Start Delay [399]
Profinet IO index 19554 (NG_50-PC-14_2)
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s Fig. 129 Upper band limit

Modbus format EInt

Lower Band Limit [39C] Communication information
If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit, the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43173
'top' pump is stopped immediately without delay. If a stop Profibus slot/index 169/77
delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range is from 0%, EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c65
equalling min speed, to the set percentage for the “Lower Profinet IO index 19557
Band [398]”. Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Modbus format EInt
39C Low Band Lim

Default: 0% Transition Speed Start [39E]
0 to Lower Band level. 0% (=min speed) The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow/
Range: pressure overshoot when adding another pump. When an
means that he Limit function is switched off.
additional pump needs to be switched on, the master pump
will slow down to the set transition speed start value, before
the additional pump is started. The setting depends on the
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43172 dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives.
The transition speed is best set by trial and error.
Profinet IO index 19556 In general:
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% • If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics,
Modbus format EInt then a higher transition speed should be used.
• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics,
then a lower transition speed should be used.
Speed
Max
“top” pump stops 39E TransS Start

immediately
Default: 60%
Range: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed
Lower band
Lower band limit [39C]
Min
Flow/Pressure Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43174
Stop Delay [39A] Profibus slot/index 169/78
(NG_50-PC-15_2)
Fig. 130 Lower band limit
Modbus format EInt
Settle Time Start [39D]
The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump is NOTE: If set to 100 %, the transition speed, when
switched on before the pump control continues. If an starting pumps, is ignored and no speed adaption is
additional pump is started D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/ made.
Δ , the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' I.e. the slave pump is started directly and speed of
start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting the master pump is maintained.
and stopping of additional pumps.
During the Settle start: Example

• PID controller is off. Max Speed = 1500 rpm
Min Speed = 200 rpm
• The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a pump. TransS Start = 60%
When an additional pump is needed, the speed will be
39D Settle Start controlled down to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200
Default: 0s rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed is
reached, the additional pump with the lowest run time
Range: 0-999 s
hours will be switched on.

Transition Speed Stop [39G]
Switch on The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow/
Speed procedure starts
pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional pump.
The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master
Actual
Additional pump drive and the additional drives.
In general:
Trans • If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics,
then a higher transition speed should be used.
Master pump • If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics,
Min
then a lower transition speed should be used.
Flow/Pressure
Actual start
command of next 39G TransS Stop
pump (RELAY) (NG_50-PC-16_1) Default: 60%
Fig. 131 Transition speed start Range: 0-100% of total min speed to max speed
Flow/Pressure
Transition speed Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43176
decreases overshoot Profibus slot/index 169/80
Modbus format EInt
Time
NOTE: If set to 0 %, the transition speed when
Fig. 132 Effect of transition speed stopping pumps, is ignored and no speed adaption is
made.
I.e. the slave pump is stopped directly and speed of
Settle Time Stop [39F] the master pump is continued.
The settle stop allows the process to settle after a pump is
switched off before the pump control continues. If an
additional pump is stopped D.O.L. (Direct On Line) or Y/ Example
Δ , the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the 'rough' Max Speed = 1500 rpm
start/stop method. This could cause unnecessary starting Min Speed = 200 rpm
and stopping of additional pumps. TransS Start = 60%
When less additional pumps are needed, the speed will be
During the Settle stop: controlled up to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 200
• PID controller is off.
rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this speed is
• the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a pump reached, the additional pump with the highest run time
hours will be switched off.
39F Settle Stop
Speed
Default: 0s Actual shut down of pump
Range: 0–999 s Max

Master pump
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43175 Trans
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c67 Actual
Profinet IO index 19559 Min
Additional pump
Flow/Pressure
Modbus format EInt Switch off procedure starts
Fig. 133 Transition speed stop

Run Times 1-6 [39H] to [39M] Pump Status [39N]
39H Run Time 1 39N Pump 123456

Unit: h:mm:ss (hours:minutes:seconds) Indication Description
Range: 0:00:00–262143:59:59 Control, master pump, only when alternating
C
master is used
Communication information D Direct control
31051 : 31052 : 31053(hr:min:sec)
O Pump is off
31054 : 31055: 31056(hr:min:sec)
Modbus Instance no/ 31057 : 31058: 31059(hr:min:sec) E Pump error
DeviceNet no: 31060 : 31061: 31062(hr:min:sec)
31063 : 31064: 31065(hr:min:sec)
31066 : 31067: 31068(hr:min:sec) Communication information
121/195, 121/196, 121/197,
121/198, 121/199, 121/200,
121/201, 121/202, 121/203,
Profibus slot/index EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 242d
121/204, 121/205, 121/206,
121/207, 121/208, 121/209, Profinet IO index 1069
121/210, 121/211, 121/212 Fieldbus format UInt
241b : 241c : 241d Modbus format UInt
241e : 241f : 2420
EtherCAT and 2421 : 2422 : 2423
CANopeniindex (hex) 2424 : 2425 : 2426
2427 : 2428 : 2429
Number backup/reserve [39P]
242a : 242b : 242c Sets the number of pumps used for backup/reserve which in
1051:1052:1053 normal conditions can not be selected. This function can be
Profinet IO index
- 1068 used for increasing redundancy in the pump system by
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1h/m/s having pumps in reserve that can be activated when some
Modbus format EInt pumps indicate fault or are shut off for maintenance.
Reset Run Times 1-6 [39H1] to [39M1] 39P No of Backup

Default: 0
39H1 Rst Run Tm1
Range: 0-3
Default: No
No 0 Communication information
Yes 1 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43177
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c69
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 38–43, pump 1 -6
Modbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2026 - 202b
Modbus format UInt

11.6 Load Monitor and Ramp Alarm [413]
This function inhibits the (pre) alarm signals during
Process Protection [400] acceleration/deceleration of the motor to avoid false alarms.
11.6.1 Load Monitor [410] 413 Ramp Alarm

The monitor functions enable the AC drive to be used as a Default: Off
load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect machines
(Pre) alarms are inhibited during
and processes against mechanical overload and underload, Off 0
acceleration/deceleration.
e.g. a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming, belt failure
on a fan and a pump dry running. See explanation in (Pre) alarms active during acceleration/
On 1
Chapter 7.5 page 67. deceleration.
Alarm Select [411]
Selects the types of alarms that are active.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cfb
411 Alarm Select Profinet IO index 19707
Default: Off Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Off 0 No alarm functions active.
Min Alarm active. The alarm output
Min 1 Alarm Start Delay [414]
functions as an underload alarm.
Max Alarm active. The alarm output This parameter is used if, for example, you want to override
Max 2 an alarm during the start-up procedure.
functions as an overload alarm.
Both Max and Min alarm are active. The Sets the delay time after a run command, after which the
Max+Min 3 alarm outputs function as overload and alarm may be given.
underload alarms. • If Ramp Alarm=On. The start delay begins after a RUN
command.
Communication information • If Ramp Alarm=Off. The start delay begins after the
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43321 acceleration ramp.
414 Start Delay
Fieldbus format UInt Default: 2s
Modbus format UInt Range: 0-3600 s
Alarm Trip [412] Communication information

Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the AC drive. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43324
412 Alarm trip EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cfc
Default: Off Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 s
Selection: Same as in menu [411] Modbus format EInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cfa
Modbus format UInt
CG Drives & Automation,01-5325-01r5 161

Load Type [415] 415 Load Type
In this menu you select monitor type according to the load
Default: Basic
characteristic of your application. By selecting the required
monitor type, the overload and underload alarm function Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load
can be optimized according to the load characteristic. level over the full speed range. Can be
Basic 0
used in situations where the torque is
When the application has a constant load over the whole independent of the speed.
speed range, i.e. extruder or screw compressor, the load type
can be set to basic. This type uses a single value as a reference Uses the measured actual load
Load Curve 1 characteristic of the process over the
for the nominal load. This value is used for the complete
speed range.
speed range of the AC drive. The value can be set or
automatically measured. See Autoset Alarm [41A] and Load Curv R 2
Uses a relative load margin with a
“Normal Load [41B]” about setting the nominal load minimum margin set in menu [41D].
reference.
The Load Curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9
load values at 8 equal speed intervals. This curve is Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43325
populated by a test run with a real load. This can be used Profibus slot/index 169/229
with any smooth load curve including constant load. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cfd
The Load Curve R is a relative load curve in % of Load set
in the Load Curve . There is also a minimum margine set in
Modbus format UInt
menu “Minimum Absolute Margin [41D]”.
Load Max Alarm [416]

Max Alarm Max Alarm Margin [4161]
With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Alarm Margin
Basic
sets the band above the “Normal Load [41B]” menu that
Min Alarm does not generate an alarm. With load type Load Curve
[415] used, the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the
Load Curve [41C], that does not generate an alarm. The
Load curve
Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor
torque.
Speed In case of Load Curve R, the margin is percentage of Load
curve torque at the actual speed.
Fig. 134 Basic load type and Load curve
4161 MaxAlarmMar
Load
Default: 15%
Range: 0–400%
[41D] Min Abs Margine
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cfe
Modbus format Eint
Speed
Fig. 135 Load Curve R with Min ABS margin.

Max Alarm delay [4162] Max Pre Alarm delay [4172]
When the load level without interruption exceeds the alarm When the load level without interruption exceeds the alarm
level longer than set “Max Alarm delay” time, an alarm is level longer than set “Max PreAlarm delay” time, a warning
activated. is activated.
4162 MaxAlarmDel 4172 MaxPreAlDel

Default: 0.1 s Default: 0.1 s
Range: 0-90 s Range: 0–90 s

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d02 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d03
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 s
Max Pre Alarm [417] Min Pre Alarm [418]

Max Pre AlarmMargin [4171] Min Pre Alarm Margin [4181]
With load type Basic [415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm
sets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], menu that Margin sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], menu
does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load Curve, that does not generate a pre-alarm. With load type Load
[415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band above Curve, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin sets the band
the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a pre-alarm. under the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate a
The Max Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal pre-alarm. The Min Pre-Alarm Margin is a percentage of
motor torque. nominal motor torque.
In case of Load Curve R, the margin is percentage of Load In case of Load Curve R, the margin is percentage of Load
curve torque at the actual speed. curve torque at the actual speed.
4171 MaxPreAlMar 4181 MinPreAlMar

Default: 10% Default: 10%
Range: 0–400% Range: 0-400%

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cff EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d00
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%

Min Pre Alarm Response delay [4182] Min Alarm Response delay [4192]
When the load level without interruption is below the alarm When the load level without interruption is below the alarm
level longer than set “Min PreAlarm delay” time, a warning level longer than set “Min Alarm delay” time, an alarm is
is activated. activated.
4182 MinPreAlDel 4192 MinAlarmDel

Default: 0.1 s Default: 0.1 s
Range: 0-90 s Range: 0-90 s

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d04 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d05
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 s Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 s
Min Alarm [419] Autoset Alarm [41A]

The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal load
Min Alarm Margin [4191]
that is used as reference for the alarm levels. If the selected
With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Alarm Margin
“Load Type [415]” is Basic it copies the load the motor is
sets the band under the “Normal Load [41B]”, menu that
running with to the menu “Normal Load [41B]”. The
does not generate an alarm. With load type “Load Curve
motor must run on the speed that generates the load that
[415]”, used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the
needs to be recorded. If the selected “Load Type [415]” is
“Load Curve [41C]”, that does not generate an alarm. The
Load Curve it performs a test-run and populates the “Load
Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor
Curve [41C]” with the found load values.
torque.
In case of Load Curve R, the margin is percentage of Load
curve torque at the actual speed. WARNING!
When autoset does a test run the motor
and application/machine will ramp up to
4191 MinAlarmMar maximum speed.
Default: 15%
Range: 0-400% NOTE: The motor must be running for the Autoset
Alarm function to succeed. A not running motor
Communication information generates a “Failed!” message.
Profibus slot/index 169/233 41A AutoSet Alrm
Default: No
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% No 0
Modbus format EInt
Yes 1
Modbus format UInt

The default set levels for the (pre)alarms are: Communication information
43336%, 43337 rpm,
Max Alarm menu [4161] + [41B] 43338 %, 43339 rpm,
Overload 43340 %, 43341 rpm,
Max Pre Alarm menu [4171] + [41B] 43342 %, 43343 rpm,
Min Pre Alarm menu [41B] - [4181] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43344 %, 43345 rpm,
Underload 43346 %, 43347 rpm,
Min Alarm menu [41B] - [4191] 43348 %, 43349 rpm,
43350 %, 43351 rpm,
43352 %, 43353 rpm
These default set levels can be manually changed in menus 169/240, 169/242, 169/
[416] to [419]. After execution the message “Autoset OK!” is 244, 169/246, 169/248,
Profibus slot/index
displayed for 1s and the selection reverts to “No”. 169/250, 169/252, 169/
254, 170/1
4d08 %, 4d09 rpm,
Normal Load [41B] 4d0a %, 4d0b rpm,
4d0c %, 4d0d rpm,
Set the level of the normal load. The alarm or pre alarm will
4d0e %, 4d0f rpm,
be activated when the load is above/under normal load ± EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d10 %, 4d11 rpm,
margin. 4d12 %, 4d13 rpm,
4d14 %, 4d15 rpm,
4d16 %, 4d17 rpm,
41B Normal Load 4d18 %, 4d19 rpm
Default: 100% 19720 %, 19721 rpm,
19722 %, 19723 rpm,
Range: 0-400% of max torque 19724 %, 19725 rpm,
19726 %, 19727 rpm,
Profinet IO index 19728 %, 19729 rpm,
NOTE: 100% Torque means: INOM= IMOT. The 19730 %, 19731 rpm,
maximum depends on the motor current and AC drive 19732 %, 19733 rpm,
max current settings, but the absolute maximum 19734 %, 19735 rpm,
adjustment is 400%. 19736 %, 19738 rpm,
Long, 1= 1 %,
Fieldbus format
Int 1=1 rpm
Communication information Modbus format EInt
NOTE: The speed values depend on the Min- and
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d07 Max Speed values. they are read only and cannot be
Profinet IO index 19719 changed.
Modbus format EInt
Min-Max alarm tolerance band graph
Load Curve [41C] Min Speed Max Speed

The load curve function can be used with any smooth load 1
curve. The curve can be populated with a test-run or the
values can be entered or changed manually.
Load Curve 1-9 [41C1]-[41C9]

The measured load curve is based on 9 stored samples. The
0.5
curve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed,
the range in between is divided into 8 equal steps. The
measured values of each sample are displayed in [41C1] to
[41C9] and can be adapted manually. The value of the 1st
sampled value on the load curve is displayed. 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Speed
41C1 Load Curve1
Measured load samples
Default: 100% Min-max tolerance band
Range: 0–400% of max torque Max alarm limit
Min alarm limit
Fig. 136

Minimum Absolute Margin [41D] 11.6.2 Process Protection [420]
This menu is displayed when using “Load Curve R” Submenu with settings regarding protection functions for
Set absolute minimum margin of the Load Curve in % of the AC drive and the motor.
nominal motor torque.
Low Voltage Override [421]
41D MinAbsMarg
If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage
Default: 3% override function is enabled, the AC drive will automatically
Range: 0 - 31 % decrease the motor speed to keep control of the application
and prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltage
rises again. Therefore the rotating energy in the motor/load
Communication information is used to keep the DC link voltage level at the override level,
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43354 for as long as possible or until the motor comes to a
Profibus slot/index 170/3 standstill. This is dependent on the inertia of the motor/load
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d1a combination and the load of the motor at the time the dip
Profinet IO index 19738 occurs, see Fig. 137.
Fieldbus format Long, 1 = 1%
Modbus format EInt 421 Low Volt OR
Default: On
At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will
Off 0
protect.
At mains dip, AC drive ramps down until
On 1
voltage rises.
Modbus format UInt
DC link voltage
Override
level
Low Volt.
level
Speed
t
(06-F60new) t
Fig. 137 Low voltage override
NOTE: During the low voltage override the LED trip/

limit blinks.

Rotor locked [422] Overvolt control [424]
With the rotor locked function enabled, the AC drive will Used to switch off the overvoltage control function when
protect the motor and application when this is stalled whilst only braking by brake chopper and resistor is required. The
increasing the motor speed from standstill. This protection overvoltage control function, limits the braking torque so
will coast the motor to stop and indicate a fault when the that the DC link voltage level is controlled at a high, but
Torque Limit has been active at very low speed for more safe, level. This is achieved by limiting the actual
than 5 seconds. deceleration rate during stopping. In case of a defect at the
brake chopper or the brake resistor the AC drive will trip for
422 Rotor locked “Overvoltage” to avoid a fall of the load e.g. in crane
applications.
Default: Off
Off 0 No detection NOTE: Overvoltage control should not be activated if
AC drive will trip when locked rotor is brake chopper is used.
On 1
detected. Trip message “Locked Rotor”.
424 Over Volt Ctl

Default: On
Profibus slot/index 170/11 On 0 Overvoltage control activated
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d22 Off 1 Overvoltage control off
Fieldbus format UInt Communication information
Modbus format UInt
Motor lost [423] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d24
With the motor lost function enabled, the AC drive is able
to detect a fault in the motor circuit: motor, motor cable,
Modbus format UInt
thermal relay or output filter. Motor lost will cause a trip,
and the motor will coast to standstill, when a missing motor
phase is detected during a period of 500 ms. The detection
time during start is 10 ms.
423 Motor lost

Default: Off
Function switched off to be used if no
Off 0
motor or very small motor connected.
AC drive will trip when the motor is
Trip 1
disconnected. Trip message “Motor Lost”.
Test for disconnected motor will only be
Start 2
performed during start routine.
Modbus format UInt

11.7 I/Os and Virtual [515] AnIn2 Setup = 4-20 mA
[5164] AnIn2 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)
Connections [500] [5166] AnIn2 Function Max = User defined
Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs and [5167] AnIn2 Value Max = 300 rpm
outputs of the AC drive. [5168] AnIn2 Operation = Add+
Calculation:
11.7.1 Analogue Inputs [510] AnIn1 = (10-4) / (20-4) x (1500-0) + 0 = 562.5 rpm
Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs. AnIn2 = (5-4) / (20-4) x (300-0) + 0 = 18.75 rpm
The actual process reference will be:
AnIn1 Function [511] +562.5 + 18.75 = 581 rpm
Sets the function for Analogue input 1. Scale and range are
defined by AnIn1 Advanced settings [513].
Analogue Input Selection via Digital
Inputs:
When two different external Reference signals are used,
511 AnIn1 Fc e.g. 4-20mA signal from control centre and a 0-10 V locally
Default: Process Ref mounted potentiometer, it is possible to switch between
Off 0 Input is not active these two different analogue input signals via a Digital Input
set to “AnIn Select”.
Max Speed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit.
AnIn1 is 4-20 mA
Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit.
AnIn2 is 0-10 V
The input value equals the actual process
value (feedback) and is compared to the DigIn3 is controlling the AnIn selection; HIGH is 4-20 mA,
Process Val 3 reference signal (set point) by the PID LOW is 0-10 V
controller, or can be used to display and “[511] AnIn1 Fc” = Process Ref;
view the actual process value. set AnIn1 as reference signal input
Reference value is set for control in
Process “[512] AnIn1 Setup” = 4-20mA;
4 process units, see Process Source [321]
Ref set AnIn1 for a current reference signal
and Process Unit [322].
Min Speed 5 The input acts as a lower speed limit. “[513A] AnIn1 Enabl” = DigIn;
set AnIn1 to be active when DigIn3 is HIGH
Communication information “[514] AnIn2 Fc” = Process Ref;
set AnIn2 as reference signal input
Profibus slot/index 169/105 “[515] AnIn2 Setup” = 0-10V;
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c81 set AnIn2 for a voltage reference signal
“[516A] AnIn2 Enabl” = !DigIn;
set AnIn2 to be active when DigIn3 is LOW
Modbus format UInt
“[523] DigIn3=AnIn”;
set DIgIn3 as input fot selection of AI reference
NOTE: When AnInX Func=Off, the connected signal
will still be available for Comparators [610]. Subtracting analogue inputs
Example 2: Subtract two signals
Adding analogue inputs Signal on AnIn1 = 8 V
If more than one analogue input is set to the same function, Signal on AnIn2 = 4 V
the values of the inputs can be added together. In the
[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref.
following examples we assume that Process Source [321] is
[512] AnIn1 Setup = 0-10 V
set to Speed.
[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)
Example 1: Add signals with different weight (fine tuning). [5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)
Signal on AnIn1 = 10 mA [5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+
Signal on AnIn2 = 5 mA [514] AnIn2 Function = Process Ref.
[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10 V
[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref. [5164] AnIn2 Function Min = Min (0 rpm)
[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20 mA [5166] AnIn2 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)
[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm) [5168] AnIn2 Operation = Sub-
[5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm)
[5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+
[514] AnIn2 Function = Process Ref.

Calculation:
NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL
AnIn1 = (8-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 1200 rpm needs to be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to
AnIn2 = (4-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 600 rpm “R+L”.
The actual process reference will be:
+1200 - 600 = 600 rpm NOTE: Always check the needed set up when the
setting of S1 is changed; selection will not adapt
automatically.
AnIn1 Setup [512]
The analogue input setup is used to configure the analogue Communication information
input in accordance with the signal used that will be
connected to the analogue input. With this selection the
input can be determined as current (4-20 mA) or voltage
(0-10 V) controlled input. Other selections are available for
using a threshold (live zero), a bipolar input function, or a
user defined input range. With a bipolar input reference
Modbus format UInt
signal, it is possible to control the motor in two directions.
See Fig. 138.
Speed n
NOTE: The selection of voltage or current input is 100 %
done with S1. When the switch is in voltage mode

only the voltage menu items are selectable. With the
switch in current mode only the current menu items
are selectable.
512 AnIn1 Setup -10 V 0 10 V

20 mA
Default: 4-20 mA
Dependent on Setting of switch S1
The current input has a fixed threshold 100 %
4–20mA 0 (Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full

range for the input signal. See Fig. 81.
(NG_06-F21)
Normal full current scale configuration of

0–20mA 1 the input that controls the full range for the Fig. 138
input signal. See Fig. 80.
The scale of the current controlled input, n
that controls the full range for the input
User mA 2 100 %
signal. Can be defined by the advanced
AnIn Min and AnIn Max menus. 0–10 V
0–20 mA
Sets the input for a bipolar current input,
User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the
3
mA input signal. Scale can be defined in
advanced menu AnIn Bipol.
Normal full voltage scale configuration of Ref
10 V
0–10V 4 the input that controls the full range for the 0
20mA
input signal. See Fig. 80. (NG_06-F21)
The voltage input has a fixed threshold Fig. 139 Normal full-scale configuration
2–10V 5 (Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full
range for the input signal. See Fig. 81.
The scale of the voltage controlled input,
that controls the full range for the input
User V 6
signal. Can be defined by the advanced
AnIn Min and AnIn Max menus.
Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input,
User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the
7
V input signal. Scale can be defined in
advanced menu AnIn Bipol.

n
100 % Profibus slot/index 169/108
2–10 V
4–20 mA Long, 1=0.01 mA,
Fieldbus format
0.01 V
Modbus format EInt
Ref
Special function: Inverted reference signal
2V 10 V
0
4mA 2 0mA
If the AnIn minimum value is higher than the AnIn
maximum value, the input will act as an inverted reference
Fig. 140 2–10 V/4–20 mA (Live Zero) input, see Fig. 141.
AnIn1 Advanced [513] n
100 %
NOTE: The different menus will automatically be set Invert

to either “mA” or “V”, based on the selection in AnIn 1 AnIn Min >
Setup [512]. AnIn Max
513 AnIn1 Advan

Ref
0 10V
AnIn1 Min [5131] (NG_06-F25)
Parameter to set the minimum value of the external Fig. 141 Inverted reference
reference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V.
AnIn1 Bipol [5133]
5131 AnIn1 Min This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is set to
User Bipol mA or User Bipol V. The window will
Default: 0 V/4.00 mA
automatically show mA or V range according to selected
0.00–20.00 mA function. The range is set by changing the positive
Range:
0–10.00 V maximum value; the negative value is automatically adapted
accordingly. Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V. The
Communication information inputs RunR and RunL input need to be active, and
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43203 “Rotation [219]”, must be set to “R+L”, to operate the
Profibus slot/index 169/107 bipolar function on the analogue input.
Profinet IO index 19587 5133 AnIn1 Bipol
Long, 1=0.01 mA,
Fieldbus format Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mA
0.01 V
Modbus format EInt Range: 0.0–20.0 mA, 0.00–10.00 V
AnIn1 Max [5132] Communication information

Parameter to set the maximum value of the external
reference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V.
5132 AnIn1 Max Profinet IO index 19589
Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mA Long, 1=0.01 mA,
Fieldbus format
0.01 V
0.00–20.00 mA Modbus format EInt
Range:
0–10.00 V

AnIn1 Function Min [5134] AnIn1 Function Max [5136]
With AnIn1 Function Min the physical minimum value is With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value is
scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is
dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. See
dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. Table 36.
5134 AnIn1 FcMin 5136 AnIn1 FcMax

Default: Min Default: Max
Min 0 Min value Min 0 Min value
Max 1 Max value Max 1 Max value
User- User-
2 Define user value in menu [5135] 2 Define user value in menu [5137]
defined defined
Table 36 shows corresponding values for the min and max Communication information
selections depending on the function of the analogue input Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43207
[511]. Profibus slot/index 169/111
Table 36 Profinet IO index 19591
AnIn Function Min Max
Modbus format UInt
Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343]
Torque 0% Max Torque [351] AnIn1 Function Value Max [5137]
With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined
Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is
Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] selected in menu [5136].
Communication information 5137 AnIn1 VaMax

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43206 Default: 0.000
Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000
Modbus format UInt Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43551
AnIn1 Function Value Min [5135] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ddf
With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user-defined
Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1°
value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is or 0.001 if Process Value/
selected in menu [5134]. Fieldbus format
Process Ref using a [322]
unit
Modbus format EInt
5135 AnIn1 VaMin
Default: 0.000
NOTE: With AnIn Min, AnIn Max, AnIn Function Min
Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 and AnIn Function Max settings, loss of feedback
signals (e.g. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring)
can be compensated to ensure an accurate process
Communication information control.
Profibus slot/index 170/190 Example:
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dd5 Process sensor is a sensor with the following specification:
Profinet IO index 19925 Range: 0–3 bar
Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1° Output: 2–10 mA
or 0.001 if Process Value/ Analogue input should be set up according to:
Fieldbus format
Process Ref using a [322] [512] AnIn1 Setup = User mA
unit [5131] AnIn1 Min = 2 mA
Modbus format EInt [5132] AnIn1 Max = 10 mA
[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = User-defined
[5135] AnIn1 VaMin = 0.000 bar
[5136] AnIn 1 Function Max = User-defined
[5137] AnIn1 VaMax = 3.000 bar

AnIn1 Operation [5138] AnIn1 Enable [513A]
Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection via
5138 AnIn1 Oper digital inputs (DigIn set to function AnIn Select).
Default: Add+
513A AnIn1 Enabl
Analogue signal is added to selected
Add+ 0 Default: On
function in menu [511].
Analogue signal is subtracted from On 0 AnIn1 is always active
Sub- 1
selected function in menu [511]. !DigIn 1 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is low.
AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is
Communication information DigIn 2
high.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c8a
Modbus format UInt
AnIn1 Filter [5139] Modbus format UInt
If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation reference
value), the filter can be used to stabilize the signal. A change
of the input signal will reach 63% on AnIn1 within the set AnIn2 Function [514]
AnIn1 Filter time. After 5 times the set time, AnIn1 will Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.
have reached 100% of the input change. See Fig. 142.
Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511]”.
5139 AnIn1 Filt

514 AnIn2 Fc
Default: 0.1 s
Default: Off
Range: 0.001 – 10.0 s
Selection: Same as in menu [511]

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c8b
Modbus format EInt
Modbus format UInt
AnIn change AnIn2 Setup [515]

Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.
Original input signal
100% Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”.
Filtered AnIn signal

515 AnIn2 Setup
63%
Default: 4 – 20 mA
Dependent on Setting of switch S2
Selection: Same as in menu [512].
T 5XT
Fig. 142
Modbus format UInt

AnIn2 Advanced [516] AnIn3 Advanced [519]
Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Advan Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Advan
[513]”. [513]”.
516 AnIn2 Advan 519 AnIn3 Advan

43213–43220, 43223–43230,
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43542, Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43543,
43552 43553
169/117–124, 169/127–169/134,
Profibus slot/index 170/191, Profibus slot/index 170/192,
170/201 170/202
4c8d - 4c94, 4c97 - 4c9e,
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dd6, EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dd7,
4de0 4de1
19597-19604, 19607-19614,
Profinet IO index 19926, Profinet IO index 19927,
19936 19937
Fieldbus format Fieldbus format
See [5131] - [5137]. See [5131] - [5137].
Modbus format Modbus format
AnIn3 Function [517] AnIn4 Function [51A]

Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 3. Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 4.
Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511]”. Same function as “AnIn1 Fc [511].”
517 AnIn3 Fc 51A AnIn4 Fc

Selection: Same as in menu [511] Selection: Same as in menu [511]

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c95 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c9f
Fieldbus format UInt Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt Modbus format UInt
AnIn3 Setup [518] AnIn4 Set-up [51B]

Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”. Same functions as “AnIn1 Setup [512]”.
518 AnIn3 Setup 51B AnIn4 Setup

Default: 4–20 mA Default: 4-20 mA
Dependent on Setting of switch S3 Dependent on Setting of switch S4
Selection: Same as in menu [512]. Selection: Same as in menu [512].

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4c96 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ca0

AnIn4 Advanced [51C] 11.7.2 Digital Inputs [520]
Same functions and submenus as under “AnIn1 Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs.
Advan[513]”.
NOTE: Additional inputs will become available when
51C AnIn4 Advan the I/O option boards are connected.
Digital Input 1 [521]
43233–43240,
To select the function of the digital input.
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43544,
43554 On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs.
169/137–144,
Profibus slot/index 170/193, If the same function is programmed for more than one input
170/203 that function will be activated according to “OR” logic if
4ca1 - 4ca8, nothing else is stated.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dd8,
4de2
521 DigIn 1
19617-19624,
Profinet IO index 19928, Default: RunL
19938
Off 0 The input is not active.
Fieldbus format
See [5131] - [5137].
Modbus format Be aware that if there is nothing
connected to the input, the AC drive will
trip at “External trip” immediately.
Ext. Trip 3
NOTE: The External Trip is active low.
NOTE: Activated according to “AND”
logic.
Stop command according to the selected
Stop mode in menu [33B].
Stop 4 NOTE: The Stop command is active low.
logic.
Enable command. General start condition
to run the AC drive. If made low during
running the output of the AC drive is cut
off immediately, causing the motor to
coast to zero speed.
Enable 5
NOTE: If none of the digital inputs are
programmed to “Enable”, the internal
enable signal is active.
logic.
Run Right command (positive speed). The
RunR 6 output of the AC drive will be a
clockwise rotary field.
Run Left command (negative speed). The
RunL 7 output of the AC drive will be a
counter-clockwise rotary field.
Reset command. To reset a Trip condition
Reset 9
and to enable the Autoreset function.
Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference.
Increases the internal reference value
according to the set AccMotPot time
MotPot Up 13
[333]. Has the same function as a “real”
motor potentiometer, see Fig. 122.
Decreases the internal reference value
MotPot
14 according to the set DecMotPot time
Down
[334]. See MotPot Up.

Feedback input pump1 for Pump/Fan Communication information
Pump1
15 control and informs about the status of the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43241
Feedb
auxiliary connected pump/fan. Profibus slot/index 169/145
Feedback input pump 2 for Pump/Fan EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ca9
Pump2
16 control and informs about the status of the Profinet IO index 19625
Feedb
auxiliary connected pump/fan. Fieldbus format UInt
Feedback input pump3 for Pump/Fan Modbus format UInt
Pump3
17 control and informs about the status of the
Feedb Table 37
auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Feedback input pump 4 for Pump/Fan Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2
Pump4
Feedb A 0 0
Feedback input pump5 for Pump/Fan B 1 0
Pump5
19 control and informs about the status of the C 0 1
Feedb
D 1 1
Feedback input pump 6 for Pump/Fan
Pump6
Feedb
auxiliary connected pump/fan. NOTE: To activate the parameter set selection, menu
Timer 1 Delay [643] will be activated on 241 must be set to DigIn.
Timer 1 21
the rising edge of this signal.
Timer 2 Delay [653] will be activated on Digital Input 2 [522] to Digital Input
Timer 2 22
the rising edge of this signal.
Activates other parameter set. See Table
8 [528]
Set Ctrl 1 23 Same function as “DigIn 1[521]”. Default function for
37 for selection possibilities.
DigIn 8 is Reset. For DigIn 3 to 7 the default function is
Activates other parameter set. See Table
Set Ctrl 2 24 Off.
37 for selection possibilities.
Mot Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for faster
PreMag
25
motor start.
522 DigIn 2
To activate the Jog function. Gives a Run Default: RunR
Jog 26 command with the set Jog speed and Selection: Same as in menu [521]
Direction, page 146.
Be aware that if there is nothing Communication information
connected to the input, the AC drive will
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43242 – 43248
Ext Mot trip at
27 Profibus slot/index 169/146 – 169/152
Temp “External Motor Temp” immediately.
NOTE: The External Motor Temp is active EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4caa - 4cb0
low. Profinet IO index 19626 - 19632
Activate local mode defined in [2171] and
Loc/Rem 28 Modbus format UInt
[2172].
Activate/deactivate analogue inputs
AnIn select 29 defined in [513A], [516A], [519A] and Additional digital inputs [529] to
[51CA]
[52H]
Liquid cooling low level signal.
Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed,
LC Level 30 NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is active
“B1 DigIn 1 [529]” - “B3 DigIn 3 [52H]”. B stands for
low.
board and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is related
Brake acknowledge input for Brake Fault to the position of the I/O option board on the option
Brk Ackn 31 control. Function is activated via this mounting plate. The functions and selections are the same as
selection see menu [33H] page 141 “DigIn 1 [521]”.
Possible to enter sleep mode through
Sleep 32 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43501–43509
DigIn
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dad - 4db5
NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL Profinet IO index 19885 - 19893
needs to be active and “Rotation [219]” must be set Fieldbus format UInt
to “R+L”. Modbus format UInt

11.7.3 Analogue Outputs [530] Communication information
Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43251
Selections can be made from application and AC drive Profibus slot/index 169/155
values, in order to visualize actual status. Analogue outputs EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb3
can also be used as a mirror of the analogue input. Such a Profinet IO index 19635
signal can be used as: Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
• a reference signal for the next AC drive in a Master/Slave
configuration (see Fig. 143).
• a feedback acknowledgement of the received analogue AnOut 1 Setup [532]
reference value. Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration.
AnOut1 Function [531] 532 AnOut1 Setup

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale and Default: 4-20mA
range are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings [533]. The current output has a fixed threshold
(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full
4–20mA 0
531 AnOut1 Fc range for the output signal. See Fig.
140.
Default: Speed
Normal full current scale configuration of
Actual process value according to 0–20mA 1 the output that controls the full range for
Process Val 0
Process feedback signal. the output signal. See Fig. 139.
Speed 1 Actual speed.
The scale of the current controlled
Torque 2 Actual torque. output that controls the full range for the
User mA 2 output signal. Can be defined by the
Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value.
advanced AnOut Min and AnOut Max
Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power. menus.
Frequency 5 Actual frequency. Sets the output for a bipolar current
User Bipol output, where the scale controls the
Current 6 Actual current. 3
mA range for the output signal. Scale can be
El power 7 Actual electrical power. defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.
Output volt 8 Actual output voltage. Normal full voltage scale configuration of
0-10V 4 the output that controls the full range for
DC-voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage.
the output signal. See Fig. 139.
Mirror of received signal value on
AnIn1 10 The voltage output has a fixed threshold
AnIn1.
(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full
2–10V 5
Mirror of received signal value on range for the output signal. See Fig.
AnIn2 11
AnIn2. 140.
Mirror of received signal value on The scale of the voltage controlled
AnIn3 12
AnIn3. output that controls the full range for the
Mirror of received signal value on User V 6 output signal. Can be defined by the
AnIn4 13 advanced AnOut Min and AnOut Max
AnIn4.
menus.
Actual internal speed reference Value
Speed Ref 14 Sets the output for a bipolar voltage
after ramp and V/Hz.
User Bipol output, where the scale controls the
Actual torque reference value 7
Torque Ref 15 V range for the output signal. Scale can be
(=0 in V/Hz mode) defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.
NOTE: When selections AnIn1, AnIn2 …. AnIn4 is Communication information

selected, the setup of the AnOut (menu [532] or [535]) Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43252
has to be set to 0-10V or 0-20mA. When the AnOut Profibus slot/index 169/156
Setup is set to e.g. 4-20mA, the mirroring is not
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb4
working correct.
Modbus format UInt

AnOut1 Max [5332]
This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or
Ref. Ref. User V is selected in menu “AnOut1 Setup [532]”. The
AC drive 1 AC drive 2
Slave menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting a
Master
ccording to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User
AnOut
mA/V.
5332 AnOut 1 Max

Default: 20.00 mA
Fig. 143
Range: 0.00–20.00 mA, 0–10.00 V
AnOut1 Advanced [533]

With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu, the
output can be completely defined according to the Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43254
application needs. The menus will automatically be adapted Profibus slot/index 169/158
to “mA” or “V”, according to the selection in “AnOut1 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb6
Setup [532]”. Profinet IO index 19638
Long, 1=0.01 V,
Fieldbus format
0.01 mA
533 AnOut 1 Adv Modbus format EInt
AnOut1 Min [5331] AnOut1 Bipol [5333]

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V is
User V is selected in menu “AnOut 1 Setup [532]”. The selected in menu AnOut1 Setup. The menu will
menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage setting automatically show mA or V range according to the selected
according to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User function. The range is set by changing the positive
mA/V. maximum value; the negative value is automatically adapted
accordingly. Only visible if [512] = User Bipol mA/V.
5331 AnOut 1 Min
Default: 4 mA
5333 AnOut1Bipol
Default: -10.00–10.00 V
Range: 0.00 – 20.00 mA, 0 – 10.00 V
Range: -10.00–10.00 V, -20.0–20.0 mA
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb5 Profibus slot/index 169/159
Profinet IO index 19637 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb7
Long, 1=0.01 V, Profinet IO index 19639
Fieldbus format
0.01 mA Long, 1=0.01 V,
Fieldbus format
Modbus format EInt 0.01 mA
Modbus format EInt

AnOut1 Function Min [5334] Example
With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is Set the AnOut function for Motorfrequency to 0Hz, set
scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling is AnOut functionMin [5334] to “User-defined” and AnOut1
dependent of the selected function of “AnOut1 [531]”. VaMin[5335] = 0.0. This results in an anlogue output signal
from 0/4 mA to 20mA: 0Hz to Fmot.
5334 AnOut1FCMin This principle is valid for all Min to Max settings.
Default: Min
Min 0 Min value
AnOut1 Function Value Min [5335]
With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user-defined
Max 1 Max value value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is
User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5335] selected in menu [5334].
Table 38 shows corresponding values for the min and max 5335 AnOut1VaMin
selections depending on the function of the analogue output Default: 0.000
[531].
Range: -10000.000–10000.000
Table 38
AnOut Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43545
Min Value Max Value
Function
Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dd9
Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343]
Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1W,
Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 0.1 Hz, 0.1 V, 0.1 A or
Fieldbus format
0.001 via process value
Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] [322]
Shaft Power 0% Motor Power [223] Modbus format EInt
Frequency Fmin * Motor Frequency [222]

AnOut1 Function Max [5336]
Current 0A Motor Current [224] With AnOut1 Function Max the physical minimum value is
El Power 0W Motor Power [223] scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling is
dependent on the selected function of AnOut1 [531]. See
Output Table 38.
0V Motor Voltage [221]
Voltage
DC voltage 0V 1000 V 5336 AnOut1FCMax
AnIn1 Function Default: Max
AnIn1 AnIn1 Function Max
Min
Min 0 Min value
AnIn2 Function
AnIn2 AnIn2 Function Max Max 1 Max value
Min
User defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337]
AnIn3 Function
AnIn3 AnIn3 Function Max
Min
AnIn4 Function
AnIn4 AnIn4 Function Max Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43257
Min
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb9
*) Fmin is dependent on the set value in menu
“Minimum Speed [341]”.
Communication information Modbus format UInt
Profibus slot/index 169/160 NOTE: It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cb8 output signal by setting AnOut1 Min > AnOut1 Max.
Profinet IO index 19640 See Fig. 141, page 170.
Modbus format UInt

AnOut1 Function Value Max [5337] AnOut2 Setup [535]
With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for
value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is analogue output 2.
selected in menu [5334].
535 AnOut2 Setup
5337 AnOut1VaMax
Default: 4-20mA
Default: 0.000
Range: -10000.000–10000.000
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43555 Profibus slot/index 169/166
Profibus slot/index 170/204 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cbe
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4de3 Profinet IO index 19646
Profinet IO index 19939 Fieldbus format UInt
Long, 1=1 rpm, 1 %, 1W, Modbus format UInt
0.1 Hz, 0.1 V, 0.1 A or
Fieldbus format
0.001 via process value
[322]
Modbus format EInt
AnOut2 Advanced [536]
Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 Advanced
[533].
AnOut2 Function [534]
Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2. 536 AnOut2 Advan
534 AnOut2 Fc Communication information

Default: Torque 43263–43267,
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43546,
Selection: Same as in menu [531] 43556
169/167–169/171,
Communication information Profibus slot/index 170/195,
170/205
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43261 4cbf - 4cc3,
Profibus slot/index 169/165 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dda,
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cbd 4de4
Profinet IO index 19645 19647 - 19651,
Fieldbus format UInt Profinet IO index 19930,
19940
Modbus format UInt
Fieldbus format
See [533]- [5367].
Modbus format

11.7.4 Digital Outputs [540] Max Alarm 20
The max alarm level has been
Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs. reached.
The max pre alarm level has been
Max PreAlarm 21
reached.
Digital Out 1 [541]
The min alarm level has been
Sets the function for the digital output 1. Min Alarm 22
reached.
The min pre alarm Level has been
NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for the Min PreAlarm 23
reached.
active output condition.
LY 24 Logic output Y.
541 DigOut 1 !LY 25 Logic output Y inverted.
Default: Ready LZ 26 Logic output Z.
Output is not active and constantly !LZ 27 Logic output Z inverted.

Off 0
low. CA 1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output.
Output is made constantly high, i.e. !A1 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output.
On 1 for checking circuits and trouble
shooting. CA 2 30 Analogue comparator 2 output.
Running. The AC drive output is !A2 31 Analogue comp 2 inverted output.

Run 2 active = produces current for the CD 1 32 Digital comparator 1 output.
motor.
!D1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output.
Stop 3 The AC drive output is not active.
CD 2 34 Digital comparator 2 output.
The output frequency=0±0.1Hz
0Hz 4 !D2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output.
when in Run condition.
The speed is increasing or Run command is active or AC drive
Acc/Dec 5 decreasing along the acc. ramp dec. running. The signal can be used to
ramp. Operation 36 control the mains contactor if the AC
drive is equipped with Standby
At Process 6 The output = Reference. supply option.
The frequency is limited by the T1Q 37 Timer1 output
At Max spd 7
Maximum Speed.
!T1Q 38 Timer1 inverted output
No Trip 8 No Trip condition active.
T2Q 39 Timer2 output
Trip 9 A Trip condition is active.
!T2Q 40 Timer2 inverted output
AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active.
Sleeping 41 Sleeping function activated
Limit 11 A Limit condition is active.
PumpSlave1 43 Activate pump slave 1
Warning 12 A Warning condition is active.
The AC drive is ready for operation.
Ready 13 This means that the AC drive is PumpSlave3 45 Activate pump slave 3
powered up and healthy. PumpSlave4 46 Activate pump slave 4
The torque is limited by the torque PumpSlave5 47 Activate pump slave 5
T= Tlim 14
limit function.
The output current is higher than the
PumpMaster
motor nominal current [224], reduced 49 Activate pump master 1
I>Inom 15 1
according to Motor ventilation [228],
see Fig. 106, page 108. PumpMaster
50 Activate pump master 2
2
The output is used to control a
Brake 16
mechanical brake. PumpMaster
3
One of the AnIn input signals is lower
Sgnl<Offset 17
than 75% of the threshold level. PumpMaster
4
The max or min alarm level has been
Alarm 18
reached. PumpMaster
5
The max or min pre alarm level has
Pre-Alarm 19
been reached. PumpMaster
6

All Pumps 55 All pumps are running Analogue comparator 3 inverted
!A3 92
output
Only Master 56 Only the master is running
CA4 93 Analogue comparator 4 output
Local/Rem mode indication
Loc/Rem 57
Local = 1, Remote = 0 Analogue comparator 4 inverted
!A4 94
output
Standby 58 Standby supply option is active
CD3 95 Digital comparator 3 output
PTC Trip 59 Trip when function is active
!D3 96 Digital comparator 3 inverted output
PT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is active
CD4 97 Digital comparator 4 output
Overvolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltage
!D4 98 Digital comparator 4 inverted output
Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode
C1Q 99 Counter 1 output
Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration
!C1Q 100 Counter 1 inverted output
Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc. ramp
C2Q 101 Counter 2 output
Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec. ramp
!C2Q 102 Counter 2 Inverted output
I2t 66 I2t limit protection active
Enc Error 103 Tripped on Encoder error
V-Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function active
Spin Start 105 Spin start is active
C-Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active
Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning Communication information
Low voltage 70 Low voltage warning Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43271
DigIn 1 71 Digital input 1 Profibus slot/index 169/175
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cc7
DigIn 2 72 Digital input 2
DigIn 3 73 Digital input 3 Fieldbus format UInt
DigIn 4 74 Digital input 4 Modbus format UInt

DigIn 6 76 Digital input 6 Digital Out 2 [542]
NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for the
DigIn 8 78 Digital input 8 active output condition.
Active trip that needs to be manually
ManRst Trip 79
reset
Sets the function for the digital output 2.
Com Error 80 Serial communication lost
External Fan 81
The AC drive requires external 542 DigOut2
cooling. Internal fans are active.
Default: Brake
LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling pump
Activate liquid cooling heat
LC HE Fan 83
exchanger fan
LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal active Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43272
Positive speed (>0.5%), i.e. forward/ Profibus slot/index 169/176
Run Right 85
clockwise direction. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cc8
Negative speed (<0.5%), i.e. reverse Profinet IO index 19656
Run Left 86 Fieldbus format UInt
counter clockwise direction.
Modbus format UInt
Com Active 87 Fieldbus communication active.
Brk Fault 88 Tripped on brake fault (not released)
Warning and continued operation
BrkNotEngag
89 (keep torque) due to Brake not
e
engaged during stop.
Failure occurred in built-in option
Option 90
board.
CA3 91 Analogue comparator 3 output

11.7.5 Relays [550] Relay 3 [553]
Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs. The Sets the function for the relay output 3.
relay mode selection makes it possible to establish a “fail
safe” relay operation by using the normal closed contact to 553 Relay 3
function as the normal open contact.
Default: Off
NOTE: Additional relays will become available when I/ Selection: Same as in menu [541]
O option boards are connected. Maximum 3 boards
with 3 relays each. Communication information
Relay 1 [551] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ccb
Sets the function for the relay output 1. Same function as Profinet IO index 19659
digital output 1 [541] can be selected. Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
551 Relay 1
Default: Trip Board Relay [554] to [55C]
Selection: Same as in menu [541] These additional relays are only visible if an I/O option
board is fitted in slot 1, 2, or 3. The outputs are named B1
Communication information Relay 1–3, B2 Relay 1–3 and B3 Relay 1–3. B stands for
board and 1–3 is the number of the board which is related to
the position of the I/O option board on the option
mounting plate.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cc9
Fieldbus format UInt NOTE: Visible only if optional board is detected or if
Modbus format UInt
any input/output is activated.
Relay 2 [552] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43511–43519
NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for the EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4db7 - 4dbf
active output condition. Profinet IO index 19895 - 19903
Sets the function for the relay output 2. Modbus format UInt
552 Relay 2 Relay Advanced [55D]

Default: Run This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will
Selection: Same as in menu [541] also be closed when the AC drive is malfunctioning or
powered down.
Communication information Example
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43274 A process always requires a certain minimum flow. To
Profibus slot/index 169/178 control the required number of pumps by the relay mode
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cca NC, the e.g. the pumps can be controlled normally by the
Profinet IO index 19658 pump control, but are also activated when the AC drive is
Fieldbus format UInt tripped or powered down.
Modbus format UInt
55D Relay Adv

Relay 1 Mode [55D1] 11.7.6 Virtual Connections [560]
Functions to enable eight internal connections of
55D1 Relay1 Mode comparator, timer and digital signals, without occupying
physical digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are used to
Default: N.O
wireless connection of a digital output function to a digital
The normal open contact of the relay will input function. Available signals and control functions can
N.O 0
be activated when the function is active. be used to create your own specific functions.
The normally closed contact of the relay
will act as a normal open contact. The Example of start delay
N.C 1 contact will be opened when function is The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after DigIn1 gets
not active and closed when function is high. DigIn1 has a time delay of 10 s.
active.
Menu Parameter Setting
[521] DigIn1 Timer 1
[561] VIO 1 Dest RunR
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4ccc [562] VIO 1 Source T1Q
Profinet IO index 19660 [641] Timer1 Trig DigIn 1
Modbus format UInt
[642] Timer1 Mode Delay
[643] Timer1 Delay 0:00:10
Relay Modes [55D2] to [55DC]
Same function as for “Relay 1 Mode [55D1]”. NOTE: When a digital input and a virtual destination
Communication information are set to the same function, this function will act as
an OR logic function.
43277, 43278,
43521–43529
169/181, 169/182,
Profibus slot/index
170/170–170/178
Virtual Connection 1 Destination
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex)
4ccd, 4cce, [561]
4dc1 - 4dc9
With this function the destination of the virtual connection
19661, 19662,
Profinet IO index is established. When a function can be controlled by several
19905 - 19913
sources, e.g. VC destination or Digital Input, the function
will be controlled in conformity with “OR logic”. See DigIn
Modbus format UInt
for descriptions of the different selections.
561 VIO 1 Dest

Default: Off
Same selections as for Digital Input 1,
Selection:
menu [521].
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cd1
Modbus format UInt

Virtual Connection 1 Source [562] 11.8 Logical Functions and
With this function the source of the virtual connection is
defined. See DigOut 1 for description of the different
Timers [600]
selections. With the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers,
conditional signals can be programmed for control or
signalling features. This gives you the ability to compare
562 VIO 1 Source different signals and values in order to generate monitoring/
Default: Off controlling features.
Selection: Same as for menu [541].
11.8.1 Comparators [610]
Communication information The comparators available make it possible to monitor
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43282 different internal signals and values, and visualize via digital
Profibus slot/index 169/186 relay outputs, when a specific value or status is reached or
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4cd2 established.
Analogue comparators [611] - [614]
There are 4 analogue comparators that compare any
Modbus format UInt
available analogue value (including the analogue reference
inputs) with two adjustable levels. The two levels available
Virtual Connections 2-8 [563] to are Level HI and Level LO. There are two analogue
comparator types selectable, an analogue comparator with
[56G] hysteresis and an analogue window comparator.
Same function as virtual connection 1 [561] and [562]. The analogue hysteresis type comparator uses the two
Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 available levels to create a hysteresis for the comparator
Destination. between setting and resetting the output. This function gives
a clear difference in switching levels, which lets the process
43283, 43285, 43287,
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43289, 43291, 43293,
adapt until a certain action is started. With such a hysteresis,
43295 even an unstable analogue signal can be monitored without
169/ 187, 189, 191, 193, getting a nervous comparator output signal. Another feature
Profibus slot/index
195, 197, 199 is the possibility to get a fixed indication that a certain level
4cd3, 4cd5, 4cd17, 4cd9, has been passed. The comparator can latch by setting Level
4cdb, 4cdd, 4cdf LO to a higher value than Level HI.
19667, 19669, 19671,
Profinet IO index 19673, 19675, 19677, The analogue window comparator uses the two available
19679 levels to define the window in which the analogue value
Fieldbus format UInt should be within for setting the comparator output.
Modbus format UInt The input analogue value of the comparator can also be
selected as bipolar, i.e. treated as signed value or
Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 unipolar, i.e. treated as absolute value.
Source. Refer to Fig. 148, page 189 where these functions are
43284, 43286, 43288, illustrated.
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43290, 43292, 43294,
43296 Digital comparators [615]
169/ 188, 190, 192, 194, There are 4 digital comparators that compare any available
Profibus slot/index
196, 198, 200 digital signal.
4cd4, 4cd6, 4cd8, 4cda,
4cdc, 4cde, 4ce0 The output signals of these comparators can be logically tied
19668, 19670, 19672, together to yield a logical output signal.
Profinet IO index 19674, 19676, 19678, All the output signals can be programmed to the digital or
19680
relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections
[560].
Modbus format UInt

CA1 Setup [611] The output signal can be programmed as a virtual
connection source and to the digital or relay outputs.
Analogue comparator 1, parameter group.
6111 CA1 Value

Analogue Comparator 1, Value
Default: Speed
[6111]
Set by Process settings [321] and
Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator 1 Process Val 0
[322]
(CA1).
Speed 1 rpm
Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable analogue
value in menu [6111] with the constant Level HI in menu Torque 2 %
[6112] and constant Level LO in menu [6113]. If Bipolar Shaft Power 3 kW
type[6115] input signal is selected then the comparison is
made with sign otherwise if unipolar selected then El Power 4 kW
comparison is made with absolute values. Current 5 A
For Hysteresis comparator type [6114], when the value Output Volt 6 V
exceeds the upper limit level high, the output signal CA1 is
Frequency 7 Hz
set high and !A1 low, see Fig. 144. When the value decreases
below the lower limit, the output signal CA1 is set low and DC Voltage 8 V
!A1 high. IGBT Temp 9 °C
PT100_1 10 °C
Analogue value:
Menu [6111] PT100_2 11 °C
Signal:CA1
Adjustable Level HI. PT100_3 12 °C
Menu [6112] 0
Energy 13 kWh
Adjustable Level LO. 1
Menu [6113] Run Time 14 h
(NG_06-F125) Mains Time 15 h

AnIn1 16 %
Fig. 144 Analogue comparator type Hysteresiss
AnIn2 17 %
For Window comparator type [6114], when the value is AnIn3 18 %
between the lower and upper levels, the output signal value
CA1 is set high and !A1 low, see Fig. 147, page 187. When AnIn4 19 %
the value is outside the band of lower and upper levels, the Process Ref 20 Set by Process settings [321] and
output CA1 is set low and !A1 high. [322]
Process Err 21
Level High[6112]
Signal Profibus slot/index 170/50
An Value [6111] AND EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d49
CA1
Level Low [6113] Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Fig. 145 Analogue comparator type “Window”

Example
Create automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analogue Reference signal AnIn1
Max speed
reference signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4-20 20 mA
mA, is connected to Analogue Input 1. “AnIn1 Setup”,
menu [512] = 4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA. Full scale
(100%) input signal on “AnIn 1” = 20 mA. When the
reference signal on “AnIn1” increases 80% of the threshold
(4 mA x 0.8 = 3.2 mA), the AC drive will be set in RUN
mode. When the signal on “AnIn1” goes below 60% of the 4 mA
threshold (4 mA x 0.6 = 2.4 mA) the AC drive is set to CA1 Level HI = 16%
3.2 mA
STOP mode. The output of CA1 is used as a virtual CA1 Level LO = 12%
connection source that controls the virtual connection 2.4 mA
destination RUN.
Menu Function Setting

t
511 AnIn1 Function Process reference
CA1
512 AnIn1 Set-up 4-20 mA, threshold is 4 mA
341 Min Speed 0
t
343 Max Speed 1500 Mode
RUN
6111 CA1 Value AnIn1
6112 CA1 Level HI 16% (3.2mA/20mA x 100%) STOP
t
T
6113 CA1 Level LO 12% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%)
1 2 3 4 5 6
6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis
Fig. 146
561 VIO 1 Dest RunR
562 VIO 1 Source CA1 No. Description
215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote The reference signal passes the Level LO value from
1 below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output
stays low, mode=RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from
2 below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is
set high, mode=RUN.
The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4
3 mA, the motor speed will now follow the reference
signal.
During this period the motor speed will follow the
T
reference signal.
The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motor
4
speed is 0 rpm, mode = RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from
5 above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output
stays high, mode =RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from
6 above (negative edge), the comparator CA1
output=STOP.

Analogue Comparator 1, Example
This example describes, both for hysteresis and window type
Level High [6112] comparator, the normal use of the constant level high and
Sets the analogue comparator high level, with range low.
according to the selected value in menu [6111].
Menu Function Setting
6112 CA1 Level HI
343 Max Speed 1500
Default: 300 rpm
6111 CA1 Value Speed
Range: See min/max in table below.
6112 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm
Min/Max setting range for menu [6112] 6113 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm
6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis
Mode Min Max Decimals
561 VC1 Dest Timer 1
Set by Process settings
Process Val 3 562 VC1 Source CA1
[321] and [322]
Speed, rpm 0 Max speed 0
Torque, % 0 Max torque 0
MAX
Shaft Power, kW 0 Motor Pnx4 0 speed
[343]
El Power, kW 0 Motor Pnx4 0
CA1 Level HI [6112]
Current, A 0 Motor Inx4 1 300
Hysteresis/Window
Output volt, V 0 1000 1 band
200
Frequency, Hz 0 400 1 CA1 Level LO [6113]
DC voltage, V 0 1250 1
Heatsink temp, °C 0 100 1
PT 100_1_2_3, °C -100 300 1
Energy, kWh 0 1000000 0
Output
Run time, h 0 65535 0 CA1 [6114] Hysteresis
High
Mains time, h 0 65535 0
AnIn 1-4% 0 100 0 Low
t
Output
Process Ref 3 CA1 [6114] Window
[321] and [322] High

Process Err 3
[321] and [322] Low t
NOTE: If Bipolar selected [6115] then Min value is

equal to -Max in the table.
Fig. 147
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d4a
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh,
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
Modbus format EInt

Table 39 Comments to Fig. 147 regarding Hysteresis Table 40 Comments to Fig. 147 regarding Window selection.
selection.
No. Description Window
No. Description Hysteresis
The reference signal passes the Level LO
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from below (signal inside Window
value from below (positive edge), the 1
1 band), the comparator CA1 output is set
comparator CA1 does not change, output high.
stays low.
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from above (signal outside Window
2 value from below (positive edge), the 2
band), the comparator CA1 is reset, output is
comparator CA1 output is set high. set low.
The reference signal passes the Level HI The reference signal passes the Level HI
value from above (negative edge), the value from above (signal inside Window
3 3
comparator CA1 does not change, output band), the comparator CA1 output is set
stays high. high.
The reference signal passes the Level LO The reference signal passes the Level LO
4 value from above (negative edge), the value from above (signal outside Window
4
comparator CA1 is reset, output is set low. band), the comparator CA1 is reset, output is
set low.
value from below (positive edge), the The reference signal passes the Level LO
5 value from below (signal inside Window
comparator CA1 does not change, output 5
stays low. band), the comparator CA1 output is set
high.
The reference signal passes the Level HI
6 value from below (positive edge), the The reference signal passes the Level HI
comparator CA1 output is set high. value from below (signal outside Window
6
band),the comparator CA1 is reset, output is
set low.
The reference signal passes the Level HI
value from above (negative edge), the
7 The reference signal passes the Level HI
comparator CA1 does not change, output
stays high. value from above (signal inside Window
7
band), the comparator CA1 output is set
high.
8 value from above (negative edge), the
comparator CA1 is reset, output is set low.
value from above (signal outside Window
8
band), the comparator CA1 is reset, output is
set low.

Analogue Comparator 1, Analogue Comparator 1,
Level Low [6113] Polarity[6115]
Sets the analogue comparator low level, with unit and range Selects how the selected value in [6111] should be handled
according to the selected value in menu [6111]. prior to the analogue comparator , i.e. as absolute value or
handled with sign. See Fig. 148
6113 CA1 Level LO
6115 CA1 Polar
Default: 200 rpm
Default: Unipolar
Range: Range as [6112].
Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used
Communication information Bipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] used
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d4b
Long,
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d9e
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, Profinet IO index 19870
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 Fieldbus format UInt
via process value Modbus format UInt
Modbus format EInt
Example
Analogue Comparator 1, Type See Fig. 148 and Fig. 149 for different principle
functionality of comparator features 6114 and 6115.
[6114] Type [6114]= Hysteresis
Selects the analogue comparator type, i.e. Hysteresis or CA1
[6115] Unipolar
Window type. See Fig. 148 and Fig. 149. [6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO > 0 An.Value
[6111]
6114 CA1 Type CA1
[6115] Bipolar
Default: Hysteresis [6112] HI > 0 An.Value
[6113] LO > 0 [6111]
Hysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparator
CA1
Window 1 Window type comparator [6115] Bipolar An.Value
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO < 0 [6111]
Communication information CA1
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43481 [6115] Bipolar An.Value
[6112] HI < 0
Profibus slot/index 170/130 [6113] LO < 0 [6111]
Fieldbus format UInt Fig. 148 Principle functionality of comparator features for
Modbus format UInt “Type [6114] = Hysteresis ” and “Polar [6115]”.

Analogue Comparator 2,
Type [6114] = Window
CA1
Level High [6122]
[6115] Unipolar Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,
[6112] HI > 0 An.Value
[6113] LO > 0 level high [6112].
[6111]
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
An.Value
6122 CA2 Level HI
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO > 0 [6111]
Default: 20%
CA1 Range: Enter a value for the high level.
[6115] Bipolar An.Value
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO < 0 [6111]
CA1
[6115] Bipolar Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43405
An.Value
[6112] HI < 0 Profibus slot/index 170/54
[6113] LO < 0 [6111]
Long
Fig. 149 Principle functionality of comparator features for 1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
“Type [6114] =Window ” and “Polar [6115]”. Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh,
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
NOTE: When “Unipolar “ is selected, absolute value
Modbus format EInt
of signal is used.
NOTE: When “Bipolar” is selected in [6115] then: Analogue Comparator 2,

1. Functionality is not symmetrical . Level Low [6123]
2. Ranges for high/low are bipolar
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,
level low [6113].
CA2 Setup [612]
Analogue comparator 2, parameter group. 6123 CA2 Level LO
Default: 10%
Analogue Comparator 2, Value Range: Enter a value for the low level.
[6121]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, Communication information
value [6111]. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43406
6121 CA2 Value EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d4e
Default: Torque Long,
Selections: Same as in menu [6111] 1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
Modbus format EInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d4c
Modbus format UInt

Analogue Comparator 2, Type CA3 Setup [613]
[6124] Analogue comparators 3, parameter group.
Type [6114]. Analogue Comparator 3, Value
[6131]
6124 CA2 Type
Default: Hysteresis value [6111].
6131 CA3 Value
Window 1 Window type comparator
Default: Process Value
Communication information Selections: Same as in menu [6111]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d9a
Profinet IO index 19866 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43471
Fieldbus format UInt Profibus slot/index 170/120
Modbus format UInt EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d8f
Analogue Comparator 2, Polar Modbus format UInt
[6125]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, Analogue Comparator 3,
Polar [6115].
Level High [6132]
6125 CA2 Polar Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,
level high [6112].
Default: Unipolar
Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used 6132 CA3 Level HI
Bipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] used Default: 300rpm
Range: Enter a value for the high level.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d9f
Modbus format UInt
Long
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
Modbus format EInt

Analogue Comparator 3, Analogue Comparator 3, Polar
Level Low [6133] [6135]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, Function is identical to analogue comparator 1,
level low [6113]. Polar [6115].
6133 CA3 Level LO 6135 CA3 Polar

Default: 200 rpm Default: Unipolar
Range: Enter a value for the low level. Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used
Bipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] used
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4da0
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, Fieldbus format UInt
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 Modbus format UInt
via process value
Modbus format EInt
CA4 Setup [614]
Analogue comparators 4, parameter group.
Analogue Comparator, 3 Type
[6134] Analogue Comparator 4, Value
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Type
[6114]. [6141]
6134 CA3 Type value [6111].
Default: Hysteresis
6141 CA4 Value
Default: Process Error
Selections: Same as in menu [6111]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d9b Profibus slot/index 170/123
Profinet IO index 19867 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d92
Fieldbus format UInt Profinet IO index 19858
Modbus format UInt Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt

Analogue Comparator 4, Level High Analogue Comparator 4, Type
[6142] [6144]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level Type
[6112]. [6114]
6142 CA4 Level HI 6144 CA4 Type

Default: 100rpm Default: Window
Range: Enter a value for the high level. Hysteresis 0 Hysteresis type comparator
Long
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
Fieldbus format 0.1 Hz, 0.1°C, 1 kWh, Fieldbus format UInt
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 Modbus format UInt
via process value
Modbus format EInt
Analogue Comparator 4, Polar
Analogue Comparator 4, [6145]
Level Low [6143] Polar [6115]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1, level low
[6113]. 6145 CA4 Polar
Default: Bipolar
6143 CA4 Level LO
Unipolar 0 Absolute value of [6111] used
Default: -100 rpm
Bipolar 1 Signed value of [6111] used
Range: Enter a value for the low level.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4da1
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, Modbus format UInt
1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001
via process value
Modbus format EInt

Digital comparator Setup [615] Digital Comparator 3 [6153]
Digital comparators, parameter group. Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151].
Digital Comparator 1 [6151] 6153 CD 3

Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 (CD1). Default: Trip
The output signal CD1 is set high if the selected input Selection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.
signal is active. See Fig. 150.
The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay Communication information
outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43477
[560]. Profibus slot/index 170/126
+ Fieldbus format UInt
Digital signal: DComp 1 Signal: CD1 Modbus format UInt
Menu [6151]
-
(NG_06-F126)
Digital Comparator 4 [6154]
Fig. 150 Digital comparator Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151].
6151 CD1 6154 CD 4

Default: Run Default: Ready
Selection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”. Selection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d4f EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d96
Digital Comparator 2 [6152]

Function is identical to digital comparator 1 [6151].
6152 CD 2
Default: DigIn 1
Selection: Same selections as for “DigOut 1 [541]”.
Modbus format UInt

11.8.2 Logic Output Y [620] Menu [620] now holds the expression for Logic Y:
By means of an expression editor, the comparator signals can CA1&!A2&CD1
be logically combined into the Logic Y function. which is to be read as:
The expression editor has the following features:
(CA1&!A2)&CD1
• The following signals can be used:
CA1, CA2, CD1, CD2 or LZ (or LY) NOTE: Set menu [624] to "." to finish the expression
• The following signals can be inverted: when only two comparators are required for Logic Y.
!A1, !A2, !D1, !D2, or !LZ (or !LY)
• The following logical operators are available: Y Comp 1 [621]
"+" : OR operator
Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function.
"&" : AND operator
"^" : EXOR operator
621 Y Comp 1
Expressions according to the following truth table can be
made: Default: CA1
CA1 0
Input Result !A1 1
A B & (AND) + (OR) ^(EXOR) CA2 2
0 0 0 0 0 !A2 3
0 1 0 1 1 CD1 4
!D1 5
1 0 0 1 1
CD2 6
1 1 1 1 0
!D2 7
The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay LZ/LY 8
outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source [560]. !LZ/!LY 9
T1 10
620 LOGIC Y
!T1 11
Stp CA1&!A2&CD1
T2 12
!T2 13
The expression must be programmed by means of the
menus [621] to [625]. CA3 14
!A3 15
Example:
CA4 16
Broken belt detection for Logic Y
!A4 17
This example describes the programming for a so-called
“broken belt detection” for fan applications. CD3 18
The comparator CA1 is set for frequency>10Hz. !D3 19
The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20%. CD4 20
The comparator CD1 is set for Run. !D4 21
The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the “broken belt C1 22

detection”. !C1 23
In menus [621]-[625] expression entered for Logic Y is C2 24
visible.
!C2 25
Set menu [621] to CA1
Set menu [622] to &
Set menu [623] to !A2
Set menu [624] to &
Set menu [625] to CD1

Communication information Y Operator 2 [624]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43411 Selects the second operator for the logic Y function.
624 Y Operator 2
Fieldbus format UInt Default: &
Modbus format UInt When · (dot) is selected, the Logic Y
. 0 expression is finished (when only two
expressions are tied together).
Y Operator 1 [622]
& 1 &=AND
Selects the first operator for the logic Y function.
+ 2 +=OR
622 Y Operator 1 ^ 3 ^=EXOR
Default: &
& 1 &=AND
+ 2 +=OR
^ 3 ^=EXOR EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d56
Communication information Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d54 Y Comp 3 [625]
Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function.
Modbus format UInt
625 Y Comp 3
Default: CD1
Y Comp 2 [623]
Selection: Same as menu [621]
Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function.
623 Y Comp 2 Communication information

Default: !A2
Selection: Same as menu [621] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d57
Communication information Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt

11.8.3 Logic Output Z [630] Z Comp 2 [633]
Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function.
630 LOGIC Z
Stp CA1&!A2&CD1 633 Z Comp 2
Default: !A2
The expression must be programmed by means of the Selection: Same as menu [621]
menus [631] to [635].
Z Comp 1 [631] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43423
Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d5f
631 Z Comp 1 Fieldbus format UInt
Default: CA1 Modbus format UInt

Z Operator 2 [634]
Communication information Selects the second operator for the logic Z function.
Profibus slot/index 170/70 634 Z Operator 2
Default: &
Fieldbus format UInt Selection: Same as menu [624]
Modbus format UInt
Z Operator 1 [632] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43424
Selects the first operator for the logic Z function.
632 Z Operator 1 Fieldbus format UInt
Default: & Modbus format UInt

Z Comp 3 [635]
Communication information Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function.
Profibus slot/index 170/71 635 Z Comp 3
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d5e
Default: CD1
Fieldbus format UInt Selection: Same as menu [621]
Modbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt

11.8.4 Timer1 [640] Timer 1 Mode [642]
The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an Selection of mode of operation for Timer.
interval with separate On and Off times (alternate mode). In
delay mode, the output signal T1Q becomes high if the set 642 Timer1 Mode
delay time is expired. See Fig. 151.
Default: Off
Off 0
Delay 1
Timer1 Trig
Alternate 2
T1Q Communication information

Timer1 delay
Fig. 151 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d68
In alternate mode, the output signal T1Q will switch Fieldbus format UInt
automatically from high to low etc. according to the set Modbus format UInt
interval times “Timer1 T1” and “Timer 1 T2”. See Fig. 152.
The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay
outputs used in logic functions [620] and [630], or as a Timer 1 Delay [643]
virtual connection source [560]. This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay.
This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see section
NOTE: The actual timers are common for all Chapter 10.6 page 92.
parameter sets. If the actual set is changed, the timer
functionality [641] to [645] will change according set Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the first
settings but the timer value will stay unchanged. So timer after it is activated. Timer 1 can be activated by a high
initialization of the timer might differ for a set change signal on a DigIn that is set to Timer 1 or via a virtual
compared to normal triggering of a timer. destination [560].
643 Timer1Delay
Default: 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59
Timer1 Trig
T1Q
43433 hours
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43434 minutes
Timer1 T2 Timer1 T1 Timer1 T2 Timer1 T1
43435 seconds
170/82, 170/83,
Fig. 152 Profibus slot/index
170/84
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d69, 4d6a, 4d6b
Timer 1 Trig [641] Profinet IO index 19817, 19818, 19819
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s
Selection of the Timer input trigger signal.
Modbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s
641 Timer1 Trig

Default: Off
Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu
Selection:
[541].
Modbus format UInt

Timer 1 T1 [644] Timer 1 Value [649]
When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled, Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer.
this timer will automatically keep on switching according to
the independently programmable on and off times. The 649 Timer1 Value
Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be enabled by a digital input
or via a virtual connection. See Fig. 152. Timer 1 T1 sets the Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
on time in the alternate mode. Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59
644 Timer 1 T1 Communication information

Default: 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 42921 hours
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 42923 seconds
168/80, 168/81,
Profibus slot/index
Communication information 168/82
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4b69, 4b6a, 4b6b
43436 hours
Profinet IO index 19305, 19306, 19307
43438 seconds Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s
170/85, 170/86, Modbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s
Profibus slot/index
170/87
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d6c, 4d6d, 4d6e
Profinet IO index 19820, 19821, 19822 11.8.5 Timer2 [650]
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s Refer to the descriptions for Timer1.
Timer 2 Trig [651]

Timer 1 T2 [645]
Timer 1 T2 sets the off time in the alternate mode. 651 Timer2 Trig
Default: Off
645 Timer1 T2
Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu
Selection:
Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec [541].
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43451
43439 hours Profibus slot/index 170/100
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43440 minutes EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d7b
43441 seconds Profinet IO index 19835
170/88, 170/89, Fieldbus format UInt
Profibus slot/index
170/90 Modbus format UInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d6f, 4d70, 4d71
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s Timer 2 Mode [652]
652 Timer2 Mode

NOTE: “Timer 1 T1 [644]” and “Timer 1 T2 [645]” are
Default: Off
only visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate.
Modbus format UInt

Timer 2 Delay [653] Timer 2 Value [659]
Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer.
653 Timer2Delay
Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
659 Timer2 Value
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59
43453 hours Communication information
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43454 minutes 42924 hours
43455 seconds Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42925 minutes
170/102, 170/103, 42926 seconds
Profibus slot/index
170/104 168/83, 168/84,
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d7d, 4d7e, 4d7f 168/84
Profinet IO index 19837, 19838, 19839 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4b6c, 4b6d, 4b6f
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s Profinet IO index 19308, 19309, 19310
Modbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 h/m/s
Timer 2 T1 [654]
11.8.6 Counters [660]
654 Timer 2 T1 Counter functions for counting pulses and signalling on
digital output when counter reaches specified high and low
Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec limit levels.
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 The counter is counting up on positive flanks on the
triggered signal, the counter is cleared as long as the Reset
signal is active.
The counter can be automatically decremented with
43456 hours specified decrement time, if no new trigger signal has
occurred within the decrement time.
43458 seconds
The counter value is clamped to the high limit value and the
170/105, 170/106,
Profibus slot/index
170/107 digital output function (C1Q or C2Q) is active when
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d80, 4d81, 4d82 counter value equals high limit value.
Profinet IO index 19840, 19841, 19842 See Fig. 153 for more information of the counters.
6619
6613
6614
Timer 2 T2 [655]
6615
655 Timer 2 T2 6611
6612
Default: 0:00:00, hr:min:sec
541
Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59
541 = Digital Out 1 function
6611= Counter 1 trigger
Communication information 6612= Counter 1 reset
6613= Counter 1 High value
43459 hours 6614= Counter 1 Low value
6615= Counter 1 Decrement timer
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43460 minutes 6619= Counter 1 value
43461 seconds
170/108, 170/109,
Profibus slot/index Fig. 153 Counters, operating principle.
170/110
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4d83, 4d84, 4d85

Counter 1 [661] Communication information
Counter 1 parameter group. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43573
Counter 1 Trigger [6611] EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4df5
Selection of the digital output signal used as trigger signal Profinet IO index 19957
for counter 1. Counter 1 is incremented by 1 on every Fieldbus format Long, 1=1
positive flank on the trigger signal. Modbus format EInt
NOTE: Maximum counting frequency is 8 Hz. Counter 1 Low value [6614]

Sets counter 1 low limit value. Counter 1 output (C1Q) is
de-activated (low) when the counter value is equal or smaller
6611 C1 Trig
than the low value.
Default: Off
Selection: Same selections as “Digital Out 1 [541]”. NOTE: Counter high value has priority so if high and
low values are equal then the counter output is de-
activated when the value is smaller than the low
Communication information value.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4df3
6614 C1 Low Val
Profinet IO index 19955 Default: 0
Range: 0 - 10000
Modbus format UInt
Counter 1 Reset [6612] Communication information

Selection of the digital signal used as reset signal for counter Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43574
1. Counter 1 is cleared to 0 and held to 0 as long as reset Profibus slot/index 170/223
input is active (high). EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4df6
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1
NOTE: Reset input has top priority.
Modbus format EInt
6612 C1 Reset Counter 1 Decrement timer [6615]

Default: Off Sets counter 1 automatic decrement timer value. The
counter 1 is decremented by 1 after elapsed decrement time
Selection: Same selections as “Digital Out 1 [541]”.
and if no new trigger has happened within the decrement
time. The decrement timer is reset to 0 at every counter 1
Communication information trig pulse
Profibus slot/index 170/221 6615 C1 DecTimer
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4df4
Default: Off
Fieldbus format UInt Off 0 Off
Modbus format UInt
1 - 3600 1 - 3600 1 - 3600 s
Counter 1 High value [6613] Communication information

Sets counter 1 high limit value. Counter 1 value is clamped
to selected high limit value and the counter 1 output (C1Q) Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43575
is active (high) when the counter value equals the high value. Profibus slot/index 170/224
EtherCAT and CANopenindex (hex) 4df7
NOTE: Value 0 means that counter output is always
true (high).
Modbus format EInt
6613 C1 High Val

Default: 0
Range: 0 - 10000

Counter 1 Value [6619] Counter 2 High value [6623]
Parameter shows the actual value of counter 1. Function is identical to Counter 1 High value [6613].
NOTE: Counter 1 value is common for all parameter 6623 C2 High Val
sets.
Default: 0
Range: 0 - 10000
NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down.
6619 C1 Value Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43583
Default: 0 Profibus slot/index 170/232
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dff
Range: 0 - 10000
Communication information Modbus format EInt
Profibus slot/index 168/86 Counter 2 Low value [6624]
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4b6f Function is identical to Counter 1 Low value [6614].
6624 C2 Low Val
Modbus format UInt
Default: 0
Counter 2 [662] Range: 0 - 10000
Refer to description for Counter 1 [661].

Counter 2 Trigger [6621] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43584
Function is identical to Counter 1 Trigger [6611]. Profibus slot/index 170/233
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4e00
6621 C2 Trig Profinet IO index 19968
Default: Off
Modbus format EInt
Selection: Same selections as Digital Out 1 [541].
Counter 2 Decrement timer [6625]
Communication information Function is identical to Counter 1 Decrement timer [6615].
Profibus slot/index 170/230 6625 C2 DecTimer
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dfd
Default: Off
Fieldbus format UInt Off 0 Off
Modbus format UInt
1 - 3600 1 - 3600 1 - 3600 s
Counter 2 Reset [6622] Communication information

Function is identical to Counter 1 Reset [6612].
6622 C2 Reset EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4e01
Default: Off Profinet IO index 19969
Selection: Same selections as Digital Out 1 [541].
Modbus format EInt
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4dfe
Modbus format UInt

Counter 2 Value [6629] 11.8.7 Clock Logic [670]
Parameter shows the actual value of counter 2. Group 670 if only available if the drive is equipped with a
4-line type Control panel (incl. RTC).
NOTE: Counter 2 value is common for all parameter There are two Clock functions, Clock 1 and Clock 2. Each
sets. clock with separate settings for Time on, Time Off, Date on,
Date Off and Weekday. These clocks can be used for
activating/deactivating desired functions via Relay, digital
NOTE: The value is volatile and lost at power down.
output or Virtual I/O (For example creating start and stop
commands).
6629 C2 Value
Default: 0 Clock 1 [671]
Range: 0 - 10000 The time, date and weekday for clock 1 are set in these
submenus.
671 Clock 1
Clock 1 Time On [6711]
Fieldbus format UInt, 1=1 Time when the clock 1 output signal (CLK1) is activated.
Modbus format UInt
6711 Clk1TimeOn
Default: 0:00:00 (hours:minutes:seconds)
Range: 0:00:00–23:59:59
Profibus slot/index
Profinet IO index
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Clock 1 Time Off [6712]

Time when the clock 1output signal (CLK1) is deactivated.
6712 Clk1TimeOff
Default: 0:00:00 (hours:minutes:seconds)
Range: 0:00:00–23:59:59
Profibus slot/index
Profinet IO index
Fieldbus format
Modbus format

Clock 1 Date On [6713] Communication information
Date when the clock 1 output signal (CLK1) is activated. Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43612
Profibus slot/index
6713 Clk1DateOn Profinet IO index
Default: 2017-01-01 Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Range: YYYY-MM-DD (year-month-day)
NOTE: Please make sure that the correct time and

date settings are done for the real time clock, menu
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43606 group [930] “Clock”.
Profibus slot/index
Example 1:
Profinet IO index
The output CLK1 shall be active Mondays to Fridays on
Fieldbus format
working hours, e.g. 08:00-17:00. This signal is used to start
Modbus format
e.g. a fan with virtual I/O.
Clock 1 Date Off [6714] Menu Text Setting

Date when the clock output signal (CLK1) is deactivated. 6711 Clk1TimeOn 08:00
6712 Clk1TimeOff 17:00
Note that if “Clk1DateOff ” is set to an earlier date than
6713 Clk1DateOn 2017-02-01 (date in the past)
“Clk1DateOn”, the result will be that the clock is not
6714 Clk1DateOff 2099-12-31 (Date in the future)
deactivated at the set date. Clk1Weekda
6715 MTWTF- -
y
6714 Clk1DateOff 561 VIO 1 Dest Run FWD
562 VIO 1 Source Clk1
Default: 2017-01-01
Range: YYYY-MM-DD Example 2:
The output CLK1 shall be active on weekends, all day.
Menu Text Setting
6711 Clk1TimeOn 0:00:00
Profibus slot/index
6712 Clk1TimeOff 23:59:59
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 6713 Clk1DateOn 2017-02-01 (date in the past)
Profinet IO index 6714 Clk1DateOff 2099-12-31 (Date in the future)
Fieldbus format Clk1Weekda
6715 - - - - - SS
Modbus format y
561 VIO 1 Dest Run FWD
562 VIO 1 Source Clk1
Clock 1 Weekday [6715]
Weekdays when the clock function is active. Having entered
the editing mode, select or unselect the desired weekdays
Clock 2 [672]
with the cursor using the PREV and NEXT keys on the Refer to the description for Clock 1 [671].
control panel. Confirm by pressing ENTER. Exit the editing
mode and the activated weekdays will be viewed in the menu Communication information
display. The deactivated weekdays are replaced by a dash
43615, 43618, 43621,
mark “-” (e.g. “MTWTF - -”). Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:
43624, 43627
Profibus slot/index
6715 Clk1Weekday EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex)
Profinet IO index
Default: MTWTFSS (all activated)
Fieldbus format
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Modbus format
Range:
Friday, Saturday, Sunday.

11.9 View Operation/Status Torque [713]
Displays the actual shaft torque.
[700]
Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operational
data, such as speed, torque, power, etc.
713 Torque
Unit: %, Nm
11.9.1 Operation [710] Resolution: 1 %, 0.1 Nm
Process Value [711]
31003 Nm
The process value is showing the process actual value, Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:
31004 %
depending on selection done in chapter, Process Source 121/147
Profibus slot/index
[321]. 121/148
23eb Nm
23ec %
711 Process Val
1003 Nm
Profinet IO index
Depends on selected Pocess source [321] 1004 %
Unit
and Process Unit [322]. Long, 1=0.1 Nm
Fieldbus format
Long, 1=1 %
Speed: 1 rpm, 4 digits
Resolution Modbus format EInt
Other units: 3 digits
Communication information Shaft power [714]

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31001 Displays the actual shaft power. Negative sign is used when
Profibus slot/index 121/145 the shaft is generating mechanical power to the motor.
EtherCATand CANopen index (hex) 23e9
Long, 1=1rpm, 1%, 1°C 714 Shaft Power
or 0.001 if Process Value/
Fieldbus format
Process Ref using a [322] Unit: W
unit
Resolution: 1W
Modbus format EInt
Speed [712] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31005
Displays the actual shaft speed. Profibus slot/index 121/149
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23ed
712 Speed Profinet IO index 1005
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W
Unit: rpm
Modbus format EInt
Resolution: 1 rpm, 4 digits
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23ea

Electrical Power [715] Frequency [718]
Displays the actual electrical output power. Negative sign is Displays the actual output frequency.
used when the motor is generating electrical power to the
drive unit. 718 Frequency
Unit: Hz
715 El Power Resolution: 0.1 Hz
Unit: kW
Resolution: 1W
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f1
Profibus slot/index 121/150 Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 Hz
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23ee Modbus format EInt
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W
Modbus format EInt DC Link Voltage [719]
Displays the actual DC link voltage.
Current [716] 719 DC Voltage

Displays the actual output current.
Unit: V
716 Current Resolution: 0.1 V
Unit: A
Resolution: 0.1 A
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f2
Profibus slot/index 121/151 Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 V
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23ef Modbus format EInt
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 A
Modbus format EInt Heatsink Temperature [71A]
Displays the actual heatsink temperature, measured. The
signal is generated by a sensor in the IGBT module.
Output Voltage [717]
Displays the actual output voltage. 71A Heatsink Tmp
Unit: °C
717 Output Volt
Resolution: 0.1°C
Unit: V
Resolution: 0.1 V Communication information
Communication information Profibus slot/index 121/155
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31008 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f3
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f0 Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 °C
Profinet IO index 1008 Modbus format EInt
Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1 V
Modbus format EInt

PT100_1_2_3 Temp [71B] 11.9.2 Status [720]
Displays the actual PT100 temperature, for PT100 board 1.
VSD Status [721]
71B PT100 1,2,3
Indicates the overall status of the AC drive.
Unit: °C
Resolution: 1°C 721 VSD Status
Stp 1/222/333/44
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31012, 31013, 31014
Fig. 154 AC drive status
121/156
121/158 Display
Function Status value
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f4, 23f5, 23f6 position
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 °C 1 Parameter Set A,B,C,D
Modbus format EInt -Rem (remote)
Source of -Key (keyboard)
222
reference value -Com (Serial comm.)
PT100_4_5_6 Temp[71C] -Opt (option)
Displays the actual PT100 temperature, for PT100 board 2. -Rem (remote)
Source of Run/ -Key (keyboard)
333
71C PT100 4,5,6 Stop command -Com (Serial comm.)
-Opt (option)
Unit: °C
- - - -No limit active
Resolution: 1°C -VL (Voltage Limit)
44 Limit functions -SL (Speed Limit)
Communication information -CL (Current Limit)
-TL (Torque Limit)
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31097, 31098, 31099
121/241
Profibus slot/index 121/242 Example: “A/Key/Rem/TL”
121/243 This means:
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2449, 244a, 244b A: Parameter Set A is active.
Key: Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP).
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 °C
Modbus format EInt Rem: Run/Stop commands come from terminals 1-22.
TL: Torque Limit active.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f7
Modbus format UInt

Description of communication format Warning [722]
Integer values and bits used Display the actual or last warning condition. A warning
occurs if the AC drive is close to a trip condition but still in
Bit Integer representation operation. During a warning condition the red trip LED
will start to blink as long as the warning is active.
Active Parameter set, where
1-0
0=A, 1=B, 2=C, 3=D
722 Warnings
Source of Reference control value, where
4-2
0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=Option
Stp warn.msg
Source of Run/Stop/Reset command, where
7-5 The active warning message is displayed in menu [722]. If
0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=Option
no warning is active the message “No Error” is displayed.
Active limit functions, where
13 - 8
0=No limit, 1=VL, 2=SL, 3=CL, 4=TL The following warnings are possible:
Inverter is in warning (A warning condition is
14
active) Communication
Warning message
integer value
15 Inverter is tripped (A Trip condition is active)
0 No Error
Example: 1 Motor I²t
Previous example “A/Key/Rem/TL”
2 PTC
is interpreted “0/1/0/4”
In bit format this is presented as 3 Motor lost
Bit Interpretation Integer representation 4 Locked rotor
0 LSB 0 5 Ext trip

A(0) Parameter set
1 0 6 Mon MaxAlarm
2 1
7 Mon MinAlarm
3 0 Key (1) Source of control
4 0 8 Comm error
5 0
Source of 9 PT100
6 0 Rem (0)
command 11 Pump
7 0
8 0 12 Ext Mot Temp
9 0
13 LC Level
10 1
TL (4) Limit functions
11 0 14 Brake
12 0 15 Option
13 0
16 Over temp
14 0 Warning condition
15 MSB 0 Trip condition 17 Over curr F
18 Over volt D
In the example above it is assumed that we have no trip or
19 Over volt G
warning condition (the alarm LED on the control panel is
off ). 20 Over volt
21 Over speed
22 Under voltage
23 Power fault
24 Desat
25 DClink error
26 Int error
27 Ovolt m cut
28 Over voltage

Communication Digital Output Status [724]
Warning message
integer value Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays. See Fig.
156.
29 Not used
RE indicate the status of the relays on position:
30 Crane Comm
31 Encoder
1 Relay1
2 Relay2
3 Relay3
DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position:
Profibus slot/index 121/160 1 DigOut1
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f8 2 DigOut2
The status of the associated output is shown.
Modbus format UInt 1 High
0 Low
See also the Chapter 12. page 217. The example in Fig. 156 indicates that DigOut1 is active
and Digital Out 2 is not active. Relay 1 is active, relay 2 and
3 are not active.
Digital Input Status [723]
Indicates the status of the digital inputs. See Fig. 155.
724 DigOutStatus
1 DigIn 1
2 DigIn 2
Stp RE 100 DO 10
3 DigIn 3
4 DigIn 4 Fig. 156 Digital output status example
5 DigIn 5
6 DigIn 6 Communication information
7 DigIn 7
8 DigIn 8
The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicate EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23fa
the status of the associated input: Profinet IO index 1018
1 High Fieldbus format UInt,
bit 0=DigOut1,
0 Low bit 1=DigOut2
Modbus format bit 8=Relay1
The example in Fig. 155 indicates that DigIn 1, bit 9=Relay2
DigIn 3 and DigIn 6 are active at this moment. bit 10=Relay3
723 DigIn Status

Stp 1010 0100
Fig. 155 Digital input status example
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23f9
Fieldbus format UInt,
bit 0=DigIn1,
Modbus format
bit 7=DigIn8

Analogue Input Status [725] Analogue Output Status [727]
Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2. Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 159. E.g. if
4-20 mA output is used, the value 20% equals to 4 mA.
725 AnIn 1 2
Stp -100% 65% 727 AnOut 1 2
Stp -100% 65%
Fig. 157 Analogue input status
Fig. 159 Analogue output status
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31019, 31020 Communication information
Profibus slot/index 121/163, 121/164 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31023, 31024
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23fb, 23fc Profibus slot/index 121/167, 121/168
Profinet IO index 1019, 1020 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23ff, 2400
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% Profinet IO index 1023, 1024
Modbus format EInt Fieldbus format Long, 1=1%
Modbus format EInt
The first row indicates the analogue inputs.
The first row indicates the Analogue outputs.
1 AnIn 1
2 AnIn 2 1 AnOut 1
2 AnOut 2
Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the
status of the belonging input is shown in %: Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the
status of the belonging output is shown in %:
-100% AnIn1 has a negative 100% input value
65% AnIn2 has a 65% input value -100%AnOut1 has a negative 100% output value
65%AnOut2 has a 65% output value
So the example in Fig. 157 indicates that both the Analogue
inputs are active. The example in Fig. 159 indicates that both the Analogue
outputs are active.
NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values
based on the full range/scale of the in- or output; so NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values
related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. based on the full range/scale of the in- or output; so
related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA.
Analogue Input Status [726]

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4. I/O board Status [728] - [72A]
Indicates the status for the additional I/O on option boards
1 (B1), 2 (B2) and 3 (B3).
726 AnIn 3 4
Stp -100% 65%
728 IO B1
Stp RE 000 DI100
Fig. 158 Analogue input status

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31021, 31022 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31025 - 31027
Profibus slot/index 121/165, 121/166 Profibus slot/index 121/170 - 172
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 23fd, 23fe EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2401 - 2403
Profinet IO index 1021, 1022 Profinet IO index 1025 - 1027
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% Fieldbus format UInt,
Modbus format EInt bit 0=DigIn1
bit 1=DigIn2
bit 2=DigIn3
Modbus format
bit 8=Relay1
bit 9=Relay2
bit 10=Relay3

Area D Stat[72B] 11.9.3 Stored values [730]
These menus are not visible in the control panel display. The shown values are the actual values built up over time.
Only used in EmoSoftCom PC-tool (optional) and can be Values are stored at power down and updated again at power
read via fieldbus or serial communication. up.
Area D LSB [72B1]

Status bits 0 to 15. Run Time [731]
see Chapter 10.2.1 page 83 Displays the total time that the AC drive has been in the
Communication information Run Mode.
731 Run Time
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 20b4 Unit: h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)
Range: 00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59
Modbus format UInt
Area D MSB [72B2] Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:
31028:31029:31030
Status bits 16 and up. (hr:min:sec)
see Chapter 10.2.1 page 83 121/172:121/173: 121/
Profibus slot/index
174
Communication information EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2404:2405:2406
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 30182 Profinet IO index 1028:1029:1030
Profibus slot/index 118/91 Fieldbus format Long, 1=1h:m:s
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 20b6 Modbus format Eint
Fieldbus format UInt Reset Run Time [7311]
Modbus format UInt Reset the run time counter. The stored information will be
erased and a new registration period will start.
VIO Status[72C]
7311 Reset RunTm
Shows the values of the 8 Virtual IO´s in menu[560]
Default: No
72C VIO Status
No 0
Stp 00000000
Yes 1

EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 20b5 EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2007
NOTE: After reset the setting automatically reverts to

“No”.
Mains time [732]

Displays the total time that the AC drive has been connected
to the mains supply. This timer cannot be reset.
732 Mains Time

Unit: h: mm:ss (hours: minutes: seconds)
Range: 00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59

Communication information 11.10 View Trip Log [800]
31031:31032:31033 Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged trip
(hr:min:sec)
data. In total the AC drive saves the last 9 trips in the trip
121/175:121/176: 121/
Profibus slot/index
177
memory. The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO principle
2407 : 2408 :
(First In, First Out). Every trip in the memory is logged on
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) the time of the “Run Time [731]” counter. At every trip, the
2409
Profinet IO index 1031:1032:1033 actual values of several parameter are stored and available for
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1h:m:s troubleshooting.
Modbus format Eint
11.10.1 With four line PPU and real

Energy [733] time clock
Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy Every trip in the memory is logged on actual time and date.
reset [7331] took place. At every trip, the actual values of several parameter are stored
and available for troubleshooting.
733 Energy
Unit: Wh (shows Wh, kWh, MWh or GWh) 11.10.2 Trip Message log [810]
0.0–1GWh, Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred.
Range: When a trip occurs the status menus are copied to the trip
Counter will restart at 0 after 1GWh
message log. There are nine trip message logs [810]–[890].
When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear.
After reset of occurred trip, the trip message will be removed
and menu [100] will be indicated.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 240a
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 Wh 8x0 Trip message
Modbus format EInt
Unit: h: m (hours: minutes)
Reset Energy [7331] Range: 0h: 0m–65355h: 59m

Resets the energy counter. The stored information will be
erased and a new registration period will start.
810 Ext Trip
7331 Rst Energy
For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message table
Default: No for warnings, [722].
Selection: No, Yes
NOTE: Bits 0–5 used for trip message value. Bits 6–15
for internal use.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2006 Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31101
Profinet IO index 6 Profibus slot/index 121/245
Fieldbus format UInt EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 244d
Modbus format UInt Profinet IO index 1101
Modbus format UInt
NOTE: After reset the setting automatically goes back
to “No”.

Trip message [811]-[81Q] Example:
The information from the status menus are copied to the Fig. 160 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Over
trip message log when a trip occurs. temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13 minutes
in Run time.
Copied
Trip menu Description
from 830 Over temp
811 711 Process Value Stp 1396h:13m
812 712 Speed
Fig. 160 Trip 3
813 712 Torque
814 714 Shaft Power
11.10.3 Trip Messages [82P] - [89P]
815 715 Electrical Power Same information as for menu [810].
816 716 Current Communication information
817 717 Output voltage Trip log list
31151–31185 2
818 718 Frequency
31201–31235 3
819 719 DC Link voltage 31251–31285 4
Modbus Instance no/
31301–31335 5
81A 71A Heatsink Temperature DeviceNet no:
31351–31385 6
31401–31435 7
81B 71B PT100_1, 2, 3
31451–31485 8
81C 721 AC drive Status 31501–31535 9
Trip log list
81D 723 Digital input status 122/40–122/74 2
122/90–122/124 3
81E 724 Digital output status
122/140–122/174 4
81F 725 Analogue input status 1-2 Profibus slot/index 122/190–122/224 5
122/240–123/18 6
81G 726 Analogue input status 3-4 123/35 - 123/68 7
123/85–123/118 8
81H 727 Analogue output status 1-2
123/135–123/168 9
81I 728 I/O status option board 1 Trip log list
247e - 24b0 2
81J 729 I/O status option board 2
24b1 - 24e2 3
81K 72A I/O status option board 3 24e3 - 2514 4
EtherCAT and CANopen
2515 - 2546 5
81L 731 Run Time index (hex)
2547 - 2578 6
81M 732 Mains Time 2579 - 25aa 7
25ab - 25dc 8
81N 733 Energy 9
25dd - 260e
81O 310 Process reference Trip log list
1151 - 1185 2
81P 72C VIO Status 1201 - 1235 3
1251 - 1285 4
81Q 71C PT100_4, 5, 6
Profinet IO index 1301 - 1335 5
1351 - 1385 6
Communication information 1401 - 1435 7
1451 - 1485 8
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31102 - 31135 1501 - 1535 9
121/246 - 254, Fieldbus format
Profibus slot/index See Trip 811 - 81O
122/0 - 24 Modbus format
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 244e - 246f
All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data. For
Depends on parameter,
Fieldbus format example DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1
see respective parameter.
contains the same data information as 31151 in alarm list 2.
Depends on parameter,
Modbus format
see respective parameter.

11.10.4 Reset Trip Log [8A0] 11.11 System Data [900]
Resets the content of the 9 trip memories. Main menu for viewing all the AC drive system data.
8A0 Reset Trip

11.11.1 VSD Data [920]
Default: No
No 0
VSD Type [921]
Yes 1 Shows the AC drive type according to the type number.
The options are indicated on the type plate of the AC drive.
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 8 NOTE: If the control board is not configured, then
Profibus slot/index 0/7 type shown is FDU48-###-##.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 2008
Profinet IO index 8
Modbus format UInt 921 FDU2.0
Stp FDU48-046-5X
NOTE: After the reset the setting goes automatically Example of type
back to “NO”. The message “OK” is displayed for 2
sec. Communication information
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 240d
Modbus format UInt
Examples:
FDU48-046-5XAC drive-series
- suited for 380-480 volt mains supply, and a
- rated output current of 46 A.
- IP Class = IP54 and IP55 (2X = IP20/21)
Software [922]
Shows the software version number of the AC drive.
Fig. 161 gives an example of the version number.
922 Software
Stp V 4.32 -
Fig. 161 Example of software version
V 4.32 = Software version

- 03.07 = option version, is only visible and valid for special
software, type OEM adapted software.
03 = (major) special software variant number
07= (minor) revision of this special software
31038 software version
31039 option version
Profibus slot/index 121/182-183
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 240e, 240f
Profinet IO index 1038, 1039
Modbus format UInt

Table 41 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, Unit name [923]
software version
Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or
Bit Example Description customer identity. The function enables the user to define a
name with max 12 characters. Use the Prev and Next key to
7–0 32 minor move the cursor to the required position. Then use the +
13–8 4 major and - keys to scroll in the character list. Confirm the
character by moving the cursor to the next position by
release pressing the Next key. See section User-defined Unit [323].
00: V, release version
15–14
01: P, pre-release Example
version Create user name USER 15.
10: β, Beta version
11: α, Alpha version 1. When in the menu [923] press Next to move the
cursor to the right most position.
Table 42 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 2. Press the + key until the character U is displayed.
option version 3. Press Next.
4. Then press the + key until S is displayed and con-
Bit Example Description firm with Next.
5. Repeat until you have entered USER15.
7–0 07 Minor option version
15–8 03 Major option version 923 USER 15
Default: No characters shown
NOTE: It is important that the software version
displayed in menu [922] is the same software version Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42301–42312
number as the software version number written on Profibus slot/index 165/225–236
the title page of this instruction manual. If not, the EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 48fd - 4908
functionality as described in this manual may differ Profinet IO index 18685 - 18696
from the functionality of the AC drive. Fieldbus format UInt
Modbus format UInt
Build Info [9221]
Software version created, Date and time. When sending a unit name you send one character at a time
starting at the right most position.
9221 Build Info

Stp 11.12 Bluetooth (Optional) device
Default: YY:MM:DD:HH:MM:SS ID number
To connect to the mobile App “EmoPPU” (Android & IOS
Build ID [9222] Appstores) you need a 4 line PPU unit with Bluetooth
Software identification code. communication (optional, see chapter Option ). For
establishing communication between PPU and App please
use the unique Bluetooth ID number in AC drive menu
9222 Build ID “[924] Bluetooth ID”.
Stp 0E1B7F9E
Example: 0E1B7F9E Bluetooth ID [924]
Unique ID number for connecting to “EmoPPU” app. .
924 Bluetooth ID
Default: NA

Communication information Date [932]
Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42620 Actual date, displayed as YYYY-MM-DD. Adjustable
Profibus slot/index 167/34 setting.
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a3c
932 Date
Fieldbus format Uint. 1=1
Modbus format Uint Default: 2013-01-01
11.12.1 Real Time clock
42604, 42605,
In the 4 line Control panel (PPU) there is a built-in Real Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no:
42606 (Y,M,D)
time clock. This means that actual date and time will be 167/18,167/19,
shown at e.g. a trip condition. There is a built-in capacitor Profibus slot/index
167/20
to be able to keep the clock running if the power disappear. EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a2c, 4a2d, 4a2e
In case of loss of power, the backup time for the Real time 18988, 18989,
Profinet IO index
clock function is at least 60 days. 18990
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 Y/M/D
Actual date and time will be set from factory. Date and time
Modbus format EInt
is shown and can be set in following menus.
Clock [930]
This menu group displays actual time and date, read only. Weekday [933]
Time and date are factory set to CET (Central European Display of actual weekday, read only.
mean time). Adjust if required in following sub-menus.
933 Weekday
930 1240rpm
Clock Default: Monday
2017-01-23 12:34.40 Monday 0
Run Key/Key
Tuesday 1
Wednesday 2
Time [931]
Thursday 3
Actual time, displayed as HH:MM:SS. Adjustable setting.
Friday 4
931 Time Saturday 5
Default: 00:00:00 Sunday 6

42601, 42602, Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42607
42603 (h,m,s) Profibus slot/index 167/21
167/15, 167/16, EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a2f
Profibus slot/index
167/17
EtherCAT and CANopen index (hex) 4a29, 4a2a, 4a2b
Fieldbus format Long
18985, 18986,
Profinet IO index Modbus format EInt
18987
Fieldbus format Long, 1=1 h/m/s
Modbus format EInt

12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance
12.1 Trips, warnings and limits “Warning”

• The inverter is close to a trip limit.
In order to protect the AC drive the principal operating
variables are continuously monitored by the system. If one • The Warning relay or output is active (if selected).
of these variables exceeds the safety limit an error/warning
• The Trip LED is flashing.
message is displayed. In order to avoid any possibly
dangerous situations, the inverter sets itself into a stop Mode • The accompanying warning message is displayed in
called Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display. window “[722] Warning”.
Trips will always stop the AC drive. Trips can be divided into • One of the warning indications is displayed (area F of
normal and soft trips, depending on the setup Trip Type, see the display).
menu “[250] Autoreset”. Normal trips are default. For
normal trips the AC drive stops immediately, i.e. the motor
“Limits”
coasts naturally to a standstill. For soft trips the AC drive • The inverter is limiting torque and/or frequency to avoid
stops by ramping down the speed, i.e. the motor decelerates a trip.
to a standstill. • The Limit relay or output is active (if selected).
“Normal Trip” • The Trip LED is flashing.

• The AC drive stops immediately, the motor coasts to a • One of the Limit status indications is displayed (area D
standstill. of the display).
• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected).
• The Trip LED is on.
• The accompanying trip message is displayed.
• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the
display).
• After reset command, the trip message will disappear and
menu [100] will be indicated.
“Soft Trip”
• the AC drive stops by decelerating to a standstill.
During the deceleration.
• The accompanying trip message is displayed, including
an additional soft trip indicator “S” before the trip time.
• The Trip LED is flashing.
• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected).
After standstill is reached.
• The Trip LED is on.
• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected).
• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the
display).
• After reset command, the trip message will disappear and
menu [100] will be indicated.
Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more
indicators to show that the inverter is in an “abnormal”
situation.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 217

Table 43 List of trips and warnings
12.2 Trip conditions, causes
Trip/Warning
Selections
Trip
(Normal/
Warning
indicators
and remedial action
messages The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid
Soft) (Area D)
to find the cause of a system failure and to how to solve any
Motor I2t Trip/Off/Limit Normal/Soft I2t problems that arise. An AC drive is mostly just a small part
PTC Trip/Off Normal/Soft of a complete AC drive system. Sometimes it is
Motor PTC On Normal difficult to determine the cause of the failure, although the
AC drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy to
PT100 Trip/Off Normal/Soft
find the right cause of the failure. Good knowledge of the
Motor lost Trip/Off Normal complete drive system is therefore
Locked rotor Trip/Off Normal necessary. Contact your supplier if you have any questions.
Ext trip Via DigIn Normal/Soft The AC drive is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid
Ext Mot Temp Via DigIn Normal/Soft trips by limiting torque, overvolt etc.
Mon MaxAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after
Mon MinAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft commissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrect
Comm error Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft settings or even bad connections.
Encoder Trip/Off Normal Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of
failure-free operation can be caused by changes in the system
Pump Via Option Normal
or in its environment (e.g. wear).
Over temp On Normal OT
Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are
Over curr F On Normal
generally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference. Be sure
Over volt D On Normal that the installation fulfils the demands for installation
Over volt G On Normal stipulated in the EMC directives. See chapter, EMC and
Over volt On Normal standards.
Under voltage On Normal LV Sometimes the so-called “Trial and error” method is a
Trip/Off/Warn quicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This can
LC Level Normal/Soft LCL be done at any level, from changing settings and functions to
Via DigIn
disconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives.
Desat ### * On Normal
DClink error On Normal The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether certain
trips occur at certain moments. The Trip Log also records
Power Fault
On Normal the time of the trip in relation to the run time counter.
PF #### *
Ovolt m cut On Normal
WARNING!
Over voltage Warning VL If it is necessary to open the AC drive or any
Safe stop Warning SST part of the system (motor cable housing,
conduits, electrical panels, cabinets, etc.) to
Brake Trip/Off/Warn Normal
inspect or take measure-ments as suggested in this
OPTION On Normal instruction manual, it is absolutely necessary to read
Internal error Normal and follow the safety instructions in the manual.
*) Refer to table Table 44regarding which Desat or

Power Fault is triggered.
218 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

12.2.1 Technically qualified
personnel
Installation, commissioning, demounting, making
measurements, etc., of or at the AC drive may only be
carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task.
12.2.2 Opening the AC drive
WARNING!
Always switch the mains voltage off if it is
necessary to open the AC drive and wait at
least 7 minutes to allow the capacitors to
discharge.
WARNING!
In case of malfunctioning always check the
DC-link voltage, or wait one hour after the
mains voltage has been switched off, before
dismantling the AC drive for repair.
The connections for the control signals and the switches are
isolated from the mains voltage. Always take adequate
precautions before opening the AC drive.
12.2.3 Precautions to take with a

connected motor
driven machine, the mains voltage must always first be
disconnected from the AC drive. Wait at least 7 minutes
before continuing.
12.2.4 Autoreset Trip

If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has been
reached, the trip message hour counter is marked with an
“A”.
830 OVERVOLT G
Trp A 345:45:12
Fig. 162 Autoreset trip
Fig. 162 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]:

Overvoltage G trip after the maximum Autoreset attempts
took place after 345 hours, 45 minutes and 12 seconds of
run time.

Table 44 Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action
Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Size**

- Check on mechanical overload on the
2t I2t value is exceeded. motor or the machinery (bearings,
Motor I
- Overload on the motor according to the gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
“I2t”
programmed I2t settings. - Change the Motor I2t Current setting in
menu group [230]
Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum motor or the machinery (bearings,
level. gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
PTC - Check the motor cooling system.
NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/ - Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high
PT100 is used. load.
- Set PTC, menu [234] to OFF
motor or the machinery (bearings,
Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum
gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
level. 002 -
Motor PTC - Check the motor cooling system.
105
- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high
NOTE: Only valid if [237] is enabled.
load.
- Set PTC, menu [237] to OFF
Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximum motor or the machinery (bearings,
level. gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
PT100 - Check the motor cooling system.
NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/ - Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high
PT100 is used. load.
- Set PT100 to OFF, menu [234]
- Check the motor voltage on all phases.
- Check for loose or poor motor cable
Phase loss or too great imbalance on the connections
Motor lost
motor phases - If all connections are OK, contact your
supplier
- Set motor lost alarm to OFF.
- Check for mechanical problems at the
Torque limit at motor standstill: motor or the machinery connected to the
Locked rotor
- Mechanical blocking of the rotor. motor
- Set locked rotor alarm to OFF.
- Check the equipment that initiates the
External input (DigIn 1-8) active: external input
Ext trip
- active low function on the input. - Check the programming of the digital
inputs DigIn 1-8
- Check the equipment that initiates the
External input (DigIn 1-8) active: external input
Ext Mot Temp
- active low function on the input. - Check the programming of the digital
inputs DigIn 1-8
Internal error Internal alarm Contact service
-Check the load condition of the machine
Max alarm level (overload) has been
Mon MaxAlarm -Check the monitor setting in section 11.6.1, page
reached.
161.
-Check the load condition of the machine
Min alarm level (underload) has been
Mon MinAlarm -Check the monitor setting in section 11.6.1, page
reached.
161.


- Check cables and connection of the
serial communication.
- Check all settings with regard to the
Comm error Error on serial communication (option)
serial communication
- Restart the equipment including the
AC drive
Lost encoder board, encoder cable or - Check encoder board.
encoder pulses. - Check encoder cable and signals.
Motor speed deviation in between reference - Check motor operation.
Encoder and measured speed detected. - Check speed deviation settings [22G#].
- Check speed PI controller settings [37#].
NOTE: Only valid if option board Encoder is - Check torque limit setting [351]
used. - Disable encoder, set menu [22B] to OFF.
No master pump can be selected due to - Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback
error in feedback signalling. signals
Pump
- Check settings with regard to the pump feedback
NOTE: Only used in Pump Control. digital inputs
- Check the cooling of the AC drive cabinet.
Heatsink temperature too high:
- Check the functionality of the built-in fans. The
- Too high ambient temperature of the
fans must switch on automatically if the heatsink
AC drive
Over temp temperature gets too high. At power up the fans
- Insufficient cooling
are briefly switched on.
- Too high current
- Check AC drive and motor rating
- Blocked or stuffed fans
- Clean fans
Motor current exceeds the peak AC drive
- Check the acceleration time settings and
current:
make them longer if necessary.
- Too short acceleration time.
- Check the motor load.
- Too high motor load
- Check on bad motor cable connections
Over curr F - Excessive load change
- Check on bad earth cable connection
- Soft short-circuit between phases or
- Check on water or moisture in the motor housing
phase to earth
and cable connections.
- Poor or loose motor cable connections
- Lower the level of IxR Compensation [352]
- Too high IxR Compensation level
Over volt Too high DC Link voltage:
- Check the deceleration time settings and make
D(eceleration) - Too short deceleration time with
them longer if necessary.
respect to motor/machine inertia.
Over volt - Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and
- Too small brake resistor malfunctioning
G(eneration) the functionality of the Brake chopper (if used)
Brake chopper
Over volt (Mains) - Check the main supply voltage
Too high DC Link voltage, due to too high
O(ver) volt - Try to take away the interference cause or use
mains voltage
M(ains) cut other main supply lines.
- Make sure all three phases are properly connected
Too low DC Link voltage: and that the terminal screws are tightened.
- Too low or no supply voltage - Check that the mains supply voltage is within the
Under voltage - Mains voltage dip due to starting other limits of the AC drive.
major power consuming machines on - Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused
the same line. by other machinery
- Use the function low voltage override [421]
Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir. - Check liquid cooling
External input (DigIn 1-8) active: - Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the
LC Level - active low function on the input. external input
NOTE: Only valid for AC drive types with - Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn
Liquid Cooling option. 1-8
OPTION If an Option specific trip occurs Check the description of the specific option


Desat - Check on bad motor cable connections 002 -105
Desat U+ * - Check on bad earth cable connections
Failure in output stage, - Check on water and moisture in the
Desat U- *
- desaturation of IGBTs motor housing and cable connections
Desat V+ * - Hard short circuit between phases or - Check that the rating plate data of the motor is
Desat V- * phase to earth correctly entered. 090 & Up
- Earth fault - Check the brake resistor, brake IGBT and wiring.
Desat W+ *
- For size B - D also the Brake IGBT - For size G and up, check the cables from the
Desat W- * PEBBs to the motor, that all are in correct order in
Desat BCC * parallell connection
- Make sure all three phases are properly connected

and that the terminal screws are tightened.
DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum - Check that the mains supply voltage is within the
DC link error
level limits of the AC drive.
- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused
by other machinery.
One of the PF (Power Fault) trips below has - Check the PF errors and try to determine the
Power Fault
occured, but could not be determined. cause. The trip history can be helpful.
- Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and
PF Fan Err * Error in fan module 090 & Up
blocking material in fan module.
PF HCB Err* Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) - Check mains supply voltage 060 & Up
- Check motor.
Error in current balancing:
- Check fuses and line connections
PF Curr Err * - between different modules. 300 & Up
- Check the individual motor current leads with an
- between two phases within one module.
clamp on amp meter.
Error in voltage balancing, overvoltage
- Check motor.
PF Overvolt * detected in one of the power modules 300 & Up
- Check fuses and line connections.
(PEBB)
PF Comm Err * Internal communication error Contact service
PF Int Temp * Internal temperature too high Check internal fans
PF Temp Err * Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service
- Check mains supply voltage
PF DC Err * DC-link error and mains supply fault 060 & Up
- Check mains supply voltage
PF Sup Err * Mains supply fault
Powerboard micro controller reset by
PF PBuC*
watchdog.
- Check Brake acknowledge signal wiring to selected
digital input.
- Check programming of digital input DigIn 1-8,
[520].
Brake tripped on brake fault (not released) - Check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brake
Brake
or Brake not engaged during stop. circuit.
- Check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal is
wired from brake limit switch.
- Check brake contactor.
- Check settings [33C], [33D], [33E], [33F].
* = 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 300–3000 A)

** = If no size is mentioned in this column, the information is valid for all sizes.

12.3 Maintenance
The AC drive is designed to require minimum of servicing
and maintenance. There are however some things which
must be checked regularly in order to optimise product life
time.
• Keep the AC drive unit clean and cooling efficient (clean
air inlets, heatsink profile, parts, components, etc)
• There is an internal fan that should be inspected and
cleaned from dust if necessary.
• If AC drives are built into cabinets, also check and clean
the dust filters of the cabinets regularly.
• Check external wiring, connections and control signals.
• Check tightening of all terminal screws regularly, espe-
cially important are power and motor cable connections
Preventive maintenance can optimise the product life time
and secure trouble free operation without interruptions.
For more information on maintenance, please contact your
CG Drives & Automation service partner.
Precautions to take with a connected motor
NOTE: Refer to motor manufacturers instruction manual

for motor maintenance requirements.

driven machine, the mains voltage must always first be
disconnected from the drive unit.

13. Options
The standard options available are described here briefly.
Some of the options have their own instruction or
13.2 External control panel
installation manual. For more information please contact kits (4-line)
your supplier. See also in “Technical catalogue AC drives”
for more info. 13.2.1 Control panel kit, including
blank panel
13.1 Control panel
Control panel with a 4-line display. Part number Description
01-6878-40 Control panel kit (size B)

Part number
01-6879-40 Control panel kit (size C)
Description
IP54 IP20/21 01-6880-40 Control panel kit (size D and up)
01-6520-00 01-6521-00 4-line PPU (standard)
4-line PPU with Bluetooth
01-6520-10 01-6521-10
(optional)
Fig. 164 Control panel kit, including blank panel.
External control panel IP54 suitable for mounting on a

cabinet door. This option is to be used in combination with
an AC drive module ordered with a built-in control panel.
13.2.2 Control panel kit, including

control panel
Part number Description
01-6878-00 Standard PPU (size B)
Fig. 163 Control panel with 4-line display. 01-6878-10 PPU with Bluetooth (size B)
01-6879-00 Standard PPU (size C)
The display is back lit and consists of 4 rows, each with
01-6879-10 PPU with Bluetooth (size C)
space for 20 characters. The Control panel is equipped with
real time clock function. This means that actual date and 01-6880-00 Standard PPU (size D and up)
time will be shown at e.g. a trip condition. 01-6880-10 PPU with Bluetooth (size D and up)
There is also an optional Control panel with Bluetooth
communication available for connection with cellphone or
tablet.
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Options 225

13.4 Handheld Control Panel 2.0
Handheld Control Panel 2.0 complete for

01-5039-00 FDU/VFX2.0 or CDU/CDX 2.0
2-line PPU
Handheld Control Panel 2.0 complete for
01-5039-30 FDU/VFX2.0 or CDU/CDX 2.0
4-line PPU
Fig. 165 Control panel kit, including control panel.
External control panel IP54 suitable for mounting on a

panel door. This option is to be used in combination with
an AC drive module ordered with a blank control panel.
13.3 External control panel

options (2-line)
Panel kit complete including panel (2-line

01-3957-00
PPU)
01-3957-01 Panel kit complete including blank panel
Mounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232-cable are

available as options for the control panel. These options may
be useful, for example for mounting a control panel in a Fig. 167 Handheld Control Panel 2.0 (2-line PPU).
cabinet door.
The Handheld Control Panel - HCP 2.0 is a complete
control panel, easy to connect to the AC drive, for
temporary use when e.g. commissioning, servicing and so
on.
The HCP has full functionality including memory. It is
possible to set parameters, view signals, actual values, fault
logger information and so on. It is also possible to use the
memory to copy all data (such as parameter set data and
motor data) from one AC drive to the HCP and then load
this data to other AC drives.
Fig. 166 Control panel in mounting cassette
Fig. 168 Handheld Control Panel 2.0 (4-line PPU).
226 Options CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

13.5 Gland kits 13.7 Brake chopper
Gland kits are available for frame sizes B, C and D. All AC drive sizes AC drives with cable inlet on short side
can be fitted with an optional built-in brake chopper. The
Optional gland kits are available for IP54 frame sizes B, C,
brake resistor must be mounted outside the AC drive. The
D, C69 and D69.
choice of the resistor depends on the application switch-on
Metal EMC glands are used for motor and brake resistor duration and duty-cycle. This option can not be after
cables. mounted.
Frame WARNING!
Part Number Current (dimension)
size The table gives the minimum values of the
brake resistors. Do not use resistors lower
01-4601-21 3 - 6 A (M16 - M20)
than this value. The AC drive can trip or even
01-4601-22 8 - 10 A (M16 - M25) B be damaged due to high braking currents.
01-4601-23 13 - 18 A (M16 - M32)
01-4399-01 26 - 31 A (M12 - M32) The following formula can be used to define the power of
C the connected brake resistor:
01-4399-00 37 - 46 A (M12 - M40)
01-4833-00 61 - 74 A (M20 - M50) D (Brake level VDC)2
Presistor = x ED
01-7248-00 2 - 10 A (M20 - M25) C69 Rmin
01-7248-10 13 - 25 A (M20 - M32) C69
Where:
01-7247-00 33 - 58 A (M20 - M40) D69
Presistor required power of brake resistor
Brake level VDC brake voltage level (see Table 45)
13.6 EmoSoftCom Rmin minimum allowable brake resistor
EmoSoftCom is an optional software that runs on a personal (see Table 46, Table 47 and Table 48)
computer. It can also be used to load parameter settings
from the AC drive to the PC for backup and printing. ED effective braking period. Defined as:
Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact
CG Drives & Automation sales for further information. ED = tbr
120 [s]
tbr Active braking time at nominal braking

power during a 2 minute operation
cycle.
Maximum value of ED = 1, meaning continuous braking.
Table 45
Supply voltage (VAC)

Brake level (VDC)
(set in menu [21B]
220–240 380
380–415 660
440–480 780
500–525 860
550–600 1000
660–690 1150

Table 46 Brake resistor FDU48 V types
Rmin [ohm] if Rmin [ohm] if Table 47 Brake resistor FDU52 V types

Type supply 380–415 supply 440–480
VAC VAC Rmin [ohm] if Rmin [ohm] if
FDU48- Type supply 440–480 supply 500–525
43 50 VAC VAC
003
-004 43 50 FDU52-
50 55
-006 43 50 003
-008 43 50 -004 50 55
-010 43 50 -006 50 55
-013 43 50 -008 50 55
-018 43 50 -010 50 55
-025 26 30 -013 50 55
-026 26 30 -018 50 55
-030 26 30 -026 30 32
-031 26 30 -031 30 32
-036 17 20 -037 20 22
-037 17 20 -046 20 22
-045 17 20 -061 12 14
-046 17 20 -074 12 14
-058 15.5 19
-060 10 12 Table 48 Brake resistor FDU69 V types
-061 10 12 Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm]
-072 10 12 if supply if supply if supply
-074 10 12 Type
500–525 550–600 660–690
-088 7.5 9 VAC VAC VAC
-090 3.8 4.4 FDU69-
-105 6.5 8 30.4 34.8 40.0
002
-106 3.8 4.4 -003 30.4 34.8 40.0
-109 3.8 4.4 -004 30.4 34.8 40.0
-142 3.8 4.4 -005 30.4 34.8 40.0
-146 3.8 4.4 -008 30.4 34.8 40.0
-171 3.8 4.4 -010 30.4 34.8 40.0
-175 3.8 4.4 -013 30.4 34.8 40.0
-205 2.7 3.1 -018 30.4 34.8 40.0
-210 2.7 3.1 -021 30.4 34.8 40.0
-244 2.7 3.1 -025 30.4 34.8 40.0
-250 2.7 3.1 -033 12.9 14.8 17.0
-293 2.3 2.8 -042 12.9 14.8 17.0
-295 2.3 2.8 -050 12.9 14.8 17.0
-300 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 -058 12.9 14.8 17.0
-365 1.8 2.2 -082 4.9 5.7 6.5
-375 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 -090 4.9 5.7 6.5
-430 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1 -109 4.9 5.7 6.5
-500 2 x 2.7 2 x 3.1 -146 4.9 5.7 6.5
-600 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 -175 4.9 5.7 6.5
-650 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 -200 4.9 5.7 6.5
-750 3 x 2.7 3 x 3.1 -250 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5
-860 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1 -300 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5
-1K0 4 x 2.7 4 x 3.1 -375 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5
-1K15 5 x 2.7 5 x 3.1 -400 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5
-1K25 5 x 2.7 5 x 3.1 -430 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5
-1K35 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1 -500 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5
-1K5 6 x 2.7 6 x 3.1 -595 3 x 4.9 3 x 5.7 3 x 6.5
-1K75 7 x 2.7 7 x 3.1 -650 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5
-2K0 8 x 2.7 8 x 3.1 -720 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5
-2K25 9 x 2.7 9 x 3.1 -800 4 x 4.9 4 x 5.7 4 x 6.5
-2K5 10 x 2.7 10 x 3.1 -905 5 x 4.9 5 x 5.7 5 x 6.5
-995 5 x 4.9 5 x 5.7 5 x 6.5

Table 48 Brake resistor FDU69 V types
13.11 Serial communication
-1K2 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5
-1K4 7 x 4.9 7 x 5.7 7 x 6.5
and fieldbus
-1K6 8 x 4.9 8 x 5.7 8 x 6.5
-1K8 9 x 4.9 9 x 5.7 9 x 6.5 From FDUsoftware
Part number Description version
-2K0 10 x 4.9 10 x 5.7 10 x 6.5 (see menu [922])
-2K2 11 x 4.9 11 x 5.7 11 x 6.5
-2K4 12 x 4.9 12 x 5.7 12 x 6.5 01-3876-04 RS232/485 4.0
-2K6 13 x 4.9 13 x 5.7 13 x 6.5 01-3876-05 Profibus DP 4.0
-2K8 14 x 4.9 14 x 5.7 14 x 6.5
01-3876-06 DeviceNet 4.0
-3K0 15 x 4.9 15 x 5.7 15 x 6.5
Modbus/TCP, Industrial
01-3876-09 4.11
Ethernet
NOTE: Although the AC drive will detect a failure in the
brake electronics, the use of resistors with a thermal EtherCAT, Industrial
overload which will cut off the power at overload is 01-3876-10 4.32
Ethernet
strongly recommended.
Profinet IO, one port
01-3876-11 4.32
Industrial Ethernet
The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturer
and must be specified when the AC drive is ordered. Profinet IO, two port
01-3876-12 4.32
Industrial Ethernet
EtherNet/IP, two port
13.8 I/O Board 01-3876-13
industrial EtherNet
4.36
01-3876-16 CANopen 4.42

01-3876-01 I/O option board 2.0 For communication with the AC drive there are several
option boards for communication. There are different
options for Fieldbus communication and one serial
Each I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay outputs
communication option with RS232 or RS485 interface
and three extra isolated digital inputs (24V). The I/O Board
which has galvanic isolation.
works in combination with the Pump/Fan Control, but can
also be used as a separate option. Maximum 3 I/O boards
possible. This option is described in a separate manual.
13.9 Encoder
01-3876-03 Encoder 2.0 option board
The Encoder 2.0 option board, used for connection of

feedback signal of the actual motor speed via an incremental
encoder is described in a separate manual.
For Emotron FDU this function is for speed read-out only
or for spin start function. No speed control.
13.10 PTC/PT100
01-3876-08 PTC/PT100 2.0 option board
The PTC/PT100 2.0 option board for connecting motor

thermistors and max 3 PT100 elements to the AC drive is
described in a separate manual.

13.12 Standby supply board
option
Connect the
power supply
Part number Description board to the
two blue
Standby power supply kit for after terminals
mounting. marked
01-3954-00 A- and B+
Not for frame sizes D, D2, FA, FA2, C69,
D69, C2(69) and D2(69). =
0V to A-
24V to B+
The standby supply board option provides the possibility of
keeping the communication system up and running without
having the 3-phase mains connected. One advantage is that
the system can be set up without mains power. The option
will also give backup for communication failure if main
power is lost.
The standby supply board option is supplied with external
±10% 24 VDC protected by a 2 A slow acting fuse, from a
double isolated transformer. The terminals X1:1, X1:2 (on
size B, C and E to F) are voltage polarity independent.
The terminals A- and B+ (on sizes D/D2...) are voltage
polarity dependent.
Cable length limited to 30 m. If the cable is longer than Fig. 170 Connection of standby supply option on frame sizes D,
30 m, a shielded cable must be used. D2, FA, FA2, C69, D69, C2(69) and D2(69).
Terminal Name Function Specification
External, AC drive
A- 0V
main power
independent, supply 24 VDC ±10%
X1 voltage for control and Double isolated
B+ +24V communication
circuits
~
X1:1 Left terminal
X1:2 Right terminal
Fig. 169 Connection of standby supply optionon frame sizes B,

C, C2, E, E2, F and F2.
X1
Name Function Specification
terminal
External, AC drive
1 Ext. supply 1
main power
independent, 24 VDC or VAC
supply voltage for ±10% Double
2 Ext. supply 2 control and isolated
communication
circuits

13.13 Safe Stop option terminal 20 in the example Table , please refer to “11.7.4
Digital Outputs [540]” on page 180.
To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with Safe
Torque Off (STO) EN-IEC 62061:2005 SIL 3 & EN-ISO When the "Inhibit" input is de-activated, the AC drive
13849-1:2006, the following three parts need to be attended display will show a flashing "SST" indication in section D
to: (bottom left corner) and the red Trip LED on the Control
panel will be flashing.
1. Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 (via Safe Stop
option board). To resume normal operation, the following steps have to be
taken:
2. Enable input and control of AC drive (via normal I/O
control signals of AC drive). • Release "Inhibit" input; 24VDC (High) to terminal 1
3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback of and 2.
driver circuits and IGBT’s). • Give a STOP signal to the AC drive, according to the set
To enable the AC drive to operate and run the motor, the Run/Stop Control in menu [215].
following signals should be active: • Give a new Run command, according to the set Run/
• "Inhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on the Stop Control in menu [215].
Safe Stop option board should be made active by con-
necting 24 VDC to secure the supply voltage for the NOTE: The method of generating a STOP command is
driver circuits of the power conductors via safety relay dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level/
K1. See also Fig. 173. Edge [21A] and the use of a separate Stop input via
digital input.
• High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 10 in Fig. ,
which is set to "Enable". For setting the digital input
please refer to “11.7.2 Digital Inputs [520]” on
page 174.
WARNING!
These two signals need to be combined and used to enable The safe stop function can never be used for
the output of the AC drive and make it possible to activate a electrical maintenance. For electrical
Safe Stop condition. maintenance the AC drive should always be
disconnected from the supply voltage.
NOTE: The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN-IEC
62061:2005 SIL 3 & EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, can only be
realized by de-activating both the "Inhibit" and "Enable"
inputs.
When the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using these

two different methods, which are independently controlled,
this safety circuit ensures that the motor will not start
running because:
• The 24VDC signal is disconnected from the "Inhibit" 6
5
input, terminals 1 and 2, the safety relay K1 is switched 4
3
off. 2
1
The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power

conductors is switched off. This will inhibit the trigger
pulses to the power conductors.
• The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down.
The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit
which will forward the information to the PWM part on
the Control board.
To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off,
this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay did
not refuse to act. The Safe Stop option board offers a
feedback signal for this via a second forced switched safety Fig. 171 Connection of safe stop option in size B - D.
relay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has
confirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is
shut down. See Table 49 for the contacts connections.
To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" on
a digital output can be used. For setting a digital output, e.g.

Table 49 Specification of Safe Stop option board
X1
Name Function Specification
pin
1 Inhibit + Inhibit driver circuits of DC 24 V

2 Inhibit - power conductors. (20–30 V)
1 2
3 4
NO contact
3
relay K2
5 6
Feedback; confirmation 48 VDC/
P contact of activated inhibit. 30 VAC/2 A
4
relay K2
5 GND Supply ground.
Supply Voltage for
Fig. 172 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up. +24 VDC,
6 +24 VDC operating Inhibit input
50 mA
only.
Safe Stop +5V Power board
K1
NC
K2
+24 VDC
Enable DigIn Controller PWM
Stop DigOut
Fig. 173 Safe Stop connection

13.14 EMC filter class C1/C2
EMC filter according to EN61800-3:2004 class C1 (for
frame size C types) and C2 - 1st environment restricted
distribution.
For sizes B,C, C2, D and D2, the filter is mounted inside
the drive module.
For sizes E and up, external EMC filters are available.
For more information refer to “Technical catalogue for
AC drives”.
Note: EMC filter according to class C3 - 2nd
environment included as standard in all drive units.
13.15 Output chokes

Output chokes, which are supplied separately, are
recommended for lengths of screened motor cable longer
than 100 m. Because of the fast switching of the motor
voltage and the capacitance of the motor cable (both line to Fig. 174 Optional top cover mounted on frame size D2
line and line to earth screen), large switching currents can be
generated with long lengths of motor cable. Output chokes
prevent the AC drive from tripping and should be installed 13.18 Other options
as closely as possible to the AC drive. Following options are also available, for more information
See also in “Technical catalogue AC drives” for filter regarding these options, see in “Technical catalogue AC
selection guide. drives”.
Overshoot clamp
13.16 Liquid cooling
Sine wave filter
AC drive modules in frame sizes E - O and F69 - T69 are
available in a liquid cooled version. These units are designed Common mode filter
for connection to a liquid cooling system, normally a heat
exchanger of liquid-liquid or liquid-air type. Heat exchanger Brake resistors
is not part of the liquid cooling option.
Drive units with parallel power modules (frame size
G - T69) are delivered with a dividing unit for connection of 13.19 AFE - Active Front End
the cooling liquid. The drive units are equipped with rubber Emotron AC Drives from CG Drives & Automation are also
hoses with leak-proof quick couplings. available as Low harmonic drives and Regenerative drives.
The Liquid cooling option is described in a separate manual. You will find more information on www.emotron.com /
www.cgglobal.com.
13.17 Top cover for IP20/21

version
01-5356-00 Top cover for frame size C2

01-5355-00 Top cover for frame sizes D2, E2 and F2
This Top cover can be mounted on IP20 versions of frame

sizes C2, D2, E2 and F2.
By mounting the top cover, the protection class will change
to IP21 in accordance with EN 60529 standard.

14. Technical Data
14.1 Electrical specifications related to model
Note: Use motor rated current for drive sizing.
Emotron FDU 2.0 - IP20/21 version

Table 50 Typical motor power at mains voltage 230 V. AC drive main voltage range 230 - 480 V.
Normal duty Heavy duty
Max. (120%, 1 min every 10 min) (150%, 1 min every 10 min)
output
Model FDU Power Power Rated Power Power Rated Frame size
current
[A]* @230V @230V current @230V @230V current
[kW] [HP] [A] [kW] [HP] [A]
48-025-20 30 5.5 7.5 25 4 5 20
48-030-20 36 7.5 10 30 5.5 7.5 24
48-036-20 43 7.5 10 36 7.5 10 29 C2
48-045-20 54 11 15 45 7.5 10 36
48-058-20 68 15 20 58 11 15 46
48-072-20 86 18.5 25 72 15 20 58
48-088-20 106 22 30 88 18.5 25 70 D2
48-105-20 126 30 40 105 22 30 84
48-142-20 170 37 50 142 30 40 114
E2
48-171-20 205 45 60 171 37 50 137
48-205-20 246 55 75 205 45 60 164
48-244-20 293 75 100 244 55 75 195 F2
48-293-20 352 90 125 293 75 100 235
48-365-20 438 110 150 365 90 125 292 FA2
* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by

drive temperature.
Table 51 Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 and 460 V. AC drive main voltage range 230 - 480 V.
output
current
[kW] [HP] [A] [kW] [HP] [A]
48-025-20 30 11 15 25 7.5 10 20
48-030-20 36 15 20 30 11 15 24
48-036-20 43 18.5 25 36 15 20 29 C2
48-045-20 54 22 30 45 18.5 25 36
48-058-20 68 30 40 58 22 30 46
48-072-20 86 37 50 72 30 40 58
48-088-20 106 45 60 88 37 50 70 D2
48-105-20 126 55 75 105 45 60 84
48-142-20 170 75 100 142 55 75 114
E2
48-171-20 205 90 125 171 75 100 137
48-205-20 246 110 150 205 90 125 164
48-244-20 293 132 200 244 110 150 195 F2
48-293-20 352 160 250 293 132 200 235
48-365-20 438 200 300 365 160 250 292 FA2
* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.
CG Drives & Automation 01-5325-01r5 Technical Data 235

.
output
current
[hp] [kW] [A] [hp] [kW] [A]
69-002-20 3.2 1.5 1.5 2 1 0.75 1.6
69-003-20 4.8 2 2.2 3 1.5 1.5 2.4
69-004-20 6.4 3 3 4 2 2.2 3.2
69-006-20 9.6 4 4 6 3 3 4.8
69-008-20 12.8 5 5.5 8 4 4 6.4
C2(69)
69-010-20 16 7.5 7.5 10 5 5.5 8
69-013-20 20.8 10 11 13 7.5 7.5 10.4
69-018-20 29 15 15 18 10 11 14.4
69-021-20 34 20 18.5 21 15 15 16.8
69-025-20 40 25 22 25 20 18.5 20
69-033-20 53 30 30 33 25 22 26
69-042-20 67 40 37 42 30 30 34
D2(69)
69-050-20 80 50 45 50 40 37 40
69-058-20 93 60 55 58 40 45 46
236 Technical Data CG Drives & Automation 01-5325-01r5

Emotron FDU 2.0 - IP54 version (Model 48-300 and up also available as IP20)
Normal duty Heavy duty Frame
Max. (120%, 1 min every 10 min) (150%, 1 min every 10 min) size
output IP
Model FDU Power Power Rated Power Power Rated (Number
current class
@230V @230V current @230V @230V current of
[A]*
[kW] [HP] [A] [kW] [HP] [A] PEBB´s **)
48-003-54 3.0 0.37 0.5 2.5 0.37 0.5 2.0
48-004-54 4.8 0.75 1 4.0 0.55 0.75 3.2
48-006-54 7.2 1.1 1.5 6.0 0.75 1 4.8
48-008-54 9.0 1.5 2 7.5 1.1 1.5 6.0 B
48-010-54 11.4 2.2 3 9.5 1.5 2 7.6
48-013-54 15.6 2.2 3 13.0 2.2 3 10.4
48-018-54 21.6 4 5 18.0 3 3 14.4
48-026-54 31 5.5 7.5 26 4 5 21
48-031-54 37 7.5 10 31 5.5 7.5 25
C
48-037-54 44 7.5 10 37 7.5 10 29.6
IP 54
48-046-54 55 11 15 46 7.5 10 37
wall
48-061-54 73 15 20 61 11 15 49
D mounted
48-074-54 89 18.5 25 74 15 20 59
48-090-54 108 22 30 90 18.5 25 72
48-109-54 131 30 40 109 22 30 87
E
48-146-54 175 37 50 146 30 40 117
48-175-54 210 45 60 175 37 50 140
48-210-54 252 55 75 210 45 60 168
48-228-54 300 55 75 228 55 60 182
F
48-250-54 300 75 100 250 55 75 200
48-295-54 354 90 125 295 75 100 236
48-365-54 438 110 150 365 90 125 292 FA
48-300-IP 360 90 125 300 75 100 240
G(2)
48-375-IP 450 110 150 375 90 125 300
48-430-IP 516 110 150 430 110 125 344
H(2)
48-500-IP 600 160 200 500 110 150 400
48-600-IP 720 200 250 600 132 200 480
48-650-IP 780 200 250 650 160 200 520 I(3)
48-750-IP 900 220 300 750 200 250 600
48-860-IP 1032 250 350 860 220 300 688 IP 20
J(4)
48-1K0-IP 1200 300 400 1000 250 350 800 module
48-1K15-IP 1380 355 450 1150 250 400 920 or IP54
KA(5)
48-1K25-IP 1500 400 500 1250 315 400 1000 cabinet
48-1K35-IP 1620 400 550 1350 355 450 1080
K(6)
48-1K5-IP 1800 450 600 1500 400 500 1200
48-1K75-IP 2100 560 750 1750 450 600 1400 L(7)
48-2K0-IP 2400 630 800 2000 500 650 1600 M(8)
48-2K25-IP 2700 710 900 2250 560 750 1800 N(9)
48-2K5-IP 3000 800 1000 2500 630 800 2000 O(10)
Larger sizes available on request

** PEBB= Power Electronic Building Block (power module).

Max. (120%, 1 min every 10 min) (150%, 1 min every 10 min) Frame size
output IP
Model FDU Power Rated Power Rated (Number of
current class
@400V current @400V current PEBB´s)**
[A]*
[kW] [A] [kW] [A]
48-003-54 3.0 0.75 2.5 0.55 2.0
48-004-54 4.8 1.5 4.0 1.1 3.2
48-006-54 7.2 2.2 6.0 1.5 4.8
48-008-54 9.0 3 7.5 2.2 6.0 B
48-010-54 11.4 4 9.5 3 7.6
48-013-54 15.6 5.5 13.0 4 10.4
48-018-54 21.6 7.5 18.0 5.5 14.4
48-026-54 31 11 26 7.5 21
48-031-54 37 15 31 11 25
C
48-037-54 44 18.5 37 15 29.6
IP 54
48-046-54 55 22 46 18.5 37
wall
48-061-54 73 30 61 22 49
D mounted
48-074-54 89 37 74 30 59
48-090-54 108 45 90 37 72
48-109-54 131 55 109 45 87
E
48-146-54 175 75 146 55 117
48-175-54 210 90 175 75 140
48-210-54 252 110 210 90 168
48-228-54 300 110 228 90 182
F
48-250-54 300 132 250 110 200
48-295-54 354 160 295 132 236
48-365-54 438 200 365 160 292 FA
48-300-IP 360 160 300 132 240
G(2)
48-375-IP 450 200 375 160 300
48-430-IP 516 220 430 200 344
H(2)
48-500-IP 600 250 500 220 400
48-600-IP 720 315 600 250 480
48-650-IP 780 355 650 315 520 I(3)
48-750-IP 900 400 750 355 600
48-860-IP 1032 450 860 400 688 IP 20
J(4)
48-1K0-IP 1200 560 1000 450 800 module
48-1K15-IP 1380 630 1150 500 920 or IP54
KA(5)
48-1K25-IP 1500 710 1250 560 1000 cabinet
48-1K35-IP 1620 710 1350 600 1080
K(6)
48-1K5-IP 1800 800 1500 630 1200
48-1K75-IP 2100 900 1750 800 1400 L(7)
48-2K0-IP 2400 1120 2000 900 1600 M(8)
48-2K25-IP 2700 1250 2250 1000 1800 N(9)
48-2K5-IP 3000 1400 2500 1120 2000 O(10)


Normal duty Heavy duty Frame
Max. (120%, 1 min every 10 min) (150%, 1 min every 10 min) size
output IP
Model FDU Power Rated Power Rated (Number
current class
@460V current @460V current of
[A]*
[HP] [A] [HP] [A] PEBB´s)**
48-003-54 3.0 1 2.5 1 2.0
48-004-54 4.8 2 4.0 1.5 3.2
48-006-54 7.2 3 6.0 2 4.8
48-008-54 9.0 3 7.5 3 6.0 B
48-010-54 11.4 5 9.5 3 7.6
48-013-54 15.6 7.5 13.0 5 10.4
48-018-54 21.6 10 18.0 7.5 14.4
48-026-54 31 15 26 10 21
48-031-54 37 20 31 15 25
C
48-037-54 44 25 37 20 29.6
IP 54
48-046-54 55 30 46 25 37
wall
48-061-54 73 40 61 30 49
D mounted
48-074-54 89 50 74 40 59
48-090-54 108 60 90 50 72
48-109-54 131 75 109 60 87
E
48-146-54 175 100 146 75 117
48-175-54 210 125 175 100 140
48-210-54 252 150 210 125 168
48-228-54 300 200 228 150 182
F
48-250-54 300 200 250 150 200
48-295-54 354 250 295 200 236
48-365-54 438 300 365 250 292 FA
48-300-IP 360 250 300 200 240
G(2)
48-375-IP 450 300 375 250 300
48-430-IP 516 350 430 250 344
H(2)
48-500-IP 600 400 500 350 400
48-600-IP 720 500 600 400 480
48-650-IP 780 550 650 400 520 I(3)
48-750-IP 900 600 750 500 600
48-860-IP 1032 700 860 550 688 IP 20
J(4) module
48-1K0-IP 1200 800 1000 650 800
or IP54
48-1K15-IP 1380 900 1150 750 920
KA(5) cabinet
48-1K25-IP 1500 1000 1250 800 1000
48-1K35-IP 1620 1100 1350 900 1080
K(6)
48-1K5-IP 1800 1250 1500 1000 1200
48-1K75-IP 2100 1500 1750 1200 1400 L(7)
48-2K0-IP 2400 1700 2000 1300 1600 M(8)
48-2K25-IP 2700 1900 2250 1500 1800 N(9)
48-2K5-IP 3000 2100 2500 1700 2000 O(10)

** PEBB= Power Electronic Building Block ( power module).

Emotron FDU 2.0 - IP54 version (Model 69-250 and up also available as IP20)
Table 56 Typical motor power at mains voltage 525 V.
AC drive main voltage range, for FDU52: 440 - 525 V and for FDU69: 500 - 690 V.
output IP
Model FDU Power Rated Power (Number of
current Rated class
@525V current @525V PEBB´s)**
[A]* current [A]
[kW] [A] [kW]
52-003-54 3.0 1.1 2.5 1.1 2.0
52-004-54 4.8 2.2 4.0 1.5 3.2
52-006-54 7.2 3 6.0 2.2 4.8
52-008-54 9.0 4 7.5 3 6.0 B
52-010-54 11.4 5.5 9.5 4 7.6
52-013-54 15.6 7.5 13.0 5.5 10.4
52-018-54 21.6 11 18.0 7.5 14.4
52-026-54 31 15 26 11 21
52-031-54 37 18.5 31 15 25 IP 54
C
52-037-54 44 22 37 18.5 29.6 wall
52-046-54 55 30 46 22 37 mounted
52-061-54 73 37 61 30 49
D
52-074-54 89 45 74 37 59
69-082-54 98 55 82 45 66
69-090-54 108 55 90 45 72
69-109-54 131 75 109 55 87
F69
69-146-54 175 90 146 75 117
69-175-54 210 110 175 90 140
69-200-54 240 132 200 110 160
69-250-IP 300 160 250 132 200
69-300-IP 360 200 300 160 240
H69 (2)
69-375-IP 450 250 375 200 300
69-400-IP 480 250 400 220 320
69-430-IP 516 300 430 250 344
69-500-IP 600 315 500 300 400 I69 (3)
69-595-IP 720 400 600 315 480
69-650-IP 780 450 650 355 520
69-720-IP 864 500 720 400 576 J69 (4)
IP 20
69-800-IP 960 560 800 450 640
module
69-995-IP 1200 630 1000 500 800 KA69 (5)
or IP54
69-1K2-IP 1440 800 1200 630 960 K69 (6)
cabinet
69-1K4-IP 1680 1000 1400 800 1120 L69 (7)
69-1K6-IP 1920 1100 1600 900 1280 M69 (8)
69-1K8-IP 2160 1300 1800 1000 1440 N69 (9)
69-2K0-IP 2400 1400 2000 1100 1600 O69 (10)
69-2K2-IP 2640 1600 2200 1200 1760 P69 (11)
69-2K4-IP 2880 1700 2400 1400 1920 Q69 (12)
69-2K6-IP 3120 1900 2600 1500 2080 R69 (13)
69-2K8-IP 3360 2000 2800 1600 2240 S69 (14)
69-3K0-IP 3600 2200 3000 1700 2400 T69 (15)

** PEBB= Power Electronic Building Block ( power module).

output IP
Model FDU Power Power Rated Power Power Rated (Number of
current class
@575V @690V current @575V @690V current PEBB´s)**
[A]*
[HP] [kW] [A] [HP] [kW] [A]
69-002-54 3.2 1.5 1.5 2 1 0.75 1.6
69-003-54 4.8 2 2.2 3 1.5 1.5 2.4
69-004-54 6.4 3 3 4 2 2.2 3.2
69-006-54 9.6 4 4 6 3 3 4.8
69-008-54 12.8 5 5.5 8 4 4 6.4
C69
69-010-54 16 7.5 7.5 10 5 5.5 8
69-013-54 20.8 10 11 13 7.5 7.5 10.4
69-018-54 29 15 15 18 10 11 14.4
69-021-54 34 20 18.5 21 15 15 16.8
IP 54
69-025-54 40 25 22 25 20 18.5 20
wall
69-033-54 53 30 30 33 25 22 26
mounted
69-042-54 67 40 37 42 30 30 34
D69
69-050-54 80 50 45 50 40 37 40
69-058-54 93 60 55 58 40 45 46
69-082-54 98 75 75 82 60 55 66
69-090-54 108 75 90 90 60 75 72
69-109-54 131 100 110 109 75 90 87
F69
69-146-54 175 125 132 146 100 110 117
69-175-54 210 150 160 175 125 132 140
69-200-54 240 200 200 200 150 160 160
69-250-IP 300 250 250 250 200 200 200
69-300-IP 360 300 315 300 250 250 240
H69 (2)
69-375-IP 450 350 355 375 300 315 300
69-400-IP 480 400 400 400 300 315 320
69-430-IP 516 400 450 430 350 315 344
69-500-IP 600 500 500 500 400 355 400 I69 (3)
69-595-IP 720 600 600 600 500 450 480
69-650-IP 780 650 630 650 550 500 520
69-720-IP 864 750 710 720 600 560 576 J69 (4)
69-800-IP 960 850 800 800 650 630 640 IP 20
69-905-IP 1080 950 900 900 750 710 720 module
KA69 (5)
69-995-IP 1200 1000 1000 1000 850 800 800 or IP54
69-1K2-IP 1440 1200 1200 1200 1000 900 960 K69 (6) cabinet
69-1K4-IP 1680 1500 1400 1400 1200 1120 1120 L69 (7)
69-1K6-IP 1920 1700 1600 1600 1300 1250 1280 M69 (8)
69-1K8-IP 2160 1900 1800 1800 1500 1400 1440 N69 (9)
69-2K0-IP 2400 2100 2000 2000 1700 1600 1600 O69 (10)
69-2K2-IP 2640 2300 2200 2200 1800 1700 1760 P69 (11)
69-2K4-IP 2880 2500 2400 2400 2000 1900 1920 Q69 (12)
69-2K6-IP 3120 2700 2600 2600 2200 2000 2080 R69 (13)
69-2K8-IP 3360 3000 2800 2800 2400 2200 2240 S69 (14)
69-3K0-IP 3600 3200 3000 3000 2500 2400 2400 T69 (15)


14.2 General electrical specifications
Table 58 General electrical specifications
General
Mains voltage: FDU48 230-480 V +10%/-15% (-10% at 230 V)
FDU52 440-525 V +10 %/-15 %
FDU69 500-690 V +10%/-15%
Mains frequency: 45 to 65 Hz
Mains voltage imbalance: max. +3.0% of nominal phase to phase input voltage.
Input power factor: 0.95
Output voltage: 0–Mains supply voltage:
Output frequency: 0–400 Hz
Output switching frequency: 3 kHz (adjustable 1,5-6 kHz)
2 kHz sizes 48-293/295/365
Efficiency at nominal load: 97% for models 002 to 021
98% for models 025 to 3K0
Control signal inputs:
Analogue (differential)
Analogue Voltage/current: 0-±10 V/0-20 mA via switch
Max. input voltage: +30 V/30 mA
Input impedance: 20 kohm (voltage)
250 kohm (current)
Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Hardware accuracy: 1% type + 1 ½ LSB fsd
Non-linearity 1½ LSB
Digital:
Input voltage: High: >9 VDC, Low: <4 VDC
Max. input voltage: +30 VDC
Input impedance: <3.3 VDC: 4.7 kohm
≥3.3 VDC: 3.6 kohm
Signal delay: ≤8 ms
Control signal outputs
Analogue
Output voltage/current: 0-10 V/0-20 mA via software setting
Max. output voltage: +15 V @5 mA cont.
Short-circuit current (∞): +15 mA (voltage), +140 mA (current)
Output impedance: 10 ohm (voltage)
Resolution: 10 bit
Maximum load impedance for current 500 ohm
Hardware accuracy: 1.9% type fsd (voltage), 2.4% type fsd (current)
Offset: 3 LSB
Non-linearity: 2 LSB
Digital
Output voltage: High: >20 VDC @50 mA, >23 VDC open
Low: <1 VDC @50 mA
Shortcircuit current(∞): 100 mA max (together with +24 VDC)
Relays
0.1 – 2 A/Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC (30 VDC acc. to UL requirement) for
Contacts
general Purpose or Resistive use only .
References
+10 VDC @10 mA Short-circuit current +30 mA max
+10VDC
- 10 VDC @10 mA
-10VDC
+24 VDC Short-circuit current +100 mA max (together with Digital
+24VDC
Outputs)

14.3 Operation at higher
temperatures
Most Emotron AC drives are made for operation at
maximum of 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature.
Frame sizes C69/D69/C2(69)/D2(69) are rated at 45 °C
(113 °F). However, it is possible to use the AC drive at
higher temperatures with reduced output rating.
Possible derating
Derating of output current is possible with
-1% / degree Celsius to max +15 °C * (= max temp 55 °C) or
-0.55%/ degree Fahrenheit to max +27 °F
(= max temp. 131 °F).
* max +10 °C for sizes C69/D69/C2(69)/D2(69).
Example
In this example we have a motor with the following data that
we want to run at the ambient temperature of
45 °C (113 °F):
Voltage 400 V
Current 72 A
Power 37 kW (50 hp)
Select AC drive
The ambient temperature is 5 °C (9 °F) higher than the
maximum ambient temperature. The following calculation
is made to select the correct AC drive model.
Derating is possible with loss in performance of
1%/°C (0.55%/ degree F).
Derating will be: 5 x 1% = 5%
Calculation for model FDU48-074
74 A - (5% x 74) = 70.3 A; this is not enough.
Calculation for model FDU48-090
90 A - (5% x 90) = 85.5 A
In this example we select the FDU48-090.
14.4 Operation at higher

switching frequency
Table 59 shows the switching frequency for the different AC
drive models. With the possibility of running at higher
switching frequency you can reduce the noise level from the
motor. The switching frequency is set in menu [22A],
Motor sound, see section section 11.4.4, page 105. At
switching frequencies >3 kHz derating might be needed.
Table 59 Switching frequency
Standard
Models Switching Range
frequency
FDU##-002 to FDU##-3K0 3 kHz

1.5–6 kHz
FDU##-293, -295 and -365 2kHz

14.5 Dimensions and Weights
The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and
weights. The models 002 to 295 and 365 are available in
IP54 as wall mounted modules.
The models 300 to 3K0 consist of 2, 3, 4 .... 15 paralleled
power electronic building block (PEBB) available in IP20
intended for cabinet mounting or mounted in IP54
standard cabinet.
Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529
standard.
Table 60 Mechanical specifications, FDU48, FDU52 for IP20 module and IP54
IP20 module IP54 IP20 IP54

Models Frame size Dim. H x W x D Dim. H x W x D Weight Weight
mm (in) mm (in) kg (lb) kg (lb)
350/416* x 203 x 200
003 to 018 B – – 12.5 (27.6)
(13.8/16.4* x 8.0 x 7.9)
440/512* x 178 x 292
026 to 046 C – – 24 (52.9)
(17.3/20.2* x 7.0 x 11.5)
545/590* x 220 x 295
061 to 074 D – – 32 (70.6)
(21.5/23.2* x 8.7 x 11.5)
950 x 285 x 314
90 to 109 E – – 56 (123.5)
(37.4 x 11.2 x 12.4)
950 x 285 x 314
146 to 175 E – – 60 (132.3)
(37.4 x 11.2 x 12.4)
950 x 345 x 314
210 to 295 F – – 75 (165.4)
(37.4 x 13.6 x 12.4)
1395 x 345 x 365
365 FA - - 95 (209)
(54.9 x 13.6 x 14.4)
1036 x 500 x 390 2250 x 600 x 600
300 to 375 G (2xE) 140 (308.6) 350 (771.6)
(40.8 x 19.7x 15.4) (88.6 x 23.6 x 23.6)
1036 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 600
430 to 500 H (2xF) 170 (374.8) 380 (837.8)
(40.8 x 19.7x 17.7) (88.6 x 23.6 x 23.6)
1036 x 730 x 450 2250x 900 x 600
600 to 750 I (3xF) 248 (546.7) 506 (1116)
(40.8 x 28.7x 17.7) (88.6 x 35.4 x 23.6)
1036 x 1100 x 450 2250 x 1200 x 600
860 to 1K0 J (2xH) 340 (749.6) 697 (1537)
(40.8 x 43.3x 17.7) (88.6 x 47.2 x 23.6)
1036 x 1365 x 450 2250 x 1500 x 600
1K15 to 1K25 KA (H+I) 418 (921.5) 838 (1847)
(40.8 x 53.7x 17.7) (88.6 x 59.1 x 23.6)
1036 x 1630 x 450 2250 x 1800 x 600
1K35 to 1K5 K (2xI) 496 (1093) 987 (2176)
(40.8 x 64.2x 17.7) (88.6 x 70.9 x 23.6)
1036 x 2000 x 450 2250 x 2100 x 600
1K75 L (2xH+I) 588 (1296) 1190 (2624)
(40.8 x 78.7x 17.7) (88.6 x 82.7 x 23.6)
1036 x 2230 x 450 2250 x 2400 x 600
2K0 M(H+2xI) 666 (1468) 1323 (2917)
(40.8 x 87.8x 17.7) (88.6 x 94.5 x 23.6)
1036 x 2530 x 450 2250 x 2700 x 600
2K25 N (3xI) 744 (1640) 1518 (3347)
(40.8 x 99.6x 17.7) (88.6 x 106.3 x 23.6)
1036 x 2830 x 450 2250 x 3000 x 600
2K5 O (2xH+2xI) 836 (1834) 1772 (3907)
(40.8 x 111.4x 17.7) (88.6 x 118.1 x 23.6)
* Enclosure height/Total height

Table 61 Mechanical specifications, FDU69 for IP20 module and IP54
IP20 module IP54
Weight IP20 Weight IP54
Models Frame size Dim. H x W x D Dim. H x W x D
kg (lb) kg (lb)
mm (in) mm (in)
440/512* x 178 x 314
002 to 025 C69 - – 17 (37.5)
(17.3/20.2 x 7.0 x 12.4)
545/590* x 220 x 282
033 to 058 D69 - – 32 (70.5)
(21.5/23.2 x 8.7 x 11.1)
1090 x 345 x 312
082 to 200 F69 – – 77 (169.8)
(42.9 x 13.6 x 12.3)
1176 x 500 x 450 2250 x 600 x 600
250 to 375 H69 (2xF69) 176 (388) 399 (879.6)
(46.3 x 19.7 x 17.7) (88.6 x 23.6 x 23.6)
1176 x 730 x 450 2250 x 900 x 600
430 to 595 I69 (3xF69) 257 (566.6) 563 (1241)
(46.3 x 28.7 x 17.7) (88.6 x 35.4 x 23.6)
1176 x 1100 x 450 2250 x 1200 x 600
650 to 800 J69 (2xH69) 352 (776) 773 (1704)
(46.3 x 43.3 x 17.7) (88.6 x 47.2 x 23.6)
KA69 1176 x 1365 x 450 2250 x 1500 x 600
905 to 995 433 (954.6) 937 (2066)
(H69+I69) (46.3 x 53.7 x 17.7) (88.6 x 59.1 x 23.6)
1176 x 1630 x 450 2250 x 1800 x 600
750 to 1K2 K69 (2xI69) 514 (1133) 1100 (2425)
(46.3 x 64.2 x 17.7) (88.6 x 70.9 x 23.6)
L69 1176 x 2000 x 450 2250 x 2100 x 600
1K4 609 (1343) 1311 (2890)
(2xH69+I69) (46.3 x 78.7 x 17.7) (88.6 x 82.7 x 23.6)
M69 1176 x 2230 x 450 2250 x 2400 x 600
1K6 690 (1521) 1481 (3265)
(H69+2xI69) (46.3 x 87.8 x 17.7) (88.6 x 94.5 x 23.6)
1176 x 2530 x 450 2250 x 2700 x 600
1K8 N69 (3xI69) 771 (1700) 1651 (3640)
(46.3 x 99.6 x 17.7) (88.6 x 106.3 x 23.6)
O69 1176 x 2830 x 450 2250 x 3000 x 600
2K0 866 (1909) 1849 (4076)
(2xH69+2xI69) (46.3 x 111.4 x 17.7) (88.6 x 118.1 x 23.6)
P69 1176 x 3130 x 450 2250 x 3300 x 600
2K2 947 (2088) 2050 (4519)
(H69+3xI69) (46.3 x 123.2 x 17.7) (88.6 x 129.9 x 23.6)
1176 x 3430 x 450 2250 x 3600 x 600
2K4 Q69 (4xI69) 1028 (2266) 2214 (4881)
(46.3 x 135 x 17.7) (88.6 x 141.7 x 23.6)
R69 1176 x 3730 x 450 2250 x 3900 x 600
2K6 1123 (2476) 2423 (5342)
(2xH69+3xI69) (46.3 x 146.9 x 17.7) (88.6 x 153.5 x 23.6)
S69 1176 x 4030 x 450 2250 x 4200 x 600
2K8 1204 (2654) 2613 (5761)
(H69+4xI69) (46.3 x 158.7 x 17.7) (88.6 x 165.4 x 23.6)
1176 x 4330 x 450 2250 x 4500 x 600
3K0 T69 (5xI69) 1285 (2833) 2777 (6122)
(46.3 x 170.5 x 17.7) (88.6 x 177.2 x 23.6)
* Enclosure height/Total height

Dimensions and weights for models Emotron FDU48 - IP20/21 version
The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and
weights of the Emotron FDU IP20/21 version.
These AC drives are available as wall mounted modules;
The IP20 version is optimised for cabinet mounting.
With the optional top cover, protection class is in
compliance with IP21, making it suitable for mounting
directly on the electrical room wall.
The protection classes IP20 and IP21 are defined according
to the EN 60529 standard.
Table 62 Mechanical specifications, FDU48 - IP20 and IP21 version

IP20 IP21* IP20/21
Frame
Models Dim. H1/H2 x W x D Dim. H1/H2 x W x D Weight
size
mm (in) mm (in) kg (lb)
438 / 536 x 176 x 267 438 / 559 x 196 x 282
025 to 058 C2 17 (37.5)
(17.2 / 21.1 x 6.9 x 10.5) (17.2 / 22 x 7.7 x 11.1)
545 / 658 x 220 x 291 545 / 670 x 240 x 307
072 to 105 D2 30 (66)
(21.5 / 25.9 x 8.7 x 11.5) (21.5 / 26.4 x 9.5 x 12.1)
956 / 956 x 275 x 294 956 / 956 x 275 x 323
142 to 171 E2 53 (117)
(37.6 / 37.6 x 10.8 x 11.6) (37.6 / 37.6 x 10.8 x 12.7)
956 / 956 x 335 x 294 956 / 956 x 335 x 323
205 to 293 F2 69 (152)
(37.6 / 37.6 x 13.2 x 11.6) (37.6 / 37.6 x 13.2 x 12.7)
1090 / 1250 x 335 x 306
365 FA2 - 84 (185)
(42.9 / 49.5 x 13.2 x 12.1)
H1 = Enclosure height.
H2 = Total height including cable interface.
* with optional top cover
Table 63 Mechanical specifications, FDU69 - IP20 and IP21 version

IP20 IP20
Frame
Models Dim. H1/H2 x W x D Weight
size
mm (in) kg (lb)
438 / 536 x 176 x 267
002 to 025 C2(69) 17 (37.5)
(17.2 / 21.1 x 6.9 x 10.5)
545 / 658 x 220 x 291
033 to 058 D2(69) 30 (66)
(21.5 / 25.9 x 8.7 x 11.5)
H1 = Enclosure height.
H2 = Total height including cable interface.
* with optional top cover

14.6 Environmental conditions
Table 64 Operation
Parameter Normal operation
0 °C–40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) See chapter 14.3 page 243 for different conditions
Nominal ambient temperature
0 °C - 45 °C (32 °F - 113 °F) for sizes C69/D69/C2(69)/D2(69)
Atmospheric pressure 86–106 kPa (12.5 - 15.4 PSI)
Relative humidity
Class 3K4, 5...95% and non condensing
according to IEC 60721-3-3
Contamination, No electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corrosive
according to IEC 60721-3-3 materials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2.
According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations:
Vibrations 10<f<57 Hz, 0.075 mm (0.00295 ft)
57<f<150 Hz, 1g (0,035 oz)
0–1000 m (0 - 3280 ft)
480V AC drives, with derating 1%/100 m (328 ft) of rated current up to 4000 m (13123 ft)
Altitude
690V AC drives, with derating 1%/100 m (328 ft) of rated current up to 2000 m (6562) ft
Coated boards required for 2000 - 4000 m(6562 - 13123 ft)
Table 65 Storage
Parameter Storage condition
Temperature -20 to +60 °C (-4 to + 140 °F)

Atmospheric pressure 86–106 kPa (12.5 - 15.4 PSI)
Relative humidity
Class 1K4, max. 95% and non condensing and no formation of ice.
according to IEC 60721-3-1
WARNING!
If the device is stored for more than two years, the DC link capacitor of the devices must be reformed
during commissioning.
The reforming procedure is described in manual “Capacitor reforming unit”.

14.7 Fuses and glands
14.7.1 According to IEC ratings

Use mains fuses of the type gL/gG conforming to IEC 269
NOTE: The dimensions of fuse and cable cross-
or breakers with similar characteristics. Check the section are dependent on the application and must
equipment first before installing the glands. be determined in accordance with local regulations.
Max. Fuse = maximum fuse value that still protects the AC
drive and upholds warranty.
NOTE: The dimensions of the power terminals used in
the cabinet drive models 300 to 3K0 can differ
depending on customer specification.
Table 66 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands for FDU48 and FDU52 models
Nominal input Maximum Cable glands (clamping range ) *
Model FDU current value fuse
[A] [A] mains / motor Brake
##-003-54 2.2 4 M32 opening M25 opening
##-004-54 3.5 4 M20 + reducer M20 + reducer
##-006-54 5.2 6 (6–12 mm(0.24 - 0.47 in)) (6–12 mm(0.24 - 0.47 in))
##-008-54 6.9 10 M32 (12–20)/M32 opening
M25+reducer
##-010-54 8.7 10 M25
(10-14 mm(0.39 - 0.55 in))
(10-14 mm(0.39 - 0.55 in))
##-013-54 11.3 16
M32 (16–25)/M32 (13–18)
##-018-54 15.6 20
##-025-20 22 25 - (12 - 16 mm(0.55 - 0.63 in))
M32
##-026-54 22 25 M25
(15–21 mm(0.59 - 0.83 in))
##-030-20 26 35 - (16 - 20 mm (0.63 - 0.79 in))
M32
##-031-54 26 35 M25
(15–21 mm(0.59 - 0.83 in))
##-036-20 31 35 - (20 - 24 mm(0.79 - 0.94))
M40
##-037-54 31 35 M32
(19–28 mm (0.75 - 1.1 in))
##-045-20 38 50 - (24 - 28 mm(0.94 - 1.1 in))
M40
##-046-54 38 50 M32
(19–28 mm (0.75 - 1.1 in))
##-058-20 50 63 - (24 - 28 mm(0.94 - 1.1 in))
M50 M40
##-061-54 52 63
(27 - 35 mm(1.06 - 1.38 in)) (19–28 mm (0.75 - 1.1 in))
##-072-20 64 80 - (28 - 32 mm(1.1 - 1.26 in))
M50 M40
##-074-54 65 80
(27 - 35 mm(1.06 - 1.38 in)) (19–28 mm(0.75 - 1.1 in))
##-088-20 78 100 - (32 - 36 mm(1.26 - 1.42 in))
(Ø17-42 mm (0.67 - 1.65 in)) cable (Ø11-32 mm(0.43 - 1.26 in)) Cable
##-090-54 78 100 flexible leadthrough or M50 flexible leadthrough or M40
opening. opening.
##-105-20 91 100 (32 - 36 mm(1.26 - 1.42 in)
(Ø11-32 mm(0.43 - 1.26 in)) Cable
(Ø17-42 mm (0.67 - 1.65 in)) cable
##-109-54 94 100 flexible leadthrough or M40
flexible leadthrough or M50 opening
opening
##-142-20 126 160 - (40 - 44 mm (1.57 - 1.73 in)) - (36 - 40 mm(1.42 - 1.57 in))
opening. opening.
##-171-20 152 160 - (40 - 44 mm (1.57 - 1.73 in)) - (36 - 40 mm(1.42 - 1.57 in))
opening. opening.

Table 66 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands for FDU48 and FDU52 models
- (48 - 52 mm(1.89 - 2.05 in)/
##-205-20 178 200 - (44 - 48 mm (1.73 - 1.89 in))
52 - 56 mm (2.05 - 2.2 in))
##-210-54 182 200 (Ø23 - 55 mm (0.9 - 2.16 in)) (Ø17- 42 mm (0.67 - 1.65 in))
cable flexible leadthrough or M63 cable flexible leadthrough or M50
##-228-54 197 250
opening. opening.
- (48 - 52 mm (1.89 - 2.05 in)/
##-244-20 211 250 - (44 - 48 mm (1.73 - 1.89 in))
52 - 56 mm (2.05 - 2.2 in))
##-250-54 216 250 (Ø 23 - 55 mm (0.9 - 2.16 in)) (Ø 23 - 55 mm (0.9 - 2.16 in))
cable flexible leadthrough or M63 cable flexible leadthrough or M63
##-295-54 256 300
opening. opening.
- (48 - 52 mm (1.89 - 2.05 in)/
##-293-20 254 300 - (44 - 48 mm (1.73 - 1.89 in))
52 - 56 mm (2.05 - 2.2 in))
(Ø 23 - 55 mm (0.9 - 2.16 in)) (Ø 23 - 55 mm (0.9 - 2.16 in))
##-365-54 324 355 cable flexible leadthrough or M63 cable flexible leadthrough or M63
opening. opening.
#-365-20 324 355 M10 bolt for cable lugs M8 bolt for cable lugs
##-300-54 260 300
##-375-IP 324 355
69-400-IP 346 400
##-430-IP 372 400
##-500-IP 432 500
##-600-IP 520 630
##-650-IP 562 630
##- 720, 750-
648 710
IP
##-860-IP 744 800
##-900-IP 795 900 -- --
##-1K0-IP 864 1000
##-1K15-IP 996 1250
##-1K2-IP 1037 1250
##-1K25-IP 1037 1250
##-1K35-IP 1170 1250
##-1K5-IP 1296 1500
##-1K75-IP 1516 1600
##-2K0-IP 1732 2 x 900
##-2K25-IP 1949 2 x 1000
##-2K5-IP 2165 2 x 1250
Note: For IP54 models 48/52-003 to -074 and 69-002 to -058 cable glands are optional.
* IP20/21 models are equipped with cable clamps instead of glands.
For data on cable connection ranges, see section 3.4.3, page 39.

Table 67 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands for 690V models
69-002-54 1.6 4 M32 (8 - 17 / 9 - 17 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
8 - 12 mm (0.32 - 0.47 in)
69-002-20 1.6 4
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-003-54 2.3 4 M32 (8 - 17 / 9 - 17 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
8 - 12 mm (0.32 - 0.47 in)
69-003-20 2.3 4
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-004-54 3.1 4 M32 (8 - 17 / 9 - 17 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
8 - 12 mm (0.32-0.47 in)
69-004-20 3.1 4
12 - 16 mm (0.47-0.63 in)
69-006-54 4.7 6 M32 (8 - 17 / 9 - 17 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
8 - 12 mm (0.32 - 0.47 in)
69-006-20 4.7 6
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-008-54 6.3 10 M32 (8-17 / 9 - 17 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
8 - 12 mm (0.32 - 0.47 in)
69-008-20 6.3 10
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-010-54 7.8 10 M32 (8-17 / 9 - 17 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
8 - 12 mm (0.32 - 0.47 in)
69-010-20 7.8 10
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-013-54 10.4 16 M32 (9 - 21 /11 - 21 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-013-20 10.4 16
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-018-54 15.3 20 M32 (9 - 21 / 11 - 21 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-018-20 15.3 20
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-021-54 17.8 25 M32 (9 - 21 / 11 - 21 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-021-20 17.8 25
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-025-54 21.2 25 M32 (9-21 / 11-21 mm) M25 (9 - 17 mm)
12 - 16 mm (0.47 - 0.63 in)
69-025-20 21.2 25
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-033-54 28 35 M50 (19 - 28 / 16 - 28 mm) M40 (16 - 28 mm)
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-033-20 28 35
22 - 28 mm (0.87 - 1.1 in)
69-042-54 36 50 M50 (19 - 28 / 16-28 mm) M40 (16 - 28 mm)
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-042-20 36 50
22 - 28 mm (0.87 - 1.1 in)
69-050-54 43 63 M50 (19 - 28 / 16 - 28 mm) M40 (16 - 28 mm)
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-050-20 43 63
22 - 28 mm (0.87 - 1.1 in)
69-058-54 49 63 M50 (19 - 28 / 16 - 28 mm) M40 (16 - 28 mm)
16 - 22 mm (0.63 - 0.87 in)
69-058-20 49 63
22 - 28 mm (0.87 - 1.1 in)
69-082-54 72 100
69-090-54 78 100
69-109-54 94 100 (Ø23-55 mm (0.9 - 2.16 in)) Cable flexible leadthrough or M63 opening.
69-146-54 126 160 (Ø17-42 mm (0.67 - 1.65 in)) Cable flexible leadthrough or M50 opening.
69-175-54 152 160
69-200-54 173 200

Table 67 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands for 690V models
69-250-IP 216 250
69-300-IP 260 300
69-375-IP 324 355
69-400-IP 346 400
69-430-IP 372 400
69-500-IP 432 500 -- --
69-595-IP 516 630
69-650-IP 562 630
69-720-IP 648 710
69-800-IP 692 800
69-905-IP 795 900
69-995-IP 864 1000
69-1K2-IP 1037 1250
69-1K4-IP 1213 1500
69-1K6-IP 1382 1600
69-1K8-IP 1555 2 x 900
69-2K0-IP 1732 2 x 900 -- --
69-2K2-IP 1900 2 x 1000
69-2K4-IP 2074 2 x 1250
69-2K6-IP 2246 2 x 1250
69-2K8-IP 2419 2 x 1500
69-3K0-IP 2592 2 x 1500
Note: For IP54 models 48/52-003 to -074 and 69-002 to -058 cable glands are optional.
* IP20/21 models are equipped with cable clamps instead of glands.
For data on cable connection ranges, see section 3.4.3, page 39

14.7.2 Fuses according to NEMA Table 68 Types and fuses
ratings Mains input fuses
Input
Model UL Ferraz-
current
FDU Class J TD Shawmut
[Arms]
Table 68 Types and fuses (A) type
Mains input fuses 48-1K0 864 1000 A4BQ1000
Input 48-1K15 996 1000 A4BQ1000
Model UL Ferraz-
current 48-1K2 1037 1200 A4BQ1200
FDU Class J TD Shawmut
[Arms] 48-1K25 1037 1200 A4BQ1200
(A) type
48-1K35 1170 1200 A4BQ1200
48-003 2.2 6 AJT6 48-1K5 1296 1500 A4BQ1500
48-004 3.5 6 AJT6 48-1K75 1516 1600 A4BQ1600
48-006 5.2 6 AJT6 48-2K0 1732 1800 A4BQ1800
48-008 6.9 10 AJT10 48-2K25 1949 2000 A4BQ2000
48-010 8.7 10 AJT10 48-2K5 2165 2500 A4BQ2500
48-013 11.3 15 AJT15
48-018 15.6 20 AJT20
48-025 21.7 25 AJT25
48-026 22 25 AJT25
48-030 26 30 AJT30
48-031 26 30 AJT30
48-036 31 35 AJT35
48-037 31 35 AJT35
48-045 39 45 AJT45
48-046 40 45 AJT45
48-058 50 60 AJT60
48-061 52 60 AJT60
48-072 64 80 AJT80
48-074 65 80 AJT80
48-088 78 100 AJT100
48-090 78 100 AJT100
48-105 91 110 AJT110
48-109 94 110 AJT110
48-142 126 125 AJT150
48-146 126 150 AJT150
48-171 152 175 AJT175
48-175 152 175 AJT175
48-205 178 200 AJT200
48-210 182 200 AJT200
48-228 197 250 AJT250
48-244 211 250 AJT250
48-250 216 250 AJT250
48-293 254 300 AJT300
48-295 256 300 AJT300
48-300 260 300 AJT300
48-365 324 350 AJT350
48-375 324 350 AJT350
48-430 372 400 AJT400
48-500 432 500 AJT500
48-600 520 600 AJT600
48-650 562 600 AJT600
48-720 648 700 A4BQ700
48-750 648 700 A4BQ700
48-860 744 800 A4BQ800
48-900 795 800 A4BQ800

14.8 Control signals
Table 69
Terminal X1 Name: Function (Default): Signal: Type:

1 +10 V +10 VDC Supply voltage +10 VDC, max 10 mA output
0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA
2 AnIn1 Process reference bipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 analogue input
mA
0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA
3 AnIn2 Off bipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 analogue input
mA
0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA
mA
0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA
mA
6 -10 V -10VDC Supply voltage -10 VDC, max 10 mA output
7 Common Signal ground 0V output
8 DigIn 1 RunL 0-8/24 VDC digital input
9 DigIn 2 RunR 0-8/24 VDC digital input
10 DigIn 3 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input
11 +24 V +24VDC Supply voltage +24 VDC, 100 mA output
13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output
14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output
20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output
21 DigOut 2 No trip 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output
22 DigIn 8 RESET 0-8/24 VDC digital input
Terminal X2
31 N/C 1 Relay 1 output
32 COM 1 Trip, active when the
AC drive is in a TRIP condition potential free change over
N/C is opened when the relay is 0.1 – 2 A relay output
33 N/O 1 active (valid for all relays) Umax = 250 VAC or 42 VDC
N/O is closed when the relay is active
(valid for all relays)
41 N/C 2 Relay 2 Output potential free change over
42 COM 2 Run, active when the 0.1 – 2 A relay output
43 N/O 2 AC drive is started Umax = 250 VAC or 42 VDC
Terminal X3
51 COM 3 potential free change over
Relay 3 Output
0.1 – 2 A relay output
52 N/O 3 Off
Umax = 250 VAC or 42 VDC
NOTE: Possible potentiometer value in range of 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ (¼ Watt) linear, where we advice to use a
linear 1 kΩ / ¼ W type potentiometer for best control linearity.

15. Menu List
On our home page in the download area, you could find a Factory setting Customer Page
"Communication information" list and a list to note Parameter
22J4 Lsq (mH/ph) [Motor]
set information .
230 Mot Protect 113
231 Mot I2t Type Trip
Factory setting Customer Page
232 Mot I2t Curr 100%
100 Preferred View 96 233 Mot I2t Time 60s
110 1st Line Process Val 234 Thermal Prot Off
120 2nd Line Current 235 Motor Class F 140°C
130 3rd Line Frequency 236 PT100 Inputs PT100 1+2+3
140 4th Line VSD Status 237 Motor PTC Off
150 5th Line DC Voltage 240 Set Handling 117
160 6th Line IGBT Temp 241 Select Set A
170 View mode Normal 100 242 Copy Set A>B
200 Main Setup 243 Default>Set A
210 Operation 99 244 Copy to CP No Copy
211 Language English 245 Load from CP No Copy
212 Select Motor M1 250 Autoreset 119
213 Drive Mode V/Hz 251 No of Trips 0
214 Ref Control Remote 252 Overtemp Off
215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 253 Overvolt D Off
216 Reset Ctrl Remote 254 Overvolt G Off
217 Local/Rem 255 Overvolt Off
2171 LocRefCtrl Standard 256 Motor Lost Off
2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 257 Locked Rotor Off
218 Lock Code? 0 258 Power Fault Off
219 Rotation R+L 259 Undervoltage Off
21A Level/Edge Level 25A Motor I2t Off
21B Supply Volts Not Defined 25B Motor I2t TT Trip
21C Supply Type AC Supply 25C PT100 Off
220 Motor Data 105 25D PT100 TT Trip
221 Motor Volts UNOM V 25E PTC Off
222 Motor Freq 50Hz 25F PTC TT Trip
223 Motor Power (PNOM) W 25G Ext Trip Off
224 Motor Curr (IMOT) A 25H Ext Trip TT Trip
225 Motor Speed (nMOT) rpm 25I Com Error Off
226 Motor Poles 4 25J Com Error TT Trip
227 Motor Cosϕ CosφNOM 25K Min Alarm Off
228 Motor Vent Self 25L Min Alarm TT Trip
229 Motor ID-Run Off 25M Max Alarm Off
22A Motor Sound F 25N Max Alarm TT Trip
22B Encoder Off 25O Over curr F Off
22C Enc Pulses 1024 25P Pump Off
22D Enc Speed 0rpm 25Q Over speed Off
22E Motor PWM 25R Ext Mot Temp Off
22E1 PWM Fswitch 3.00 kHz 25S Ext Mot TT Trip
22E2 PWM Mode Standard 25T LC Level Off
22E3 PWM Random Off 25U LC Level TT Trip
22F Enc Puls Ctr 0 25V Brk Fault Off
22G Enc Fault 25W Encoder Off
22G1 Enc F Delay Off 260 Serial Com 126
22G2 Enc F Band 10% 261 Com Type RS232/485
22G3 Max EncFCtr 0.000s 262 RS232/485 126
22H Phase order Normal 2621 Baudrate 9600
22I Motor type Async 2622 Address 1
22J PMSM Data 263 Fieldbus 127
22J1 BEMF [Motor] V 2631 Address 62
22J2 Rs (Ω/ph) [Motor] 2632 PrData Mode Basic
22J3 Lsd (mH/ph) [Motor]
CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Menu List 255

Factory setting Customer Page Factory setting Customer Page
2633 Read/Write RW 33H Brk Fault 1.00s

2634 AddPrValue 0 33I Release Torque 0%
2635 CANBaudrate 8 340 Speed 143
264 Comm Fault 128 341 Min Speed 0rpm
2641 ComFlt Mode Off 342 Stp<MinSpd Off
2642 ComFlt Time 0.5 s 343 Max Speed Sync Speed
265 Ethernet 129 344 SkipSpd 1 Lo 0rpm
2651 IP Address 0.0.0.0 345 SkipSpd 1 Hi 0rpm
2652 MAC Address 000000000000 346 SkipSpd 2 Lo 0rpm
2653 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 347 SkipSpd 2 Hi 0rpm
2654 Gateway 0.0.0.0 348 Jog Speed 50rpm
2655 DHCP Off 350 Torques 146
266 FB Signal 130 351 Max Torque 120%
2661 FB Signal 1 0 352 IxR Comp Off
2662 FB Signal 2 0 353 IxR CompUsr 0%
2663 FB Signal 3 0 354 Flux optim Off
2664 FB Signal 4 0 355 Max Power Off
2665 FB Signal 5 0 360 Preset Ref 148
2666 FB Signal 6 0 361 Motor Pot Non Volatile
2667 FB Signal 7 0 362 Preset Ref 1 0 rpm
266A FB Signal 10 0 365 Preset Ref 4 750 rpm
266B FB Signal 11 0 366 Preset Ref 5 1000 rpm
266C FB Signal 12 0 367 Preset Ref 6 1250 rpm
266D FB Signal 13 0 368 Preset Ref 7 1500 rpm
266E FB Signal 14 0 369 Keyb Ref Mot Pot
266F FB Signal 15 0 380 ProcCtrlPID 150
266G FB Signal 16 0 381 PID Control Off
269 FB Status 382 PID Autotune Off
300 Process 130 383 PID P Gain 1.0
310 Set/View ref 0rpm 384 PID I Time 1.00s
320 Proc Setting 131 385 PID D Time 0.00s
321 Proc Source Speed 386 PID<MinSpd Off
322 Proc Unit rpm 387 PID Act Marg 0
323 User Unit 0 388 PID Stdy Tst Off
324 Process Min 0 389 PID Stdy Mar 0
325 Process Max 0 390 Pump/Fan Ctrl 154
326 Ratio Linear 391 Pump enable Off
327 F(Val) PrMin Min 392 No of Drives 2
328 F(Val) PrMax Max 393 Select Drive Sequence
330 Start/Stop 135 394 Change Cond Both
331 Acc Time 10.00s 395 Change Timer 50h
332 Dec Time 10.00s 396 Drives on Ch 0
333 Acc MotPot 16.00s 397 Upper Band 10%
334 Dec MotPot 16.00s 398 Lower Band 10%
335 Acc<Min Spd 10.00s 399 Start Delay 0s
336 Dec<Min Spd 10.00s 39A Stop Delay 0s
337 Acc Rmp Linear 39B Upp Band Lim 0%
338 Dec Rmp Linear 39C Low Band Lim 0%
339 Start Mode Fast 39D Settle Start 0s
33A Spinstart Off 39E TransS Start 60%
33B Stop Mode Decel 39F Settle Stop 0s
33C Brk Release 0.00s 39G TransS Stop 60%
33D Release Spd 0rpm 39H Run Time 1 00:00:00
33E Brk Engage 0.00s 39H1 Rst Run Tm1 No
33F Brk Wait 0.00s 39I Run Time 2 00:00:00
33G Vector Brake Off 39I1 Rst Run Tm2 No
256 Menu List CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

39J Run Time 3 00:00:00 5136 AnIn1 FcMax Max

39J1 Rst Run Tm3 No 5137 AnIn1 ValMax 0
39K Run Time 4 00:00:00 5138 AnIn1 Oper Add+
39K1 Rst Run Tm4 No 5139 AnIn1 Filt 0.1s
39L Run Time05 00:00:00 513A AnIn1 Enabl On
39L1 Rst Run Tm5 No 514 AnIn2 Fc Off 172
39M Run Time 6 00:00:00 515 AnIn2 Setup 4-20mA
39M1 Rst Run Tm6 No 516 AnIn2 Advan 173
39N Pump 123456 5161 AnIn2 Min 4mA
39P No of Backup 0 5162 AnIn2 Max 20.00mA
400 Monitor/Prot 161 5163 AnIn2 Bipol 20.00mA
410 Load Monitor 5164 AnIn2 FcMin Min
411 Alarm Select Off 5165 AnIn2 ValMin 0
412 Alarm trip Off 5166 AnIn2 FcMax Max
413 Ramp Alarm Off 5167 AnIn2 ValMax 0
414 Start Delay 2s 5168 AnIn2 Oper Add+
415 Load Type Basic 5169 AnIn2 Filt 0.1s
416 Max Alarm 516A AnIn2 Enabl On
4161 MaxAlarmMar 15% 517 AnIn3 Fc Off 173
4162 MaxAlarmDel 0.1s 518 AnIn3 Setup 4-20mA
417 Max Pre alarm 519 AnIn3 Advan
4171 MaxPreAlMar 10% 5191 AnIn3 Min 4mA
4172 MaxPreAlDel 0.1s 5192 AnIn3 Max 20.00mA
418 Min Pre Alarm 5193 AnIn3 Bipol 20.00mA
4181 MinPreAlMar 10% 5194 AnIn3 FcMin Min
4182 MinPreAlDel 0.1s 5195 AnIn3 ValMin 0
419 Min Alarm 5196 AnIn3 FcMax Max
4191 MinAlarmMar 15% 5197 AnIn3 ValMax 0
4192 MinAlarmDel 0.1s 5198 AnIn3 Oper Add+
41A Autoset Alrm No 5199 AnIn3 Filt 0.1s
41B Normal Load 100% 519A AnIn3 Enabl On
41C Load Curve 51A AnIn4 Fc Off 173
41C1 Load Curve 1 100% 51B AnIn4 Setup 4-20mA
41C2 Load Curve 2 100% 51C AnIn4 Advan
41C3 Load Curve 3 100% 51C1 AnIn4 Min 4mA
41C4 Load Curve 4 100% 51C2 AnIn4 Max 20.00mA
41C5 Load Curve 5 100% 51C3 AnIn4 Bipol 20.00mA
41C6 Load Curve 6 100% 51C4 AnIn4 FcMin Min
41C7 Load Curve 7 100% 51C5 AnIn4 ValMin 0
41C8 Load Curve 8 100% 51C6 AnIn4 FcMax Max
41C9 Load Curve 9 100% 51C7 AnIn4 ValMax 0
41D MinAbsMarg 3% 51C8 AnIn4 Oper Add+
420 Process Prot 166 51C9 AnIn4 Filt 0.1s
421 Low Volt OR On 51CA AnIn4 Enabl On
422 Rotor Locked Off 520 Dig Inputs 174
423 Motor lost Off 521 DigIn 1 RunL
424 Overvolt Ctrl On 522 DigIn 2 RunR
500 I/Os 168 523 DigIn 3 Off
510 An Inputs 524 DigIn 4 Off
511 AnIn1 Fc Process Ref 525 DigIn 5 Off
512 AnIn1 Setup 4-20mA 526 DigIn 6 Off
513 AnIn1 Advn 527 DigIn 7 Off
5131 AnIn1 Min 4mA 528 DigIn 8 Reset
10.00V/ 529 B(oard)1 DigIn 1 Off
5132 AnIn1 Max
20.00mA
52A B(oard)1 DigIn 2 Off
10.00V/
5133 AnIn1 Bipol 52B B(oard)1 DigIn 3 Off
20.00mA
52C B(oard)2 DigIn 1 Off
5134 AnIn1 FcMin Min
52D B(oard)2 DigIn 2 Off
5135 AnIn1 ValMin 0

52E B(oard)2 DigIn 3 Off 564 VIO 2 Source Off

52F B(oard)3 DigIn 1 Off 565 VIO 3 Dest Off
52G B(oard)3 DigIn 2 Off 566 VIO 3 Source Off
52H B(oard)3 DigIn 3 Off 567 VIO 4 Dest Off
530 An Outputs 176 568 VIO 4 Source Off
531 AnOut1 Fc Speed 569 VIO 5 Dest Off
532 AnOut1 Setup 4-20mA 56A VIO 5 Source Off
533 AnOut1 Adv 56B VIO 6 Dest Off
5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA 56C VIO 6 Source Off
5332 AnOut 1 Max 20.0mA 56D VIO 7 Dest Off
5333 AnOut1Bipol -10.00-10.00 V 56E VIO 7 Source Off
5334 AnOut1 FcMin Min 56F VIO 8 Dest Off
5335 AnOut1 VaMin 0 56G VIO 8 Source Off
5336 AnOut1 FcMax Max 600 Logical&Timers 184
5337 AnOut1 VaMax 0 610 Comparators
534 AnOut2 FC Torque 611 CA1 Setup
535 AnOut2 Setup 4-20mA 6111 CA1 Value Speed
536 AnOut2 Advan 6112 CA1 Level HI 300rpm
5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA 6113 CA1 Level LO 200rpm
5362 AnOut 2 Max 20.0mA 6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis
5363 AnOut2Bipol -10.00-10.00 V 6115 CA1 Polar Unipolar
5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min 612 CA2 Setup 190
5365 AnOut2 VaMin 0 6121 CA2 Value Torque
5366 AnOut2 FcMax Max 6122 CA2 Level HI 20%
5367 AnOut2 VaMax 0 6123 CA2 Level LO 10%
540 Dig Outputs 180 6124 CA2 Type Hysteresis
541 DigOut 1 Ready 6125 CA2 Polar Unipolar
542 DigOut 2 No Trip 613 CA3 Setup 191
550 Relays 182 6131 CA3 Value Process Val
551 Relay 1 Trip 6132 CA3 Level HI 300rpm
552 Relay 2 Run 6133 CA3 Level LO 200rpm
553 Relay 3 Off 6134 CA3 Type Hysteresis
554 B(oard)1 Relay 1 Off 6135 CA3 Polar Unipolar
555 B1 Relay 2 Off 614 CA4 Setup 192
556 B1 Relay 3 Off 6141 CA4 Value Process Err
557 B2 Relay 1 Off 6142 CA4 Level HI 100 rpm
558 B2 Relay 2 Off 6143 CA4 Level LO - 100 rpm
559 B2 Relay 3 Off 6144 CA4 Type Window
55A B3 Relay 1 Off 6145 CA4 Polar Bipolar
55B B3 Relay 2 Off 615 CD Setup 194
55C B3 Relay 3 Off 6151 CD1 Run
55D Relay Adv 6152 CD2 DigIn 1
55D1 Relay 1 Mode N.O 6153 CD3 Trip
55D2 Relay 2 Mode N.O 6154 CD4 Ready
55D3 Relay 3 Mode N.O 620 Logic Y 195
55D4 B1R1 Mode N.O 621 Y Comp 1 CA1
55D5 B1R2 Mode N.O 622 Y Operator 1 &
55D6 B1R3 Mode N.O 623 Y Comp 2 !A2
55D7 B2R1 Mode N.O 624 Y Operator 2 &
55D8 B2R2 Mode N.O 625 Y Comp 3 CD1
55D9 B2R3 Mode N.O 630 Logic Z 197
55DA B3R1 Mode N.O 631 Z Comp 1 CA1
55DB B3R2 Mode N.O 632 Z Operator 1 &
55DC B3R3 Mode N.O 633 Z Comp2 !A2
560 Virtual I/Os 183 634 Z Operator 2 &
561 VIO 1 Dest Off 635 Z Comp 3 CD1
562 VIO 1 Source Off 640 Timer1 198
563 VIO 2 Dest Off 641 Timer1 Trig Off

642 Timer1 Mode Off 7311 Reset RunTm No

643 Timer1 Delay 0:00:00 732 Mains Time 00:00:00
644 Timer 1 T1 0:00:00 733 Energy kWh
645 Timer1 T2 0:00:00 7331 Rst Energy No
649 Timer1 Value 0:00:00 800 View TripLog
650 Timer2 199 810 Trip Message (log list 1) 212
651 Timer2 Trig Off 811 Process Value
652 Timer2 Mode Off 812 Speed
653 Timer2 Delay 0:00:00 813 Torque
654 Timer 2 T1 0:00:00 814 Shaft Power
655 Timer2 T2 0:00:00 815 El Power
659 Tmer2 Value 0:00:00 816 Current
660 Counters 817 Output voltage
661 Counter 1 818 Frequency
6611 C1 Trig Off 819 DC voltage
6612 C1 Reset Off 81A Heatsink Tmp
6613 C1 High Val 0 81B PT100_1, 2, 3
6614 C1 Low Val 0 81C VSD Status
6615 C1 DecTimer Off 81D DigIn status
6619 C1 Value 0 81E DigOut status
662 Counter 2 81F AnIn 1 2
6621 C2 Trig Off 81G AnIn 3 4
6622 C2 Reset Off 81H AnOut 1 2
6623 C2 High Val 0 81I IO Status B1
6624 C2 Low Val 0 81J IO Status B2
6625 C2 DecTimer Off 81K IO Status B3
6629 C2 Value 0 81L Run Time
700 Oper/Status 205 81M Mains Time
710 Operation 81N Energy
711 Process Val 81O Process reference
712 Speed 81P VIO Status
713 Torque 81Q PT100PT100_4_5_6
714 Shaft Power 820 Trip Message 821- 82P (log list 2) 213
715 El Power 830 Trip Message 831 - 83P (log list 3)
716 Current 840 Trip Message 841 - 84P (log list 4)
717 Output volt 850 Trip Message 851 - 85P (log list 5)
718 Frequency 860 Trip Message 861 - 86P (log list 6)
719 DC Voltage 870 Trip Message 871 - 87P (log list 7)
71A Heatsink Tmp 880 Trip Message 881 - 88P (log list 8)
71B PT100_1_2_3 890 Trip Message 891 - 89P (log list 9)
71C PT100_4_5_6 8A0 Reset Trip No 214
720 Status 207 900 System Data
721 AC drive Status 920 AC drive Data 214
722 Warning 921 AC drive Type
723 DigIn Status 922 Software
724 DigOut Status 9221 Build Info
725 AnIn 1 2 9222 Build ID
726 AnIn 3 4 923 Unit name 0
727 AnOut 1 2 924 Bluetooth ID
728 IO Status B1 930 Clock
729 IO Status B2 931 Time
72A IO Status B3 932 Date
72B Area D Stat 933 Weekday
72B1 Area D LSB
72B2 Area D MSB
72C VIO Statsus
730 Stored Val 211
731 Run Time 00:00:00

Index Control signal connections ........51 F
Mains supply ......................29, 55 Factory settings .............................. 118
Motor earth ..............................29 Fail safe ........................................... 71
Symbols Motor output ......................29, 55 Fans ............................................... 154
+10VDC Supply voltage ................253 Safety earth .........................29, 55 Feedback 'Status' input .................... 70
+24VDC Supply voltage ................253 Control Panel memory Fieldbus ................................... 79, 229
Copy all settings to Control Fixed MASTER ....................... 74, 154
Numerics Panel .......................................118 Flux optimization .......................... 147
-10VDC Supply voltage .................253 Frequency ...............................168 Frequency
Menu ....109, 110, 126, 129, 130, 146, Control signal connections ...............51 Frequency priority .................... 63
147, 148, 162, 166 Control signals ...........................48, 53 Jog Frequency ........................ 146
4-20mA .........................................170 Edge-controlled ................65, 104 Maximum Frequency ..... 143, 144
Menu......................................168, 170 Level-controlled ................65, 104 Minimum Frequency ............. 143
Counter-clockwise rotary field .......174 Preset Frequency .................... 148
A Current ............................................49 Skip Frequency .............. 144, 145
Abbreviations ...................................12 Current control (0-20mA) ...............54 Frequency priority ........................... 63
Acceleration ...........................135, 138 Fuses and glands ............................ 248
Acceleration ramp ...................138 D
Acceleration time ....................135 Date .........................................86, 216 G
Ramp type ..............................138 DC-link residual voltage ....................2 General electrical specifications ..... 242
Alarm trip ......................................161 Deceleration ...................................136 Gland kits ..................................... 227
Alternating MASTER ..... 70, 73, 74, 154 Deceleration time ...................136 Global parameters ......................... 117
Analogue comparators ...................184 Ramp type ..............................138
Analogue input ..............................168 Declaration of Conformity ...............11 H
AnIn1 .....................................168 Default ...........................................118 Handheld Control Panel 2.0 ......... 226
AnIn2 .............................172, 173 Definitions .......................................12 Hydrophore controller .................... 69
Offset .............................169, 176 DeviceNet ........................................79
Analogue Output ...........176, 179, 253 Digital comparators ........................184 I
AnOut 1 .........................176, 179 Digital inputs
I/O Board ...................................... 229
Output configuration .....176, 179 Board Relay ............................182
I/O board option ............................. 69
AND operator ...............................195 DigIn 1 ...................................174
I2t protection
AnIn2 ............................................172 DigIn 2 ...................................175
Motor I2t Current ......... 113, 115
AnIn3 ............................................173 DigIn 3 ...................................175
Motor I2t Type ...................... 113
AnIn4 ............................................173 Dismantling and scrapping ..............11
ID run ........................................... 108
Autoreset .....................2, 65, 119, 219 Display .......................................83, 88
Identification Run ................... 66, 108
Double-ended connection ................53
IEC269 ......................................... 248
B Drive mode ....................................100
Industrial Ethernet .................. 79, 229
Baudrate ..........................................92 Frequency ...............................168
Interrupt ............................... 129, 130
Brake function .......................139, 140 Drives on Change ..........................155
IT Mains supply ................................ 2
Bake release time ....................139 IxR Compensation ........................ 146
Brake ......................................141 E
Brake Engage Time ................141 Edge control .......................65, 98, 104 J
Brake wait time ......................141 Electrical ........................................206
Jog Frequency ............................... 146
Release speed ..........................141 Electrical specification ....................242
Vector Brake ...........................141 EMC ................................................29
K
Brake functions Current control (0-20mA) ........54
Frequency ...............................168 Double-ended connection .........53 Keyboard reference ........................ 149
Brake resistors ................................227 RFI mains filter .........................29 Keys .......................................... 86, 89
Single-ended connection ...........53 - Key .................................. 88, 91
C Twisted cables ...........................54 + Key ................................. 88, 91
Emergency stop ................................77 Control keys ....................... 86, 89
Cable specifications ..........................36
EmoSoftCom .................................227 ENTER key ....................... 88, 91
Cascade controller ............................69
EN60204-1 ......................................11 ESCAPE key ...................... 88, 91
CE-marking .....................................11
EN61800-3 ......................................11 Function keys ..................... 88, 91
Change Condition .........................155
EN61800-5-1 ..................................11 NEXT key .......................... 88, 91
change sign of a value ..........87, 90, 92
Enable ..........................64, 86, 89, 174 PREVIOUS key ................. 88, 91
Change Timer ...............................155
EtherCAT ................................79, 229 RUN L ............................... 86, 89
Checklist ..........................................74
EtherNet ..........................................79 RUN R .............................. 86, 89
Clockwise rotary field ....................174
EtherNet IP .....................................79 STOP/RESET ................... 86, 89
Comparators ..................................184
EXOR operator ..............................195 Toggle Key ......................... 87, 90
Connecting control signals ...............51
Connections Expression ......................................195
Brake chopper connections .......29 External Control Panel ...................226
261
L (244) .......................................118 (338) ...................................... 138
LCD display ..............................83, 88 (245) .......................................119 (339) ...................................... 138
Level control ............................65, 104 (250) .......................................119 (33A) ..................................... 139
Liquid cooling ...............................233 (251) .......................................120 (33B) ...................................... 139
Load default ...................................118 (252) .......................................120 (33C) ..................................... 139
Load monitor ...........................67, 161 (253) .......................................120 (33D) ..................................... 141
Local/Remote ................................102 (254) .......................................121 (33E) ...................................... 141
Lock code ..............................103, 105 (255) .......................................121 (33F) ...................................... 141
Long motor cables ...........................31 (256) .......................................121 (33G) ..................................... 141
Low Voltage Directive .....................11 (257) .......................................121 (33H1) ................................... 141
Lower Band ...................................156 (258) .......................................121 (341) ...................................... 143
Lower Band Limit ..........................158 (259) .......................................122 (342) ...................................... 143
(25A) ......................................122 (343) ...................................... 144
M (25B) ......................................122 (344) ...................................... 144
Machine Directive ...........................11 (25C) ......................................122 (345) ...................................... 145
Main menu ......................................92 (25D) ......................................122 (346) ...................................... 145
Mains supply .......................29, 47, 55 (25E) ......................................122 (347) ...................................... 145
Maintenance ..................................223 (25F) ......................................123 (348) ...................................... 146
Manis cables ....................................26 (25G) ......................................123 (351) ...................................... 146
Max Frequency ......................135, 144 (25H) .....................................123 (354) ...................................... 147
Memory ...........................................66 (25I) .......................................123 (361) ...................................... 148
Menu (25J) .......................................123 (362) ...................................... 148
(110) ........................................97 (25K) ......................................124 (363) ...................................... 149
(120) ..................................98, 99 (25L) ......................................124 (364) ...................................... 149
(210) ........................................99 (25M) .....................................124 (365) ...................................... 149
(211) ........................................99 (25N) .....................................124 (366) ...................................... 149
(212) ......................................100 (25O) .....................................124 (367) ...................................... 149
(213) ......................................100 (25P) ......................................124 (368) ...................................... 148
(214) ......................................101 (25Q) .....................................125 (369) ...................................... 149
(215) ......................................101 (25R) ......................................125 (380) ...................................... 150
(216) ......................................102 (25S) .......................................125 (381) ...................................... 150
(217) ......................................102 (25T) ......................................125 (383) ...................................... 150
(218) ..............................103, 105 (25U) ......................................125 (384) ...................................... 150
(219) ......................................103 (260) .......................................126 (385) ...................................... 150
(21A) ......................................104 (261) .......................................126 (386) ...................................... 151
(21B) ......................................104 (262) .......................................126 (387) ...................................... 151
(220) ......................................105 (2621) .....................................126 (388) ...................................... 152
(221) ......................................105 (2622) .....................................127 (389) ...................................... 152
(222) ......................................106 (263) .......................................127 (391) ...................................... 154
(223) ......................................106 (2631) .....................................127 (392) ...................................... 154
(224) ......................................106 (2632) .....................................127 (393) ...................................... 154
(225) ......................................107 (2633) .....................................127 (394) ...................................... 155
(226) ......................................107 (2634) .....................................128 (395) ...................................... 155
(227) ......................................107 (264) .......................................128 (396) ...................................... 155
(228) ......................................107 (265) .......................................129 (398) ...................................... 156
(229) ......................................108 (269) .......................................130 (399) ...................................... 157
(22A) ......................................108 (310) .......................................130 (39A) ..................................... 157
(22B) ......................................108 (320) .......................................131 (39B) ...................................... 157
(22C) ......................................109 (321) .......................................131 (39C) ..................................... 158
(22D) .....................................109 (322) .......................................132 (39D) ..................................... 158
(230) ......................................113 (323) .......................................132 (39E) ...................................... 158
(231) ......................................113 (324) .......................................133 (39F) ...................................... 159
(232) ......................................113 (325) .......................................133 (39G) ..................................... 159
(233) ......................................113 (326) .......................................134 (39H-39M) ............................ 160
(234) ......................................115 (327) .......................................134 (410) ...................................... 161
(235) ......................................115 (328) .......................................134 (411) ...................................... 161
(236) ......................................115 (331) .......................................135 (412) ...................................... 161
(237) ......................................116 (332) .......................................136 (413) ...................................... 161
(240) ......................................117 (333) .......................................136 (414) ...................................... 161
(241) ......................................117 (334) .......................................136 (415) ...................................... 162
(242) ......................................117 (335) .......................................137 (416) ...................................... 162
(243) ......................................118 (336) .......................................137 (4162) .................................... 163
(337) .......................................138 (417) ...................................... 163
262
(4171) ....................................163 (6143) .....................................193 (830) ...................................... 213
(4172) ....................................163 (6144) .....................................193 (8A0) ..................................... 214
(418) ......................................163 (6145) .....................................193 (900) ...................................... 214
(4181) ....................................163 (6151) .....................................194 (920) ...................................... 214
(4182) ....................................164 (6152) .....................................194 (922) ...................................... 214
(419) ......................................164 (6153) .....................................194 33F ........................................ 141
(4191) ....................................164 (6154) .....................................194 616 ........................................ 190
(4192) ............................164, 166 (620) .......................................195 Minimum Frequency .................... 137
(41A) ......................................164 (621) .......................................195 Modbus ........................................... 79
(41B) ......................................165 (622) ...............................195, 196 Modbus/TCP .......................... 79, 229
(41C) ......................................165 (623) ...............................195, 196 Monitor function
(421) ......................................166 (624) .......................................195 Alarm Select ........................... 165
(422) ......................................167 (625) .......................................195 Auto set .................................. 164
(423) ......................................167 (630) .......................................197 Delay time ............................. 161
(424) ......................................167 (631) .......................................197 Max Alarm ............................. 161
(511) ......................................168 (632) .......................................197 Overload .......................... 67, 161
(512) ......................................169 (633) .......................................197 Ramp Enable ......................... 161
(513) ......................................170 (634) .......................................197 Response delay ....... 162, 163, 165
(514) ......................................172 (635) .......................................197 Start delay .............................. 161
(515) ......................................172 (640) .......................................198 Motor cables .................................... 29
(516) ......................................173 (641) .......................................198 Motor cos phi (power factor) ......... 107
(517) ......................................173 (642) .......................................198 Motor data .................................... 105
(518) ......................................173 (643) .......................................198 Motor frequency ........................... 107
(519) ......................................173 (644) .......................................199 Motor I2t Current ......................... 220
(51A) ......................................173 (645) .......................................199 Motor identification run ............... 108
(51B) ......................................173 (649) .......................................199 Motor Lost .................................... 121
(51C) ......................................174 (650) .......................................199 Motor lost ..................................... 167
(521) ......................142, 143, 174 (651) .......................................199 Motor Potentiometer ............ 148, 174
(522) ......................................175 (652) .......................................199 Motor potentiometer ..................... 174
(529-52H) ..............................175 (653) .......................................200 Motor PTC ....................... 50, 51, 116
(531) ......................................176 (654) .......................................200 Motor ventilation .......................... 107
(532) ......................................176 (655) .......................................200 Motors .............................................. 7
(533) ......................................177 (659) .......................................200 Motors in parallel ............................ 45
(534) ......................................179 (711) .......................................205 MotPot .......................................... 136
(535) ......................................179 (712) .......................................205 Multi-motor application ................ 100
(536) ......................................179 (713) .......................................205
(541) ......................................180 (714) .......................................205 N
(542) ......................................181 (715) .......................................206 Nominal motor frequency ............. 144
(551) ......................................182 (716) .......................................206 Number of drives .......................... 154
(552) ......................................182 (717) .......................................206
(553) ......................................182 (718) .......................................206 O
(55D) .....................................182 (719) .......................................206 Operation ........................................ 99
(561) ......................................183 (71A) ......................................206 Options ................................... 54, 225
(562) ......................................184 (71B) ......................................207 External Control Panel (ECP) ...226
(563-56G) ..............................184 (720) .......................................207 I/O Board .............................. 229
(610) ......................................184 (721) .......................................207 OR operator .................................. 195
(6111) ....................................185 (722) .......................................208 Output chokes ............................... 233
(6112) ....................................187 (723) .......................................209 Output Voltage ............................. 206
(6113) ....................................189 (724) .......................................209 Overload ................................. 67, 161
(6114) ....................................189 (725) .......................................210 Overload alarm ................................ 67
(6115) ....................................189 (726) .......................................210
(6121) ....................................190 (727) .......................................210 P
(6122) ....................................190 (728-72A) .......................210, 211
Parameter sets
(6123) ....................................190 (730) .......................................211
Load default values ................. 118
(6124) ....................................191 (731) .......................................211
Load parameter sets from
(6125) ....................................191 (7311) .....................................211
Control Panel ......................... 119
(6131) ....................................191 (732) .......................................211
Parameter Set Selection ............ 61
(6132) ....................................191 (733) .......................................212
Select a Parameter set ............. 117
(6133) ....................................192 (7331) .....................................212
PID control ..................................... 72
(6134) ....................................192 (800) .......................................212
PID Controller .............................. 150
(6135) ....................................192 (810) .......................................212
Closed loop PID control ........ 150
(6141) ....................................192 (811-81N) ..............................213
Feedback signal ...................... 150
(6142) ....................................193 (820) .......................................213
263
PID D Time ...........................150 Standby supply board .....................230
PID I Time ............................150 Start Delay .....................................157
PID P Gain ............................150 Start/Stop settings ..........................135
Priority ............................................63 Status indications .......................83, 88
Process Protection ..........................166 Stop categories .................................77
Process Value .................................205 Stop command ...............................174
Product standard, EMC ...................10 Stop Delay .....................................157
Profibus DP .....................................79 Stripping lengths ..............................36
Profinet IO ......................................79 Switches ...........................................49
Programming ...................................92 Switching frequency .......................108
PT100 Inputs ........................115, 116 Switching in motor cables ................31
PTC/PT100 board ........................229
Pump size ........................................74 T
Pump/Fan Control ........................154 Technical Data ...............................235
Terminal connections ......................48
Q Test Run ........................................108
Quick Setup Card ..............................7 Time ........................................86, 216
Timer .............................................155
R Top cover .......................................233
Reference Torque ...........................................146
Frequency ...............................166 Transition Frequency .....................158
Motor potentiometer ..............174 Trip ...........................................86, 89
Reference signal ..............100, 130 Trip causes and remedial action .....218
Set reference value ..................130 Trip Message log ............................212
Torque ...................................167 Trips, warnings and limits ..............217
View reference value ...............130 Twisted cables ..................................54
Reference control ...........................101 Type code number .............................9
Reference signal .............................101
Relay output ..................................182 U
Relay 1 ...................................182 Underload ........................................67
Relay 2 ...................................182 Underload alarm ............................161
Relay 3 ...................................182 Unlock Code .................................103
Release speed .................................141 Upper Band ...................................156
Remote control ................................64 Upper Band Limit ..........................157
Reset command .............................174
Reset control ..................................102 V
Resolution .......................................97 V/Hz Mode ...................................100
RFI mains filter ...............................29 Vector Brake ..................................141
Rotation ........................................103 Ventilation .....................................107
RS232/485 ..............................79, 126 View reference value .......................130
RTC- Real time clock ....................229 Voltage .............................................49
RUN .........................................86, 89 VSD Data ......................................214
Run command ...........................86, 89
Run Left command ........................174 W
Run Right command .....................174 Weekday ..................................86, 216
Running motor ..............................139 Wiring .............................................73
S
Safe Stop option ............................231
Select Drive ...................................154
Serial communication ....................229
Settle Time ....................................158
Setup menu .....................................92
Menu structure .........................91
Shaft power ....................................205
Signal ground ................................253
Single-ended connection ..................53
Software .........................................214
Sound characteristic .......................108
Speed .............................................205
Spinstart ........................................139
Standards .........................................10
264
TECHNICAL CENTERS
NORDIC CENTRAL EUROPE BENELUX INDIA

CG Drives & Automation (Germany, Austria, Switzerland) CG Drives & Automation CG Power and Industrial Solutions Ltd.
Mörsaregatan 12 CG Drives & Automation Polakkers 5 Drive & Automation Division
Box 222 25 Gießerweg 3 5531 NX BLADEL Plot. No, 09, Phase II, New Industrial Area
SE-250 24 HELSINGBORG D-38855 WERNIGERODE Postbus 132 462046 MANDIDEEP
Sweden Germany 5530 AC BLADEL India
Phone: +46 42 16 99 00 Phone: +49 (0)3943-920 50 The Netherlands Phone: +91 748 042 642 1
Fax: +46 42 16 99 49 Fax: +49 (0)3943-920 55 Phone: +31 (0)497 389 222 drives.service@cgglobal.com
info.se@cgglobal.com info.de@cgglobal.com Fax: +31 (0)497 386 275
info.nl@cgglobal.com
Document set: 01-5323-01r6
Instruction manual, 01-5325-01r5
Quick setup card, 01-5327-01r2
CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB

Mörsaregatan 12
Box 222 25
SE-250 24 Helsingborg
Sweden
2019-10-07
T +46 42 16 99 00
F +46 42 16 99 49
www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.com

Emotron Fdu2 0 - Manual - 01 5325 01r5.en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Emotron Fdu2 0 - Manual - 01 5325 01r5.en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Emotron Fdu2 0 - Manual - 01 5325 01r5.en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Emotron FDU 2.

Valid from Software version 4.42

Document number: 01-5325-01

NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoid Earthing

! Failure to follow these instructions can

Warning! ! This AC drive has an earth leakage

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 1

Voltage tests (Megger) DC-link residual voltage

Power factor capacitors for

Precautions during Autoreset

2 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 3

4 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

14. Technical Data ........................................... 235

15. Menu List ................................................... 255

Index ........................................................... 261

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 5

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Introduction 7

8 Introduction CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Type code FDU 48 -017 -20 C E – – – A – N N N N A N – –

Fig. 1 Type code number

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Introduction 9

1.5 Standards requirements according to category C3, for a motor cable

10 Introduction CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Market Standard Description

EMC Directive 2014/30/EU

1.6 Dismantling and 1.6.1 Disposal of old electrical and

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Introduction 11

1.7.1 Abbreviations and symbols

DSP Digital signals processor

Name Description Quantity

IIN Nominal input current of AC drive ARMS

12 Introduction CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

2.1 Lifting instructions

Recommended for AC drive models

Single cabinet drives can be lifted/transported safely using

Cable/chain angle A Permitted load

45 ° 4 800 N (1080 lbf)

60 ° 6 400 N (1439 lbf)

90 ° 13 600N (3057 lbf)

Regarding lifting instructions for other cabinet sizes, please

Fig. 2 Lifting AC drive model -090 to -365.

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Mounting 13

Table 5 Mounting and cooling

2xFDU a 200 (7.9) 200 (7.9) 100 (3.9)

NOTE: When a 300 to 3K0 model is placed between

14 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Fig. 6 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication,

Fig. 5 Emotron FDU Model 48/52-003 to 018

Table 6 Dimensions connected to Fig. 5.

416 396 128.5 37 10 202.6 203

CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5 Mounting 15

Table 7 Dimensions connected to Fig. 8 and Fig. 10.

512 492 128.5 24.8 10 178 292

16 Mounting CG Drives & Automation, 01-5325-01r5

Fig. 13 Cable interface for mains, motor and communication,

Fig. 12 Emotron FDU Model 69-002 to 025 (Frame size

Table 8 Dimensions connected to Fig. 12.

512 492 128.5 24.8 10 178 314 (12.36)